En 428 User 1

428XL
V2.0
User’s Manual
Vol. 1
Ref. No. 0311430 December 4, 2006

To contact SERCEL
Europe North America
Nantes, France Houston, USA
Sales; Customer Support; Sales; Customer Support
Manufacturing & Repair. Manufacturing & Repair;
B.P. 30439, 16 rue de Bel Air Tel: +1 281 492 66 88, Fax: +1 281 579 75 05
44474 Carquefou Cedex Hot-Line: +1 281 492 66 88
Tel: +33 2 40 30 11 81, Fax: +33 2 40 30 19 48 E-mail: sales.hou@sercelus.com
Hot-Line: Land: +33 2 40 30 58 88 training.hou@sercelus.com
Marine: +33 2 40 30 59 59 customer.support@sercelus.com
E-mail: sales@sercel.fr Calgary
customer.support@sercel.fr Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing
www.sercel.com Tel: +1 403 275 3544, Fax: +1 403 295 1805
St Gaudens, France E-mail: sales.cal@sercelus.com
Vibrator Customer Support;
Vibrator Manufacturing & Repair;
Middle East
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair.
Tel: +33 5 61 89 90 00, Fax: +33 5 61 89 90 45 Dubai, U. A. E.
Hot Line: +33 5 61 89 90 91 Customer Support.
Tel: +971 4 8832142, Fax: +971 4 8832143
Les Ulis, France Hot Line: +971 50 6451752
Sales; Customer Support E-mail: sercel@emirates.net.ae
Tel: +33 1 69 93 83 60, Fax: +33 1 69 81 78 09
E-mail: sales.sdd@Sercel.fr
Far East
Brest, France
Sales; Customer Support Beijing, P. R. of China
Sales; Customer Support.
Tel: +33 2 98 05 29 05; Fax: +33 2 98 05 52 41
Tel: +86 106 43 76 661, Fax: +86 106 43 76 367
E-mail: sales@sercel.fr
Xian, P. R. of China
Toulon, France Manufacturing & Repair.
Sales; Customer Support Tel / Fax: +86 29 8222 9504
Tel: +33 4 94 21 69 92; Fax: +33 4 94 21 73 44
E-mail: sales.msd@sercel.fr Xushui, P. R. of China
Manufacturing & Repair.
Alfreton, U. K.
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair; Tel:+86.312.8648355, Fax:+86.312.8648441
Customer Support. Singapore
Tel: +44 1 773 605 078, Fax: +44 1 773 541 778 Streamer Manufacturing & Repair;
E-mail: sales@sercelengland.com Customer Support.
customer.support@sercelengland.com Tel:+65 6 545 0411, Fax:+65 6 545 1418
Australia
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair
Russia OBC Equipment
Moscow, Russia Tel:+61 2 8832 5500, Fax:+61 2 8832 5555
Sales; Customer Support.
Tel: +7 495 254 06 59, Fax: +7 495 254 66 80 Asia
E-mail: customersupport.rus@sercel.fr
Dehradun, India
Surgut, Russia Customer Support.
Customer Support Tel: +91 135 2761 078 / 2763 387,
Tel / Fax: +7 3462 28 92 50 Fax: +91 135 2763 133
E-mail: surgsav@surgut.ru E-mail: sercel@nde.vsnl.net.in
428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1
In no event shall SERCEL be liable for incidental or consequential damages or related expenses
resulting from the use of this product, or arising out of or related to this manual or the information
contained in it, even if SERCEL has been advised, or knew or should have known of the possibility of
such damages.
The information included in this documentation is believed to be accurate and reliable. However,
SERCEL reserves the right to make changes to its products or specifications at any time, without notice,
in order to improve design or performance and to supply the best possible product. This documentation
does not form in any way a contractual agreement of sales promise on the part of SERCEL.
Software mentioned in this documentation is sold under a precise licence agreement and as such the
documentation may cover technical areas for which the user may not have a final licence.
No part of this documentation, or any of the information included herein may be modified or copied in
any form or by any means without the prior written consent of SERCEL.
© 2005 Sercel. All Rights Reserved.

Printed in France.
Sercel, 428XL, 428XLS, AIB, DPG, DSD, DSU1, DSU3, e-428, eSQC Pro, FDPA428, FDU, FDU-428,
HSU, LandPro Bin, LAUL, LAUL-428, LAULS, LAUX, LAUX-428, LAUXS, Link, LL428, LLIU, LRU,
LSI, LSS, LT428, LX, MGA, MRU, MSI, QT428, SGA, TMS428, TMU428, VE432, VQC88, WPSR are
all trademarks of Sercel. All rights reserved.
UNIX is either a registered trademark or trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other
countries.Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned
herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
December 4, 2006 3
428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1
Revision history
Chapters or
Date of
pages
revision Description of revision or reason for change
affected
Nov. 2005 V 1.0 release
Oct. 2006 p. 267, 268 Updated information on raw data.
Dec. 2006 V 2.0 release.
4 December 4, 2006
Table
of
Contents
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1 Introduction
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Terminology and conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Working with 428XL windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2 Getting started
Opening a user session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Server Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
The server Administration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Registering a new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Session manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Licence information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Starting/stopping the 428XL server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
The launcher bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Hands-on guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 5
December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
System status archive tool (File Packager). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

The crew’s Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
The Chat tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
3 Installation setup
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seismic recording instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Export mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Mobile Receiver Unit (MRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
428XL scalability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
4 Configuration
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Identity Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
The Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Crew setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
User Info setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
SEGD setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Disk Record setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
On Line/Off Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
5 Line
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Topographic views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
About topographic views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Sensor view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Instrument view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
6 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
Battery view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Seismonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Working with graphic views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Numeric views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Histogram view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
The Survey setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Point Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Sensor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
The Layout setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Detour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Mute channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
The Spread Type setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Absolute spreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Generic spreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
The Look setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
LAU Leakage setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Advanced layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Skipped channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Logical line mapped with several physical lines . . . . . . . . . . .133
Detour with skipped receiver points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Snaking layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Working with DSU3-428 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
DSU3-428 topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
DSU3-428 in the Survey Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
DSU3-428 in the Layout Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

DSU3 in the Spread Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
DSU3 in the Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Form Line function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Sensor view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Instruments view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Seismonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Acquisition using DSU3 channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
DSU3 tilt correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Radio telemetry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Radio telemetry equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Instrument Topographic view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
The Radio QC Limit setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Frequency management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
LRU parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
LAUR parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Wakeup/Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Loop test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Test functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Instrument tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Sensor tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Multiple tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Seismonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
The Form Line setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Line Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
The Synthetic setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
The Download setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6 Operation
The Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
The Operation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
The Active Source view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
The Active Acquisition view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
The Process Type setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Auxiliary traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Impulsive type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Impulsive Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Correlation Before Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Correlation After Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Vibroseismic Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
How to Generate a Process Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
The Source Point Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Source point parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
To generate a Source Point setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Seismic setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
The Source Type setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Explosive source parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Vibroseismic source parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
The Delay setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
The Noise Editing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Noise editing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Noise editing thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
The Observer’s Comment Type Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
How to take shots or sweeps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Blaster shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
VE432 sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Flip-Flop sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Slip-sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
More About Noise Elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
“Spike Editing” method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Diversity Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
More About Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Data Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
7 Positioning
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
The Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
The Datum Type setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
The Projection Type setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Quality Warning setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
The Vehicle Identity setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
The geographical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
The layer manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
GeoZones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Swath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
The Tracking view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Graphical tracking view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Numerical tracking view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
More about the estimated COG position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Supported vehicle tracking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Customizing tracked vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Vehicle trackline and history file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
The Alert system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
GeoZone perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Global alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Excess speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Working with the GIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Object labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Attribute colour maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Query builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Basic Geodesy Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
8 Export
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Export activity log views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
File export controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Export device indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Auto/Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
The Tape Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
The Functions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
NFS disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Get Device Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Reinit Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Copying exported files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Working with tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
9 VE432
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
The Vibrator Crew setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
The Basic Type setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
dB/Hz Log, Tn and dB/Octave Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Deboost option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Generating a Basic Type setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
The Acquisition Type setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
The Radio Management setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
The QC Limit setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
The QC Choice setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
The T0 Time setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Auto/Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Vibrator Fleet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Local Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Set DSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Get DSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Radio functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Set Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
PCMCIA Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Normal acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Graphic view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Numeric view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
DPG/DSD status codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Statistics views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
HFVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
10 Log
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Editing/saving/loading 428XL parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
SPS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
The SPS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Importing an SPS file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Exporting an SPS file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
The Shooting setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Operator reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Observer Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
APS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
APS Verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

December 4, 2006
Table of Contents
Source COG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

Receiver position history data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
11 Plotter
The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
The Banner setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Selecting the traces to plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Plot parameters for production shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Processing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Rendering setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Format setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Test records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
12 Other vibrator electronics

The main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Working with other vibrator electronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

December 4, 2006
Chapter
1 Introduction
This chapter includes the following sections:
• Overview (page 16)

• Terminology and conventions (page 18)
• Working with 428XL windows (page 22)

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
Overview
Overview
The documentation coming with the 428XL system consists of the
following manuals:
• Installation Manual (0311428): contains an introduction to the
428XL system, installation information, a few instructions for the
operator to get started, and reference information that will help you
select a 428XL configuration tailored to your needs.
• User’s Manual Volume 1 (0311430): this manual, describing the
parameters displayed on the system’s Graphic User Interface (GUI)
and how to use each window.
• User’s Manual Volume 2 (0311431): contains information on logged
data and on interfaces (description of Input/Output formats, including
the SEGD format).
• User’s Manual Volume 3 (0311432): contains reference information
(filter charts, theory of tests, technical data, release notes,
specifications).
• Technical Manual (0311429): contains maintenance and repair
information, including operating instructions for using the system’s
testers.
Before using this manual, you need to install the system by following
the instructions given in the 428XL Installation Manual.
The User’s Manual is automatically loaded from the 428XL CDROM
to your workstation’s disk as you load the 428XL software package.
Then it is just one click away at all times, using the Help button
available in every main window. With a PC computer equipped with a
PDF file reader (Adobe Acrobat Reader) you can view this manual
direct from the 428XL CDROM’s DOC directory.
This manual assumes you are familiar with window-driven systems and
you know how to work with windows, including how to use a mouse
and standard menus and commands, and to open, move, resize, shrink,
restore and close a window.

December 4, 2006
Introduction
Overview
To start the server, if required, see Starting/stopping the 428XL server on

page 41
1
To launch the 428XL Graphic User Interface, see Opening a user
session (page 32).

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
Terminology and conventions

To use this manual, you need to be familiar with a number of terms that
are described below.
Text box
Index box
Scrollbar
List box
Pushbutton
Figure 1-1 Dialog box
Click
To press and release a mouse button quickly (left-hand button, unless
otherwise specified).
Command button
A pushbutton that carries out a command (Add, Change, Delete,
Reverse) with the parameters displayed in the text boxes.
Dialog box
A secondary window that provides or requests information within a
main window.
Double-click
To press and release the left-hand mouse button twice in rapid
succession without moving the mouse.
Drag
To move an item on the screen by holding down the mouse button while
moving the mouse. See Drag and Drop (page 29).
December 4, 2006
Introduction
Icon
A small graphical image used to represent a window. Windows can be 1
turned into icons or minimized to save room or unclutter the workspace.
Index box
A text box (usually the first box from left to right) showing the
identification number of a row (or set of rows) to be generated in a list
box or selected from a list box.
List box
A box used to display a scrollable list of the rows edited under a text
box.
Mouse buttons
The left-hand button is used to click, double-click, and select an item.
The right-hand button causes a contextual menu to pop up, if any is
available.
Option button
A pushbutton used to post an option menu in which you can select an
option. An option button displays the label of the selected option and a
bar graphic to distinguish it from a command button.
Click to show
available options
Figure 1-2 Option button

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
Point (to)
To move the mouse pointer on the screen until it rests on the item you
want to select.
Scale
A rectangular box, with a slider in it, used to set or display a value in a
range. A label indicates the current value. A value is selected by
dragging the slider and releasing the mouse button when the desired
value is displayed. Clicking on either side of the slider selects the next
higher or lower value.
Current setting
Scale
Slider
Figure 1-3
Scrollbar
A rectangular box, with a slider and direction arrow graphics in it, used
to scroll the visible area of a window pane or box (see Figure 1-1 on
page 18). The slider indicates the relative position and size of the visible
area. The position is adjusted by dragging the slider or clicking the
direction arrows.
Select
To point to an item in a menu, by dragging the mouse pointer until the
item is highlighted, and release the mouse button.
Text box
An entry box used to enter or display values and/or text for a parameter
within a dialog box (see Figure 1-1 on page 18).

December 4, 2006
Introduction
Toggle button
A pushbutton composed of a label preceded by a graphic (circle or 1
square) with two distinctive states that indicate the set and unset states
of the button.
There are two special cases of toggle buttons.
• Radio button: used to select one option from a number of options.
Each option is represented by a radio button. Each button represents
a mutually exclusive selection (only one radio button can be set at a
time).
Radio buttons
Vib. 1
Vib. 2
Vib. 3
Figure 1-4
• Check button: used to set a number of options. Unlike a radio button,

any number of check buttons can be set at the same time.
Check buttons
Check buttons
Figure 1-5

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
Working with 428XL windows

Dialog boxes
Conventions used in this section

The following conventions are used in this section:
m, n, o, p stand for sequential numbers.
i stands for an increment (positive or negative); the + sign
is optional.
v stands for any allowable value for a parameter.
All other symbols are part of the syntax.
General rules
• Clicking in a text box causes the text cursor (I-beam pointer) to
appear in it, allowing you to type the desired information. To make
corrections, use the BACKSPACE or DELETE key as applicable.
• The CARRIAGE RETURN key is only used to enter two or more text
lines into the same text box,
• In any dialog box, the allowable values for each text box will
automatically show up if you click Add (or Apply if there is no Add
button) whenever the text box is blank.
• Double-clicking in a text box causes its content to be highlighted.
Then, pressing any key erases the content and enters the
corresponding character.
• Clicking on any row in a list box selects the row (its number shows
up in the index box). See the example below.
• Double-clicking on any row in a list box selects the row and causes
the content of the row to show up in the associated text boxes. See the
example below.

December 4, 2006
Introduction
Example: Assuming three rows in a list box, with the following content:
1
Text box 1 Text box 2 Content
Index box Text box 1 Text box 2

1 11
2 21 1 11 12
3 31
2 21 22
3 31 32
Figure 1-6
1. Double-clicking in the second row causes its content to appear in

the text boxes:
Text box 1 Text box 2

Double-click 2 21 22
1 11
2 21
3 31
Figure 1-7
2. Clicking in the third row selects it and causes the row number (3)
to appear in the index box:
Text box 1 Text box 2
3 21 22
Click
1 11
2 21
3 31
Figure 1-8

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
3. Clicking on the Change button updates the third row with the
content of the text boxes:
Click
Text box 1 Text box 2 Content
3 21 22
Index box Text box 1 Text box 2
1 11
2 21 1 11 12
3 21
2 21 22
3 21 22
Figure 1-9
In an index box
m-n selects all rows from row m to row n.
m- selects all rows from row m to the end of the list.
-m selects all rows from the beginning of the list to row m.
- selects the whole list.
m-n/i selects rows m, m+i, m+2i, m+3i...n
n-m/-i selects rows n, n-i, n-2i, m-3i...m
In a text box
/ means the current value in the list box will not be
changed.
V means the value V will be applied to the specified row or
set of rows.
V/i or V/+i (or V/-i) means an incremental (or decremental)
value starting from V will be applied to the specified set
of rows. (The + sign is optional).
/i or /+i (or /-i) means an increment (or decrement) will be
applied to the pre-existing values of the specified set of
rows.

December 4, 2006
Introduction
Add button
Used to create a row or set of rows. You have to enter the new row 1
numbers in the index box, using the syntax shown in the examples
below (this will not work if the rows already exist in the list box).
1 creates row # 1 in the list box.
1-5 creates rows # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
1-8/2 creates rows # 1, 3, 5, 7.
7-2/-2 creates rows # 7, 5, 3.
Change button
Used to update a row or set of rows (already existing in the list box) with
the content of one or more text boxes. You have to enter the number of
the row (or the range of rows) to update in the index box, using the
syntax shown in the examples below:
1 updates row # 1.
1-5 updates rows # 1 through 5.
5- updates all rows from # 5 to the end of the list.
-5 updates all rows from the first sequential number in the
list to # 5.
- updates the whole list.
Assuming the list box contains rows # 10, 20, 8, 11, 12, 15, 30 (starting
with 10 and ending with 30):
-/2 updates rows # 10, 8, 12, 30.
10-15/2 updates rows # 10, 8, 12.
20-/2 updates rows # 20, 11, 15.
-15/2 updates rows # 10, 8, 12.

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
Delete button
Used to delete a row or set of rows from the list box. You have to enter
the number of the row (or the range of rows) to delete in the index box,
using the syntax shown in the examples below:
1 deletes row # 1.
1-5 deletes row # 1 through 5.
5- deletes all rows from # 5 to the end of the list.
-5 deletes all rows from the first sequential number in the
list to # 5.
- deletes the whole list.
Reverse button
Used to reverse the order of a set of rows specified in the index box as
shown in the examples below:
List box List box

Index box before clicking Reverse after clicking Reverse
1-5 12345 54321
3- 12345 12543
-3 12345 32145
- 12345 54321
Apply button
Saves and/or activates the selections made in a main window or a dialog
box. If you wish to generate a file containing the parameters currently
displayed, use the Log main window.
Reset button
Restores the latest values that was saved in the list box when the Apply
button was last used.

December 4, 2006
Introduction
Views
Selecting text
1
You can copy content from a text box to another text box or to a text
editor. To select the text to copy, do the following:
1. With the mouse left button, click before the first character to select
(release the mouse button).
2. Using the scrollbar, scroll through the text until the last character
to select is visible.
3. Press the Shift key and hold it down.
4. With the mouse left button, click on the last character to select.
5. Release the Shift key. As a result, the selected text is highlighted.
Alternately, if all of the text to select is viewed, you can do as follows:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the first character to select.
2. Press the mouse left button and hold it down.
3. Move the mouse pointer to the last character to select.
4. Release the mouse button. As a result, the selected text is
highlighted.
Selecting table rows

You can copy content from a table in a numeric view to a text editor or
to a spreadsheet tool. To select the tables cells to copy, do the following:
1. Click in the first row to select.
2. Press the Shift key.
3. Click in the last row to select. As a result, the selected rows are
highlighted.

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
Selecting a graphical area

You can copy content from a graphic view to a setup window. To select
the objects to copy, do the following:
1. Move the mouse pointer to one (e. g. upper-left) corner of the area
to select.
2. Press the mouse centre button and hold it down.
3. Still holding down the mouse button, move the mouse pointer to
the opposite (e. g. lower-right) corner of the area to select.
4. Release the mouse button. As a result, the selected area is
highlighted.
Copy And Paste

The Copy and Paste function allows you to copy content from a dialog
box to another.
1. Select the text, or table cells, or objects to copy:
- To select content from a text box, see Selecting text (page 27);
- To select content from a table, see Selecting table rows (page 27);
- To select content from a graphic view, see Selecting a graphical
area (page 28).
2. Copy the selected content as follows:
- press both Ctrl and C on the keyboard (press Ctrl first).
- or choose Copy from the Edit menu if any.
3. Click in the destination text box, or setup window, or application.
4. Paste the selected content as follows:
- press both Ctrl and V on the keyboard (press Ctrl first).
- or choose Paste from the Edit menu if any.

December 4, 2006
Introduction
Drag and Drop

In some windows, you can “drag and drop” graphical objects from a 1
panel to another, by doing the following:
1. Press the Ctrl key and hold it down;
2. Left-click on the object to select, and hold down the mouse
button;
3. Still holding down the Ctrl key and mouse button, move the
mouse pointer to the desired location;
4. Release the mouse button and Ctrl key.
Bar charts
Figure 1-10
On each chart the horizontal axis is the scale (divided into a number of
bins) for the values to display, and the vertical axis is for the number of
values in each bin. The following values are also shown:
You can zoom in by double-clicking on the bar chart, and zoom out by
double-clicking again on it.
With the mouse pointer resting anywhere on a bar chart, pressing the
mouse right button causes a menu to pop up with three commands.
Show curve
Used to show or hide the Gaussian curve.

December 4, 2006
1 Introduction
Show grid
Used to show or hide the plot grid.
Properties
• Number of bars: This field is used to specify the number of bins you
want to generate in the bar chart.
• Bar labels: This option button is used to select the type of annotation
to be displayed above each bar:
- Percentage of values contained in the bin, with respect to the
whole set of values.
- Number of values contained in the bin.

December 4, 2006
Chapter
2 Getting started
This chapter is intended for beginners. It describes how to

use the crew’s Server Administration window and Web site,
and briefly teaches a local or remote user how to get
started. This chapter includes the following sections:
• Opening a user session (page 32)

• Server Administration (page 36)
• The launcher bar (page 42)
• Hands-on guide (page 44)
• System status archive tool (File Packager) (page 51)
• The crew’s Web site (page 52)
• The Chat tool (page 55)

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
Opening a user session

To open a user session:
- Double-click on the 428XL Client icon on your
desktop.
- Wait until the launcher bar appears.
All icons in the launcher bar (except the connection icon and the Help
button) are dimmed until you get connected.
Right-clicking on the “Connection” icon causes a menu
to pop up, prompting the following commands:
• Connection: used to log on to the server. See
Connection (page 32).
• Settings: see Application Settings (page 34).
Figure 2-1
• Packager: system status archive tool (see page 51). Launcher bar
• Exit: used to close the 428XL Client application.
Connection
This command is selected by default on a left-click on the connection
icon in the launcher bar. It opens a connection window:
Click here
to connect
Figure 2-2
Advanced Parameters
If your machine uses a Proxy server, click on the Advanced
Parameters tab to set the Proxy configuration.

December 4, 2006
Getting started
Choose “Enabled”, then enter the same configuration (Host name and
Port) as in your Web browser (see the Internet connection options in
your browser).
Remote Server
2
To connect to the server, click on the Remote Server tab, then do the
following:
428GUI
1
2 428GUI
3
user428
4
Figure 2-3
1. Choose the type of connection: “Local user” if you are opening a

user session on the server workstation itself or your PC is attached
to the crew’s local network (172.27.128.x), “Remote user”
otherwise.
2. The Label field is used to enter a name for your connection
profile. Choose a name that will clearly identify your connection
profile (e. g. your name plus the product’s name).
3. In the URL field, type the desired crew address, for example:
- localhost if you are connecting as “Local user” on the server
workstation itself, or 172.27.128.1 if you are connecting as an
extra “Local user”.
- http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn if you are connecting as an Intranet or
Internet “Remote user”, nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn being the IP address
of the nearest Seismic Gateway (depending on which Seismic
Gateway computer is visible to your computer). If you know the
machine name, you can use it in place of the IP address.
December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
4. In the Login and Password fields, type your Login name and
password respectively (supplied to you by the Senior Observer).
5. Click Connect. The 428XL launcher bar should show up on your
desktop.
Application Settings
Figure 2-4
Browser settings
Allows you to choose which Web Browser to use. Only the default
option is prompted (e. g. Internet Explorer on a Windows host
computer, FireFox on a Linux host), unless you have installed another
browser.
Regional settings
Allows you to choose the Help language (English/Chinese/Russian/
Spanish).
Figure 2-5

December 4, 2006
Getting started
Desktop
As you close the 428XL application window by selecting “Exit” from
the connection icon in the launcher bar or clicking the usual close button
in the upper right corner), the system may or may not save the desktop 2
configuration, depending on which option is enabled in the “Desktop”
settings window.
Figure 2-6
• None: with this option enabled, the default window layout is used
each time you open the 428XL application.
• Last session: with this option enabled, the 428XL application opens
with the window layout you were using when you last closed the
launcher bar (with the same user account on the same computer).
• Snapshot: with this option enabled, clicking “Apply” saves the
current window layout on your computer. The windows that were
open at the moment you clicked “Apply” will automatically open,
with the same window layout, each time you next open the 428XL
application with the same user account on the same computer (until
you change your desktop preference option).
Look&Feel
Used to change the look of windows.
Figure 2-7

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
Server Administration
In this section:
• The server Administration window (page 36)
• Registering a new user (page 37)
• Session manager (page 39)
• Licence information (page 40)
• Starting/stopping the 428XL server (page 41)
The server Administration window

Open a user session (see Connection on page 32) unless this is already
done, and click on the administration tool icon in the launcher bar to
open the Administration window.
Figure 2-8
If you log on with Observer privileges, the Administration window

allows you to start/stop the server, manage user sessions, load a patch
from a remote (client) computer. If you log on with Senior Observer
privileges, it also allows you to register users and manage user
passwords.
The Debug tab is only intended for SERCEL customer support
engineers and therefore not described in this manual.

December 4, 2006
Getting started
Registering a new user

A new user cannot log on to a crew’s server unless and until he is
registered on that server. Only a user with Senior Observer role
privileges is allowed to register a remote user. 2
To register a new user, do the following:
1. Click on the Users tab.
Appears only if you log on

with Senior Observer
privileges
Right-click
Figure 2-9 Administration window
1. Right-click in the list of profiles and select New from the menu
that pops up.
- In the “Name” and “Password”
fields, enter the login name and
password you wish to create for
the new user.
- Click OK. As a result, the new
user appears in the list of Figure 2-10
authorized users.
- Choose the desired Password Expiry Date option (either
choose Never or enter the desired expiry date). The Expiry Date
takes effect at 12 a.m. (server local time).

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
- From the Role button, choose the privileges you wish to grant to
that user (Guest, or Observer, or Senior Observer permissions).
Role Permissions
• Opening any client window and:

- Viewing the crew’s parameter settings
Guest (changes are of no effect),
- Viewing results, generating reports;
• Website access.
All “Guest” role privileges plus the following:

• Changing the crew’s parameter settings.
Observer
• Session administration.
• Changing the installation parameters.
All “Observer” role privileges plus the

Senior Observer following:
• User administration (registering new users).
- Click Apply.
2. Notify the user of the Login name and Password you have created.
Note: After a profile is created, you can change or delete it by right-
clicking on it in the list of profiles and using the menu that pops up.

December 4, 2006
Getting started
Session manager
Open the Administration window and then click on the Sessions tab.
This displays a session manager view with a navigation pane showing
all opened sessions. 2
Unless you are logged on to the crew’s server with Observer or Senior
Observer role privileges, you are not allowed to make any changes in
the session manager window.
Right-click
Click on session to
show details
Details
Figure 2-11 Session manager
Clicking on any session causes detailed information to be displayed

below the navigation pane.
Right-clicking on any session causes a contextual menu to pop up,
prompting the necessary commands for the management of sessions:
To close a session, right-click on it and select “Kill”.

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
Licence information
Open the Administration window and then click on the Licences tab.
This displays information that is not displayed in the Install window
when you enter your licence code (Expiry date, allowed tokens, etc.).
Figure 2-12
Note A message will appear in the Terminal window of the server

workstation 24 hours before your software licence expires, but
it is advisable to use the Administration window to check the
expiry date before that.

December 4, 2006
Getting started
Starting/stopping the 428XL server

The 428XL server is started automatically when you power up the
server computer.
If you are logged on to the crew’s server with Observer or Senior
2
Observer privileges, you can stop and restart the server, or reboot or
shut down the computer, by using the buttons available from the Server
tab in the administration window.
• Restart: closes the server application, restarts it and restores your
connection.
• Reboot: reboots the computer and restarts the server application.
• Shutdown: closes the server application and turns off the power to
the computer.
Figure 2-13

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
The launcher bar
The launcher bar

• The Installation icon is used to set
installation parameters for the server Connection
workstation (licences, number of cards in the

Administration
Control Module, attached peripherals, source
controllers, etc.). See Installation setup on Installation
page 57.
Configuration
• The Configuration icon is used to set the
crew’s basic parameters, provide information Line
on the hardware and software configuration Operation

of the system, specify how your SEGD files
must be recorded, and enable/disable Positioning
communications with the Control Module. Export
See Configuration on page 69.

Other Vib
• The Line icon is used for the management of
VE432
the field electronics. See Line on page 83
Log
• The Operation icon is used for the
management of shots. See Operation on Plotter
page 189.
Chat
• The Export icon is used for the management
of your recording media. See Export on Help
page 317.
Website
• The Positioning icon is used for viewing
source points, tracking vehicles, etc. See
Positioning on page 269. Click to customize
launcher bar
• The VE432 icon opens the Graphic User
Interface for the VE432 vibrator controller. Figure 2-14
See VE432 on page 341. Launcher bar
• The Log icon is used to save/load setup

parameters, import/export processing support (SPS) files, export

December 4, 2006
Getting started
The launcher bar
operator reports, and for the management of all reports. See Log on
page 405.
• The Plotter icon is used for monitoring traces on a plotter. See Plotter
on page 423. 2
• The Chat icon allows you to send messages to the users connected to
the server.
• The Website allows you to download or upload SPS files, report files,
etc.
• The Help icon displays help information (same as the Help menu in
each window).
• The Administration icon is intended for a user with Observer or
Senior Observer privileges to register users, manage passwords and
sessions, etc. See Server Administration (page 36).
The launcher bar can be customized:
Click to customize
Double-click
launcher bar
Figure 2-15
• You can have the launcher displayed vertically

or horizontally by double-clicking on its title
bar.
• Use the button at the foot of the launcher bar to
choose which icons you want to be visible.
Figure 2-16

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
Hands-on guide
Hands-on guide
This hands-on guide teaches a beginner how to customize a main
window (also referred to as “client window”) in just a few clicks. The
first time you log on to a 428XL server, each main window in the
Graphic User Interface is configured with a default layout. Then, your
customized window layout is automatically saved on your computer as
you close the client window, and recovered when you next open it.
In most main windows, it is for you to decide how many views to show
and where to place them. The GUI may also let you decide which
information to view, and which type (numerical/graphical) of view you
want for this information. The intent of the procedure below is to give
you a glimpse of what you can do to customize each main window,
using the “Line” window as an example.
1. Open the Line main window (click on the Line icon in

the 428XL launcher bar).
2. On the right-hand border of each toolbar is a down arrow
button. Clicking on that button causes a menu to pop up for you to
choose which buttons you would like to show or hide in the
toolbar. (All options are also available from the menu bar).
Menu bar
(2) Click to
customize toolbars
Undocked toolbar
(3) Move to dock

elsewhere or to undock
(4) More options
(click to choose)
Figure 2-17 Customizing toolbars
3. Clicking on the left-hand (shaded) border of the toolbar and

holding down the mouse button allows you to move and dock the
December 4, 2006
Getting started
Hands-on guide
toolbar to whichever border you like inside the window. Moving it

outside the window will undock the toolbar (to dock it again,
simply close it by clicking on the button in the upper right corner
of the undocked toolbar).
2
4. A double-arrow button (>>) appears if more options are available
but the toolbar is too small for all buttons to fit in. Clicking on that
button causes the hidden options to pop up for you to choose
whichever you like.
(5) Expand/collapse
horizontally
(6) Drag border

to adjust width
(5) Expand/collapse (6) Drag border

vertically to adjust height
Figure 2-18 Window resizing
5. The arrow buttons in the corners of a display pane let you

expand or collapse the pane vertically or horizontally.
6. Adjust the width of each display pane by dragging the vertical
border to the left/right. Likewise, to adjust its height by dragging
the horizontal border upward/downward.
7. To show the different views available, use either the View menu
or toolbar buttons. When you choose to add a view, the new view
pane appears below the currently selected pane.

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
Hands-on guide
Figure 2-19 Adding view panes
8. To hide any view pane, click on the close button associated with
its tab.
9. If the pane is not large enough for the whole view to fit in, you can
resize the main window and/or use the available scrollbars.
(8) Click to hide

view
(10) Double-click on tab (9) Vertical

to expand/collapse view scrollbar
Zoom out
View all
(11 Drag tab
to move view
(9) Horizontal
scrollbar
Figure 2-20 Customizing view panes
In graphical views, you can zoom in by pressing the left mouse

button, moving the mouse, then releasing the button. Use the
zoom control buttons to zoom out or go back to the whole view.
10. Double-clicking on the tab of any view pane either expands or
collapses the view.

December 4, 2006
Getting started
Hands-on guide
11. You can customize the layout of the main window by placing the
different views where you like them: with the mouse pointer
resting on the tab of any view pane, press the left mouse button,
then move the mouse so as to drag the tab to where you would like
the view pane to appear.
2
Placing tabs side by side will cause the view panes to be cascaded.
Where views are cascaded, you bring any view to the front by
simply clicking on its tab.
Cascaded views
Figure 2-21 Moving view tabs
Also, view panes can be tiled vertically and/or horizontally. With

the example shown in Figure 2-21, dragging the tab to (A) will
split the window vertically and place the view into the left-hand
pane. Dragging the tab to (B) will split the window horizontally
and place the view into the bottom pane. Dragging the tab to (C)
will split the window vertically and place the view into the right-
hand pane (see Figure 2-22).

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
Hands-on guide
Figure 2-22 Tiled views
12. Double-clicking on the button in the lower right corner or each

main window enables or disables the automatic updating of the
window. That button is green if automatic updating is enabled, red
otherwise. The automatic update option is also available from the
the Preferences Setup menu, which allows you to adjust the
refresh rate. The blinking of the heartbeat-like indicator at the foot
of the window is indicative of the window being refreshed.
(12) Enable/disable
Automatic Update
Figure 2-23 Preference setup
13. 428XL messages appear in the “Status Mail” pane at the foot of
the main window. Whether you choose to show or hide that pane,
the orientation of the Mail icon in the toolbar will tell you if any
December 4, 2006
Getting started
Hands-on guide
message is present (the mail icon being raised is indicative of one

or more messages being present). To delete mail messages, right-
click in the Status Mail pane and select “Clear Status” from the
menu that pops up.
2
14. Most tables in numeric views can be customized by right-clicking
on any column heading and selecting “Customize” from the menu
that pops up.
(15) Bold means

it cannot be removed
(14) Right-click on
column heading (18) Use to
rearrange
(17) Click to hide
selected column
(16) Bold and underlined

(neither removed nor moved)
Figure 2-24 Customizing tables
15. Any heading appearing in bold style in the Displayed columns

list means that you cannot remove that column (but you can move
it using the up or down arrow button).
16. Any heading appearing in bold style and underlined means you
can neither remove nor move the column (it is always entirely
visible and at the same position in the table). All other columns
can be moved or removed.
17. Click in either list box to choose which column to show or hide,
then use the double-arrow buttons to move it to the other list box.
18. Use the up or down arrow button to place each column where you
would like it to appear in the table.

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
Hands-on guide
19. You can save that table configuration by clicking on Save and
entering a name for it in the dialog box that shows up.
Subsequently, you’ll simply have to select the desired type of
table from the “Select a Preset” option button and click Apply to
recover your preferred arrangement of columns at your
convenience.
20. You can also change the order of columns by clicking on a column
heading in the table, then dragging and dropping it where you
would like it to appear (unless you are not allowed to move that
column).
(20) Drag and drop

column heading
(21) Drag border

to resize
Figure 2-25
21. To resize a column, simply drag its border to the desired width.
Some columns, however, have a minimum width that you are not
allowed to override.
22. Clicking on a column heading may cause an up or down arrow to
appear in that heading, allowing you to scroll through the table if
more rows can be viewed.

December 4, 2006
Getting started
System status archive tool (File Packager)
System status archive tool (File Packager)

In the event of a problem with your 428XL system, you may want to
archive some log files containing information on the system’s
behaviour, for example in order to send them to SERCEL’s customer
2
support centre.
To do that, you can use the Packager command
available by right-clicking on the connection icon in the
launcher bar. That archiving tool automatically finds
the files to archive, and compresses them into a single
file in ZIP format.
Figure 2-26
The File Packager uses the configuration instructions
contained in a text file, with .cfg as extension, located in the following
directory:
/export/home/user428/Sercel/e-428v ./eHCI/filePackager/filePackager
In the configuration file are three sections:
• baseDir: used to specify which directory to search, if a relative
search path is used;
• packFile: used to specify the name of the ZIP file to create. For
example, /export/home/e-428/logPack.zip will create the
“logPack.zip” archive file in the “/export/home/e-428” directory.
• fileList: used to specify which files to find, with an absolute or
relative search path.
You may want to place the archive file on the crew’s Web site (or copy
it to whatever location you like). To do that:
- Open the configuration file to see which path and file name is
specified in its packFile section.
- Go to the specified directory and move or copy the zip file to the
desired location. See The crew’s Web site (page 52).

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
The crew’s Web site

Click on the Website icon in the launcher bar. This opens the Web
browser with the crew’s Website home page open in it.
Website
Figure 2-27
Access to all menus except Help is securized. Because the Web site can
be accessed direct from any browser, an authentication box appears on
your first attempt to download or upload files, or see Identity
information.
Figure 2-28
Simply enter the same User Name and Password (which a “Senior
Observer” must have given to you) as you used to open your user
session.
• The Identity Card menu displays information on the server machine
(identification, memory size, sercel products hosted on that machine,
patches installed, etc.).

December 4, 2006
Getting started
• The Download menu prompts the list of files contained in the

server’s /export/home/e-428/webServer/base/sercel/publication/
out directory. This may be files from the Log window’s Publication
folder, or a screenshot or whatever other file the Observer may have
placed in that directory for users to download). Selecting a file (by
2
clicking on it) opens a dialog box asking you if you want to open the
file or save it to your computer’s disk.
Figure 2-29
• The Upload menu allows you to select a file on your computer’s disk
and load it to the server. The file is loaded to the following directory:
/export/home/e-428/webServer/base/sercel/publication/in
Figure 2-30

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
• The Server logs menu
Figure 2-31
• The Packager menu

• The Help menu displays help about the 428XL Graphic User
Interface (same as the Help button in the launcher bar).

December 4, 2006
Getting started
The Chat tool
The Chat tool

Click on the Chat icon in the launcher bar. This opens a window that
allows you to see who is connected to the 428XL server and send
messages to any of those users.
2
Chat
Type in your
Click to send
message
Figure 2-32 Chat window
Simply type your message in the text box at the foot of the window,
click in the list box to select the user you want to reach, and then click
on the button in the lower right corner to send the message. This causes
a window to pop up on the user’s computer with your message in it.
To select two or more users, press the Control key while clicking in the
list.

December 4, 2006
2 Getting started
The Chat tool

December 4, 2006
Chapter
This chapter describes the Installation setup window. It

includes the following sections:

• Seismic recording instrumentation (page 59)
• Peripherals (page 63)
• Export mode (page 65)
• Mobile Receiver Unit (MRU) (page 66)
• 428XL scalability (page 67)

December 4, 2006
Overview
Overview
Clicking on the “Install” icon in the 428XL launcher bar
opens a window to be used when you install the system or
whenever you install a new software version, or another type
or vibrator electronics, or if you change the number of LCI428 units,
etc.
After making the desired selections in the “Install” window, click
“Apply”. This reboots the server workstation.
WARNING
The new settings will not take effect until the server workstation has
booted up.
In addition, after adding or changing an LCI428 unit, the system may

ask you to reload LCI software (see 428XL Installation manual).

December 4, 2006
Installation setup
Seismic recording instrumentation

.
Figure 3-1 Install window (“Main” tab)
e428 Lite
Choose this option if you are installing a 428Lite box rather than an
LCI-428. See 428XL Installation Manual for hardware installation.
Instruments On Field
These buttons allow the system to customize the graphic user interface,
depending on the instrumentation to be used. The specific parameters
and/or commands attached to a type of instrument are hidden and
disabled unless and until you choose that type of instrument in this
window.
See DSU3 tilt correction (page 146).

December 4, 2006
Disk Buffer
The system uses a file repository in which it temporarily stores your
SEGD files until the Export process can accept them. You can choose
between the following two disk options for the file repository:
• Local Disk: the file repository will use the “/var/dump” directory on
the local disk of the server workstation.
• JBOD FC: the file repository will use an external disk via a Fibre
Channel (a fibre optics port is required on the server workstation).
The files can be arranged in different manners in the repository (see
Backup Settings on page 79).
LCI
Choose the number of LCI boards you want to use, enter the network
address of each of them in the associated fields. You can choose any
address from 172.30.201.1 to 172.30.204.1.
Figure 3-2

December 4, 2006
Installation setup
Licences
These fields are used to enter the necessary passwords to enable the
software packages you wish to use.
• e-428 Password: This field is used to enter the password supplied to
you by Sercel for your system. That password is dependent upon the
number of client workstations you want to use, the number of traces, 3
the Host or Dongle Identification code of the server workstation, and
the 428XL software version. When you contact SERCEL to get a
password for your system, you have to supply the “Dongle ID” or
“HostId code”, depending on whether your 428XL server is running
on Linux or Solaris.
- On a Linux host computer, you have to plug the associated
dongle into a USB port. The Identification code to supply to
SERCEL is displayed in the Dongle ID field in this window. If,
for any reason, you need a replacement dongle, you will have to
supply the associated “Recovery code” also displayed in this
window.
- On a Solaris host, see Dongle ID or HostId code (page 75) in
428XL Installation Manual to read the Host ID code.
IMPORTANT
Record the Recovery code and keep it in a safe place.
• Plotter: The licence for plotters cannot be typed on the keyboard. It

may be supplied to you on a floppy disk, or CD-ROM, or USB key or
any appropriate medium. You can also download the licence file and
save it to the server workstation’s disk (e. g. to the /tmp directory).
The Info... button allows you to see if any licence is already installed.
To install a plotter licence:
- Insert the medium (CD-ROM, etc.) containing the licence file,
or copy the file to workstation’s disk,
- Click on the Browse... button and select the licence file.

December 4, 2006
- Click on Install. A warning box may appear, asking you if you

wish to install a licence. If you choose to do that and a licence
already exists, you are going to overwrite that licence.
- Note: If the mention “1-jan-0” appears in the warning box, it
should not be understood as an expiry date. Instead, this means
the licence is unlimited.
- Click OK. This installs the plotter licence.
- Wait for a dialog box to appear to say if installation was
successful.
- Click Apply. This reboots the server workstation.
Like the e-428 password, the plotter licence is based on the Host Id code
or Dongle Id of the computer.

December 4, 2006
Installation setup
Peripherals
Peripherals
Figure 3-3
Nb of DPG modules
This field is used to specify how many (up to 4) vibrator controller
modules (DPGs) are attached to the system. (For example, each vibrator
fleet you want to use in slip-sweep mode has its own vibrator
controller).
Vibrator type
Choose the type of vibrator electronics used for vibroseismic sources if
any:
• VE432: to be selected if you want to use a VE432 from SERCEL.
• Other: to be selected for any other type of vibrator electronics.
See the wiring of the Blaster connector in 428XL Installation Manual.
Blaster type
Choose the type of blaster used for impulsive sources if any:
• SHOT PRO (PELTON)
• SGS
• BoomBox
• SHALLOW
• MACHA

December 4, 2006
Peripherals
• OTHER (any type). With this option, the data from the shooting
system is not processed.
Note If you select the “Connected with LSI” option:

- the indicator LED on FDUs, otherwise used as a test result
indicator, is used to tell the shooter whether he is allowed to
connect/disconnect an LSI between two links.
- you cannot launch a new shot until retrieval of the previous one
is complete, whatever the field equipment and the shooting
method used.
See the wiring of the Blaster connector in 428XL Installation Manual
and “Source Controllers” in User’s Manual Vol. 3.
Number of plotters
Choose the appropriate option (1 or 2) depending on the number of
plotters attached to the system.
Plotter type
Choose the appropriate option (12 inch or 24 inch plotter).
Enter a name for each plotter in the associated “Name” field. The name
will appear in the Plotter main window to identify each plotter.
MAC address: (Media Access Control address). This field is used to
enter the hardware address of the plotter card, in the case of a plotter
with an Ethernet port.

December 4, 2006
Installation setup
Export mode
Export mode
You can record your SEGD files to cartridges and/or export them to
remote disks attached to the local network.
Figure 3-4
Tape drive
This option is used for traditional recording to one or up to four
cartridge drives (to be selected from the associated button).
NFS Server
This option allows SEGD files to be exported in real time to one or two
disks simultaneously. To attach a remote disk to the local network, see
428XL Installation Manual).
FTP Server
Use this option if you wish to export records to an FTP server attached
to the local network.
Local network (172.27.128.x.)
Observer NFS
server FTP user
428XL server 172.27.128.41

GUI FileZilla
172.27.128.1
172.27.128.2 172.27.128.99
Figure 3-5
To install a NAS disk or a file server, 428XL Installation Manual.

December 4, 2006
Mobile Receiver Unit (MRU)
Mobile Receiver Unit (MRU)
Figure 3-6
If a tracking box is connected to the workstation (i.e. if you wish to

implement the vehicle tracking function), activate the Use MRU
button. As a result you have to do the following:
• From the “GPS Port 1” button, select the serial port to use for the
vehicle tracking function. The “Base Port” button allows you to
choose a second serial port to be used for service messages from the
tracking box.
• From the “Driver Type” button, select the protocol used by the
tracking box.
• Enter the password for the vehicle tracking function into the
“Licence” field (or else communications with the tracking box will
not be allowed).

December 4, 2006
Installation setup
428XL scalability
428XL scalability
Your system’s capabilities depend on its resources (for example the
server computer’s RAM size) and on how many traces you want to
record, on the operating mode, on the sample rate, etc. The 428XL
Scalability tab allows you to change some default settings in order to
best suit your crew’s requirements.
3
Figure 3-7 Scaling parameters
• Maximum nb of traces: (4000 by default) Maximum number of

retrieved traces; depends on the server computer’s RAM size.
RAM size 428-Lite (4 GB) Less than 8 GB More than 8 GB

Max. number of
1000 4000 10000
traces
• Maximum open VP: (2 by default, 4 max.). Up to four Vibroseismic

sources can be used alternately (Flip-Flop mode). If you choose the
Work by Acq (page 229) option, the system can start shooting a Source
Point with multiple acquisitions to stack, but suspend it and let the
focus jump to another source and Source Point. In that case, use this
field to tell the system how many (up to 4) Source Points it can leave
suspended.

December 4, 2006
428XL scalability
• Maximum simult VP: (1 by default). This field is used to tell the

system how many Vibroseismic sources you want to use
simultaneously. The allowable number (up to 4) depends on the
server computer’s RAM size.
RAM size 428-Lite (4 GB) Less than 8 GB More than 8 GB

Max. number of
1 2 4
simultaneous VPs
Note: 428XL software version 2.0 does not allow the use of
simultaneous sources.
• Maximum nb of samples: (12001 by default). The maximum
allowable number of samples depends on the other three parameters.
It is determined by the system as you click on the Compute Samples
button. This allows you to determine the allowable record length (by
multiplying it by the sample rate you want to use).

December 4, 2006
Chapter
4 Configuration
• The main window (page 70)

• The Setup menu (page 74)
• On Line/Off Line (page 80)

December 4, 2006
4 Configuration
The main window
The main window

In this section:
• Customer Support (page 71)
• Copyrights (page 71)
• Identity Card (page 72)
Overview
This window serves two main purposes:
• Firstly, it is used to set up some basic parameters at the beginning of
a survey, for instance the sample rate.
• Secondly, it is used to control and initiate communications with the
Line Controller Interface each time the system is switched on.
An additional task is to report on the current hardware and software
configuration of the system, via the Identity Card.
Click to shrink
or expand
Figure 4-1
Note You can shrink/expand the window by clicking in the Activity

area.

December 4, 2006
Configuration
The main window
Customer Support
Clicking on this button in the 428XL main window opens a box

providing information on how to call the Customer Support
Department for help.
Please note SERCEL Customer Support Hot Line with our dedicated
phone number: 4
- Outside FRANCE +33 2 40 30 58 88
- In FRANCE 02 40 30 58 88
This allows you to get in touch with our SERCEL Customer Support
Department, at any time and seven days a week, to ask any question
related to the use of your SERCEL equipment.
One of our experienced, english speaking Customer Support Engineers
will make every effort to give you any technical support you need.
The Hot Line includes a vocal mail box for calls outside normal
business hours: just leave a spoken message and we will get back to you
first thing in the morning (including Saturdays and Sundays).
SERCEL is committed to offering you our closest support for the
success of your field operations.
Copyrights
Clicking on this button displays the list of copyrighted
software and libraries used in your 428XL Graphic User
Interface.

December 4, 2006
4 Configuration
The main window
Figure 4-2
Identity Card
Clicking on this button displays a description of the configuration
of your system (Software version, software patches installed,
passwords, workstation configuration, plotter type, hardware
configuration of 428XL Line Controller Interface, etc.).
Figure 4-3

December 4, 2006
Configuration
The main window
Of particular note is the following information:

- Host I.D.
- Software Version.
- Passwords (and LCI board numbers).
- Maximum number of client user sessions allowed.
- Module Type (428).
The Customer Support Department will solve your problem more
4
quickly if you provide them with a detailed description of the
configuration of your system, using the Identity Card command.

December 4, 2006
4 Configuration
The Setup menu
The Setup menu

In this section:
• Crew setup window (page 74)
• User Info setup (page 77)
• SEGD setup (page 78)
• Disk Record setup (page 79)
Crew setup window

Note You are not allowed to change these parameters unless and until
the line is turned off.
Figure 4-4
Sample rate
(1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 or 4 ms)
This option button allows you to specify the sampling interval to be
used on all traces.
Filter Type
(8N_Lin, 8N_Min).
December 4, 2006
Configuration
The Setup menu
Each 428XL channel has a built-in Digital Signal Processor that

performs high-cut filtering, depending on the option selected in this
setup window.
“N” stands for the Nyquist Frequency, i.e. half the sampling frequency.
The available filters have a -3 dB point at 0.8 times the Nyquist
Frequency, i.e. 0.4 times the sampling frequency:
- 100 Hz @ 4-ms.
- 200 Hz @ 2-ms.
4
- 400 Hz @ 1-ms.
- 800 Hz @ 0.5-ms.
- 1600 Hz @ 0.25-ms.
They feature a slope of about 370 dB/octave. The pulse response
ringing, however, decays slowly.
The attenuation is at least 120 dB for all frequencies above the Nyquist
Frequency, preventing any aliasing effect.
The 428XL allows the user to choose between:
- linear-phase type or
- minimum-phase type.
The amplitude spectrum does not depend much on the type of filter
(linear or minimum phase), unlike the phase spectrum.
Linear Phase
This type of filter is ideal as far as phase considerations are concerned,
as all the frequencies are delayed by the same amount. That delay is set
to zero in the 428XL.
In return, this kind of filter has a pulse response with leading ringing
(“precursors”) as well as lagging ringing (actually, the pulse response is
symmetrical with respect to time 0).

December 4, 2006
4 Configuration
The Setup menu
Minimum Phase
The minimum phase type is causal, i.e. its pulse response, much like
analog filters, starts at time 0, peaks and then rings (no ringing prior to
the peak).
The delay, however, somewhat depends on the input frequency.
Default Line Data Rate

(8 or 16 Mbits/s) This option button sets the default data rate for all
acquisition lines. To determine which option to choose, you need to
know which type of field electronics is used.
- The FDU428 field electronics supports both 8 and 16 Mbits/s
data rates.
- The FDU408 field electronics supports only the 8 Mbits/s
option.
WARNING
If any FDU408 electronics is deployed and you choose “16 Mbits/s”, it
will not be seen by the system unless you use the The Form Line setup
(page 174) to change the data rate to 8 Mbits/s on those line segments.
Time Management
This option button allows you to choose which clock to use to determine
the time of shots:
• Internal Clock: shot time is synchronized on the server computer’s
clock.
• Source Controller: shot time is synchronized on the source
controller (e. g. for explosive operations) connected to one of the
Blaster connectors on the LCI-428 or 428-Lite box. You have to
select the appropriate Blaster connector from the “From Source
Controller Connection” option button.
• GPS: shot time is synchronized on the GPS time, for example from
the GPS receiver attached to a 428-Lite box. Use the “From GPS

December 4, 2006
Configuration
The Setup menu
Connection” option button to choose which device should supply the

GPS time.
Post Annotation Logging

If the actual source COG is not available at the moment the SEGD file
is generated, this option determines whether or not the system is
allowed to update this field when the data is available at a later date, that
is after all status messages have been received from all vibrators 4
(VE432 DSDs).
User Info setup

An External Header appears in every SEGD file generated by the
system. Selecting “User Info” from the “Setup” menu opens a window
that allows you to enter any extra information not supported by the
standard header (ASCII characters) that you wish to be recorded in the
External Header. It can be left blank if not required.
Figure 4-5
The size allocated to the External Header depends on which options you
choose in the SEGD setup menu.

December 4, 2006
4 Configuration
The Setup menu
SEGD setup
If you choose the “Advanced” rather than “Standard” option, you can
choose between the following SEGD format options:
Figure 4-6
SEGD Level
You can choose between Revision 1 (Standard) and Revision 2
(providing better efficiency of using high density recording media, and
supporting the use of tapes with physical and electronic readable
labels).
Number of Record Channel Sets

You can choose between the following options for the number of
channel sets per record: 16 (Standard), 32 or 64.
External Header Size

You can choose between the following options for the maximum length
(kByte) of the External Header in the SEGD file: 1 or 64 (standard);
1 to 28 in 4-kByte steps (Advanced).
The following information is appended in the External Header header:
- Information from the shooting or navigation system,
- User information from the Config client window’s setup,
- Source comment from Operation client window.

December 4, 2006
Configuration
The Setup menu
Disk Record setup

The system uses a file repository in which it temporarily stores your
SEGD files until the Export process can accept them (see Disk Buffer on
page 60). The Disk Record setup window lets you choose the way the
system will arrange the files in the SEGD repository.
Figure 4-7
Disk record mode

• The “Standard” mode will save your production files to “/var/dump/
normal” and your test files to “/var/dump/test”.
• The “Advanced” mode may create subdirectories, depending on
which “Backup Settings” option you select.
Backup Settings
The files can be arranged in three different manners:
• Flat: all files are saved to the same directory (production files are
saved to “/var/dump/normal” and test files to “/var/dump/test”).
• Swath Name: same as with the “Flat” option, but a subdirectory is
created for each swath.
• Swath Name and Julian Day: same as with the “Swath” option, but
for each swath, a subdirectory is created for each julian day.

December 4, 2006
4 Configuration
On Line/Off Line
On Line/Off Line
Clicking “Off Line” inhibits data acquisition and recording, and enables
local functions on the Graphic User Interface. You are then allowed to
make any changes to parameter settings in the “Setup” menu in each
main window.
Clicking “On Line” enables data acquisition and recording. This also
automatically performs a Look function, as well as an instrument test on
the auxiliary traces.
Current file number
Number of shots being processed
Number of shots to retrieve

Acquisition length downcount or delay downcount
Figure 4-8
The “Activity” box shows the progress of the data flow, in the form of
traffic lights for each stage in the 428XL. When the process stage is idle,
all three lights are off. Otherwise, the colours should be interpreted as
follows:
• The green light means the data stream is being processed or dumped
to the next process stage.
• The orange light comes On if the processor is unable to dump the
data presently being processed to the next stage, for example because
“Manual” instead of “Auto” is activated in the “Export” or “DPG”
main window.
• The red light comes On if the processor is unable to process the data
presently contained in the stage, or unable to dump the processed data
to the next stage (therefore unable to accept any more data).

December 4, 2006
Configuration
On Line/Off Line
The following indicators may appear:

• ACQ (Acquisition): The green light means that acquisition is in
progress. The orange light comes On during the programmed delay,
if any, between acquisitions, or if seismonitor in the Line main
window is running. The red light means no acquisition can be
performed at the present time (e. g. because there are too many shots
to retrieve).
At the foot of the ACQ light is a time counter, preset to the acquisition 4
length value (including any programmed delay) at the start of each
acquisition, that indicates the time still to elapse before the present
acquisition (or delay) is complete.
• RTV (Retrieve): The green light means that the seismic data
collected from the FDUs, and stored in the LAUs, is being retrieved
by the central control unit. The orange light means that acquisition is
complete but it is not entirely retrieved. The red light means retrieval
is no longer possible. The counter at the foot indicates the number of
shots still to be retrieved (max. 2).
In addition, the following processing stages may appear in the Activity
window:
• PROC. The green light means data is being transferred from line
interface to the processing queue, and/or Noise Elimination and/or
Correlation is in progress. The orange light means the processing is
no longer performed in real time. The red light means no processing
can be performed at the present time. The counter at the foot indicates
the number of shots being processed.
• DPG (if a VE432 DPG vibrator controller is installed).

December 4, 2006
4 Configuration
On Line/Off Line

December 4, 2006
Chapter
5 Line

• Topographic views (page 86)
• Numeric views (page 101)
• Histogram view (page 103)
• The Survey setup (page 104)
• The Layout setup (page 111)
• The Spread Type setup (page 122)
• The Look setup (page 128)
• LAU Leakage setup (page 129)
• Advanced layouts (page 131)
• Working with DSU3-428 links (page 138)
• Radio telemetry (page 147)
• Test functions (page 164)
• The Form Line setup (page 174)
• The Synthetic setup (page 179)
• The Download setup (page 184)

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The main window
The main window

The Line client window provides access to all of the test and utility
functions necessary for management of seismic lines and spreads.
The main window gives a graphical or numeric representation of all
field equipment connected to the Line Controller Interface, together
with Sensor and Instrument test results. Selective colour coding is used
to highlight problems that may affect data quality.
Figure 5-1
The View menu allows you to customize the main window by choosing
one or more views to display. Then you can resize your display panes
by dragging the desired border.
For details on how you can arrange the views and toolbars as you would
like them, see the Hands-on guide (page 44).
Line and spread parameters are programmed through the Setup menu.
See The Survey setup (page 104) to describe the survey, and The Layout
setup (page 111) to generate markers.

December 4, 2006
Line
The main window
As soon as the line power is turned on, all the field units connected
become alive and can be viewed in the main window.
FDUs can be in one of two states: acquisition (seismonitor or
recording) or field update (the rest of the time). As a result the database
is continually updated.
Just after the line power is turned on, all FDUs are in field update mode
(unless no markers are defined). As a result, Resistance, Tilt and
Leakage Sensor tests are performed in real time and can be viewed.
Whenever a new field unit is laid out, it does not appear in the
topographic view until the spread is formed again. If the spread remains
5
the same for consecutive shots (VPs) in continuous mode, no spread
forming is performed, so any new unit laid out will not be visible unless
you program a Look between VPs in the Operation main window (see
Look on page 224). If any Sensor tests are selected in the The Look setup
(page 128), they are performed too (but if the Resistance value exceeds
the specified limit, e. g. if nothing is connected on the channel input, Tilt
and Leakage tests are not performed, even if they are selected in the
Look setup).
Note simply setting a Delay between two shots or VPs will also
cause a Look to be executed.
While active FDUs are collecting the data during acquisition, all passive
ones are still in field update mode and their states are continually
updated on the display if they are in lines that are not involved in the
acquisition. You can see right away if any extra units have been
connected to those lines, or if any sensors or cables (called paths) are at
fault. Any faulty elements, including cables, are displayed in red.
Connectors are shown too (to do that, the system uses the Link
properties recorded in each FDU).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
Topographic views
In this section:
• About topographic views (page 86)
• Sensor view (page 88)
• Instrument view (page 91)
• Battery view (page 93)
• Seismonitor (page 94)
• Working with graphic views (page 95)
About topographic views

Topographic views provide geographic displays of the results available
from field updates.
Use the View menu or toolbar buttons to choose the type of information
to display:
Figure 5-2
• Information on the survey (“Sensor” topo view).

• Information on field units (“Instrument” and “Battery” topo views).
• Sensor noise level (“Seismonitor” topo view).
Whatever the type of information displayed, the other results are just
one click away.

December 4, 2006
Line
Topographic views
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(8) (7) (6)
Figure 5-3 Topographic views
(1) The left-hand pane displays the whole survey. See Zooming
(page 96).
(2) Click on these buttons to expand or collapse the left-hand pane.
Drag the vertical border to resize the two panes.
(3) The right-hand pane displays a magnified view of the area
encompassed in the red frame selected in the left-hand pane. See
Zooming (page 96).
(4) The legend shows the programmed limits for

QC results. With the mouse pointer resting
on any element in the graphic view (Sensors/Seismonitor/
Instrument/Batteries) a tip box appears that shows the
identification of the element and its QC result if any is available,
depending on the choice made with the test option button. The
relevant legend automatically appears as the tip box shows up.
In the graphic view, the tested elements are green if within the
limits, red or blue otherwise. The limits for the sensor tests are

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
adjustable through the Survey Setup menu (using the Apply

Sensors button).
(5) Field On/Field Off button. Use this button
to turn on/off the power supply to the lines.
After you go to Field On, the field equipment connected to the
LCI-428 is visible in the Instrument view (if it is supplied with
power and loaded with the appropriate software version).
(6) Location of the mouse pointer within the graphic pane.
(7) Zoom out button: restores the previous zoom factor.
(8) Reset button: removes zooming.
Sensor view
This view shows the topographic stakes and the types of sensors in the
survey.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 5-4 Sensor topographic view

December 4, 2006
Line
Topographic views
(1) Use this button to show or hide the sensor type in the
graphic view. (The selected sensor type number appears
inside the icon).
(2) Use the Sensor QC Type button to select the
type of sensor whose test results you want to
display.
(3) This button looks for the units connected. and launches
the Sensor tests selected in the The Look setup
(page 128). See also Sensor tests (page 169). 5
(4) This option button is used to choose which
type of sensor QC test to launch (with the Go
button) and display.
(5) The Go button provides a shortcut for the test functions
available from the Test Setup menu. (See also Test
functions on page 164). It launches the selected QC test on the
selected units. (If no units are selected, then the test is performed
on the whole survey). This clears the test results, and the units
are shown in blue until the test is completed and new results are
available.
To select a set of units in the graphic view, see To select one or more
elements (page 95). After you launch a test function on any unit, a grey
background appears on that unit in the graphic view, meaning that the
unit is busy.
The colour of each sensor icon depends on the limits programmed for
the Sensor test selected using the option button (Resistance, Tilt, Noise,
Leakage). To change the Sensor test limits, see Sensor type (page 108)
in the description of The Survey setup.
Sensor icons in the graphic view are shown in:
• Green if within the Sensor test limits.
• Red if out of Sensor test limits.
• Light blue if not tested.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
Any mute sensor appears as a blue cross (no sensor is detected).

December 4, 2006
Line
Topographic views
Instrument view
This view shows all the field equipment connected in the survey.
(1) (2) (3)
FDU
5
Figure 5-5 Instrument topographic view
(1) This button looks for the units connected.
(2) This option button is used to choose which

type (Distortion, CMRR, Gain error, Phase
error, Noise, Crosstalk) of instrument QC test to launch (with the
Go button) and display. You do not need to click on Go to get
the results from self-tests (Auto Test option).
(3) The Go button provides a shortcut for the instrument
test functions available from the Test Setup menu. See
also Test functions (page 164). It launches the selected QC test on
the selected units. (If no units are selected, then the test is
performed on the whole survey). This clears the test results, and
the units are shown in blue until the test is completed and new
results are available.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
To select a set of units in the graphic view, see To select one or more
elements (page 95). After you launch a test function on any unit, a grey
background appears on that unit in the graphic view, meaning that the
unit is busy.
The buttons in the upper-left corner allow you to highlight or dim some
of the elements for better legibility.
.
Stakes
Cable path FDU 428XL LAUX
Figure 5-6
By default, the Instrument graphic view displays the results from self-
tests. The colour code is as follows:
• Green: The unit is identified and its self-test is correct.
• Orange: The unit is identified but no self-test has been performed
(because of a transmission problem).
• Red: The unit cannot be used, or its self-test failed. See
Numeric views (page 101) for details.
• Grey: There is no Marker on the line segment.

December 4, 2006
Line
Topographic views
Battery view
This view shows the battery-operated units deployed.
Legend Threshod adjust
Tip
5
Figure 5-7 Battery topographic view
With the mouse pointer resting on any battery-operated unit, a tip box
appears, showing the type of the unit, its serial number and its power
supply voltage. The legend at the top of the window shows the
programmed limit for the battery voltage, which is adjustable using the
Threshold slider button.
The icons in the Battery view are shown in green if the battery voltage
is above that threshold, red otherwise.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
Seismonitor
The Seismonitor topographic view allows you to view the sensors in
terms of input signal rather than sensor type.
It shows the active spread:
• Active sensors appear as green squares,
• Dead sensors appear as red squares,
• Mute sensors appear as dark blue squares,
• Stakes defined with no sensors appear as yellow crosses.
When the Seismonitor pushbutton is activated, this view also allows
real-time noise monitoring: the level on each receiver is represented
using eight 6-dB steps for both the height and colour (from green to red)
of each receiver icon, depending on the gain selected for Seismonitor.
The red colour step corresponds to the highest step in the level scale.
The scale adjusts itself

according to the gain Used to choose the
chosen seismonitor gain
Used to choose which Used to choose which

sensor types to show or sensor type gain to adjust
hide with the Gain slider button
Figure 5-8
The seismonitor gain is applied to both seismic and auxiliary traces.

The Gain slider button, in conjunction with the Sensor Type option
button, allows you to adjust the Seismonitor gain for each type of
sensor.

December 4, 2006
Line
Topographic views
Note Naturally, the Sensor noise on radio-type channels is not

viewed in real time. The radio-type channels noise display is
only refreshed each time you use the Look function.
Working with graphic views
To select one or more elements

With the mouse pointer resting on the first unit to be selected, press the
centre button of the mouse. Hold it down while dragging the pointer to
the last unit to be selected, then release it. A red background appears on
5
the selected units.
Press
Release
Figure 5-9 Selecting elements in graphic views
You can copy the selected area using the Control+ C shortcut (the
message “Copy Ready” should appear at the foot of the window) and
paste it into the Absolute Spread Setup window to create a spread
setup.
If you launch a test with the buttons in the upper-right corner of the
graphic pane after selecting a set of units, the test is only performed on
the units selected. The selection is replicated (in the form of an absolute
spread description) in the Test Setup window accessed via the Functions
menu.
To select a single unit, use the same method with a sufficient zoom
factor.
To unselect, click anywhere in the graphic pane.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
Zooming
With the mouse pointer resting anywhere in the graphic pane, press the
left button of the mouse. Drag the mouse pointer slowly in any
direction. This causes an elastic frame to show up that enlarges until you
stop dragging the mouse pointer. Release the mouse button. As a result,
the spread area encompassed in the elastic frame occupies the entire
right-hand pane.
Press mouse left button
Release
Mouse location
Figure 5-10 Zooming
To view a channel’s QC data

With the mouse pointer resting on a receiver position, a tip box appears,
showing the type of the unit, its serial number and the QC result. The
relevant legend automatically appears at the top of the window, showing
the programmed limits for that test.
Only the QC
Legend
result chosen
with the option
button is shown.
Tip
Figure 5-11 Viewing a channel’s QC data

December 4, 2006
Line
Topographic views
Still with the mouse pointer resting on a receiver position, pressing the
right-hand button of the mouse causes a menu to pop up. Selecting
Properties opens a window showing details on the receiver position.
The Properties of an FDU include its identification, status, and all
available QC results. Also in the Properties of an LAUX are its IP
address and Booster power supply voltage (48 V).
Figure 5-12 Viewing Instrument properties
Right-click shortcuts
With the mouse pointer resting on an element in the graphic Instruments
view, the menu that pops up when you press the right-hand button of the
mouse may prompt one or more contextual shortcuts that let you display
or change properties or parameters of the element.
For example, you can turn a receiver position mute without going
through the Setup menu: you simply have to right-click on the desired
position and select “Set Mute” from the menu that pops up. The
relevant setup (e. g. the Layout setup in this example) is automatically
updated.
See also Detour (page 118).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
Checkerboard view
With many units to be shown in the graphic view, the system may
decide to switch to the checkerboard view mode because there is no
room for all icons.
FDU LAUL LAUX
Transverse path
Figure 5-13 Checkerboard view
In the checkerboard view mode, icons are shrunk so that they can fit in
the graphic pane. Colours are still significant but control units (LAUX,
LAUL) and anomalies are emphasized so that you can spot them easily.
Then you can zoom in to see details.
All the FDUs making up a link are shrunk into a single rectangular icon
whose colour reflects the global QC of the link: faults (shown in red or
orange) take precedence over any other QC values, i. e. the link’s icon
turns red if any one status in the link is at fault.

December 4, 2006
Line
Topographic views
Paths
Links can be viewed using the Cable Path button in Instrument views.
Detour End of a link

(connector)
Figure 5-14
The following conventions are used for cable paths:

• Green: OK.
• Orange: Sensed, but a transmit error was encountered.
• Red: A problem was encountered at the end of the cable.
The graphical view of paths helps you isolate any transmission trouble:
if the system finds the transfer time from a unit to the next is
inconsistent, the suspect path is displayed in red and, if the path is
included in the active spread, an alert window pops up when you click
on Go to launch an acquisition.
Viewing details
Double-clicking on a Detour or an FDU (or DSU) opens a detailed view
that allows you to see how many units are included in the Detour or the
Link.
Detail Double-click
Figure 5-15

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Topographic views
Detail
Double-click
Figure 5-16
Field equipment traceability

Right-clicking on a field unit (FDU, DSU, LAUL, LAUX, LAUR, etc.)
and selecting Get Traceability from the shortcut menu that pops up
causes the system to look for history records in the EEPROM memory
of that unit (first, you must go to Field Off then Field On).
Figure 5-17
To see the traceability information, select Look Traceability from the

popup menu on the same unit. This causes a window to pop up,
providing information on manufacturing and any changes made
afterwards (Printed circuit board release, list of change notices,
Manufacturing date, etc.).
Figure 5-18

December 4, 2006
Line
Numeric views
Numeric views
Use the View menu or toolbar buttons to choose which type of data to
display.
Numeric views display the available results in tables.
Drag border
to resize
5
Use scrollbar to view
Click to filter hidden columns
errors
Figure 5-19 Sensor numeric view
• Those results which do not fall within the limits specified in the Setup
menu are shown with a red background. If you wish to view only
those results, tick the Error Only option.
• All columns are resizable. Adjust the width if any value fails to fit in.
(With the mouse pointer resting on the border of a column, left-click
and drag the border as required).
• You can show or hide columns by right-clicking in any column
heading and selecting Customize (see Figure 2-24).
• Left-clicking on the heading in any column causes the data in that
column to be sorted in ascending order. Clicking one more time
reverses the order, and so on.
• After you connect a new unit to a line, the unit is added at the top of
the table. The list is not sorted until you click on a column heading.
• The results are cleared each time a test function is launched.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Numeric views
Figure 5-20 Sensor numeric view (continued)
Figure 5-21 Instrument numeric view
For an LAUL or LAUX, the “Booster Failure” column shows the status
of the +24 V and -24 V power supplies (a failure is reported if the
voltage is below 24 V) and the “Leakage error” column shows the result
from the leakage test (see LAU Leakage setup on page 129). For an LRU,
leakage cannot be measured.
A History views allow you to view the Serial number, Line number,
Point number and geographical position of each unit, along with the
date and time when it was last seen (Last Access) and first seen
(Creation Date) in the survey.

December 4, 2006
Line
Histogram view
Histogram view
Results from Sensor tests and Instrument tests can be displayed in the
form of histograms in Histogram views.
.
Lower end of
manual scale Upper end
Figure 5-22 Histogram view
Unless you choose the Manual range option, the horizontal scale is
automatically adjusted so that all samples can be shown. If you choose
Manual range, then the associated fields prompt the outermost values
of the horizontal scale, so that you can change them and adjust the scale
manually. (Click Apply to enable your settings)
See Bar charts (page 29).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Survey setup
The Survey setup

In this section:
• General (page 104)
• Survey (page 105)
• Point Code (page 107)
• Sensor type (page 108)
General
You open this window by selecting Survey from the Setup menu.
Input fields
List box
(empty)
Figure 5-23
It is used to provide information about the area of the survey prospect

where the crew is working. You access three categories of information
using the three tabs described in detail below: Survey (page 105), Point
Code (page 107) and Sensor type (page 108).
To make changes to any row in the list box, double-click on it, fill in the
fields above the list, then click Add or Change or Delete, as required.
To save the current settings, click Apply All with the lines turned OFF
(Field Off). This activates the choices made with all three tabs. In
contrast, whether the Lines are on or off, you can click Apply Sensor
to activate only the test result limits settings made using the Sensor tab.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Survey setup
To revert to the former settings, click Reset instead of Apply.
Survey
To determine the crew’s survey prospect area, you have to specify the
start and end points of the lines, together with any gaps caused by
obstacles or whatever. To do that you’ll click on the Survey tab.
5
100-103p1,106-110p1,111-115p2,116-120p3
Receiver
points
Point
Code Gap Different Point Codes
Figure 5-24 Survey setup
Line
This index box is used to enter line numbers.
Tip: For example, entering 10-60/10 in the “Line” index box will
generate lines 10, 20, 30, 40, 60 in one click on Add.
Line numbers do not need to be arranged in any order. For instance you
may well wish to insert line 70 between lines 30 and 40: click line 30 in
the list box (its number appears in this index box), enter 70 in the index
box and click Add.
It is important, however, to understand that the graphic display in the
main window reflects the Survey setup. In other words, seismic lines
will be shown on the screen in the order in which they appear in this list
box, and not necessarily in the sequence they are laid out on the ground
or connected to the recording instruments.
Note The traces recorded in the SEGD file will be in the same order
as in the Survey setup.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Survey setup
If line numbers are arranged in ascending or descending order, you can

easily reverse the order using the Reverse button as required.
Receiver Section
The Receiver Section field is used to assign a Point Code to each
Receiver Position in each line.
The syntax for the Point Code is p_ (example: p1). The Point Code
determines the type of sensor used. You define Point Codes in the
window accessed by clicking on the Point Code tab (see page 107).
On lines that do not use the same point code everywhere, you have to
split the description of the receiver section into as many series of
adjacent stakes with a common point code as necessary.
In the example provided in Figure 5-24 on page 105, stakes 100 to 110
have the same point code (p1) but the series of receiver positions is split
because a gap with no channels is planned between stakes 103 and 106.
,
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
This is the graphical display resulting from the above

example of survey description.
Figure 5-25
The stakes must be numbered in ascending order, usually with an

increment of 1 but you can use an increment other than 1.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Survey setup
Tip: Example with an increment other than 1 for the receiver positions:
entering 100-150p1/10 as a receiver section will generate receiver
positions 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 in one click on Add.
Point Code
Some applications require the use of different types of sensor within the
same spread. An example would be a transition zone survey, where
geophones are employed on land and hydrophones in water. See also
Working with DSU3-428 links (page 138).
5
To specify the type of sensor to be used in a receiver section, you assign
a Point Code to it (see Survey on page 105).
You define Point Codes in this window:
Figure 5-26 Point Code setup
Nb
Used to enter Point Code numbers. The system will automatically add
the letter “p”. You must define at least one Point Code.
Label
Used to identify the Point Code in plain.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Survey setup
Sensor Type
Syntax: s_ (example: s1+s2).
Used to enter the sensor type or types associated with the point code.
Sensor types are defined in the window accessed by clicking on the
Sensor tab.
Sensor type
When Sensor tests are to be performed, the electrical characteristics will
not necessarily be the same across the entire spread and therefore it may
be pointless to apply the same resistance, tilt (pulse response) and noise
test limits everywhere. Instead, the system allows several sets of limits
to be specified, each one appropriate to a particular sensor type. It is
then sufficient to define the zones in which each type of sensor can be
found, using Survey (page 105), and the system will automatically apply
the relevant limit for each measurement.
See also Working with DSU3-428 links (page 138).
You can define different sensor types in this window.
Figure 5-27 Sensor setup
Nb
Used to enter Sensor Types numbers. You must define at least one
Sensor Type.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Survey setup
Label
Used to identify the Sensor Type in plain.
Continuity
Upper and lower limit for the sensor impedance. Any channel with a
sensor impedance falling outside the range specified in the Min and
Max fields is reported at fault in sensor views (and shown in red in
graphic views).
Tilt
5
Maximum geophone tilt percentage. Alert threshold in the display of
Sensor Tilt test results.
Noise
Maximum RMS noise level. Alert threshold in the display of Sensor
Noise test results.
Leakage
Alert threshold in the display of Sensor Leakage test results. The
Leakage test measures the global leakage resistance between the
seismic channel and the earth ground.
SEGD Code
Figure 5-28

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Survey setup
Clicking the button associated with this field causes a list box to pop up
so that you can select the SEGD code of the type of sensor used. This
code has no effect on the performance of the system. It is only written
to tape (byte 21 in block 1 of the Trace Header Extension).

December 4, 2006
Line
The Layout setup
The Layout setup

In this section:
• Markers (page 112)
• Auxiliary channels (page 116)
• Mute channels (page 121)
General
5
Input fields
List box
(empty)
Figure 5-29
Having defined the lines that will be used in the survey, using The
Survey setup (page 104), it is necessary to provide information for the
central unit to capture the actual layout of those lines, using the layout
setup window.
You open this window by selecting Layout from the Setup menu.
You don’t have to supply the location of each and every element in the
survey: you only have to create a marker (fully identified with its unit
type, serial number, topographic stake number) in each line segment.
This will enable the system to automatically see how your field
equipment is deployed. In this window, you also specify the location of

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Layout setup
auxiliary channels, detours, and inactive channels if any. You also have
to describe all radio telemetry units.
Note The selection you make by clicking on any row in the list box is
reflected in the main window’s graphic view: the cursor
automatically moves to the selected unit.
To save and enable your changes, click Apply. (To revert to the former
settings, click Reset instead).
Markers
Use this window to specify the location, unit type and serial number of
at least one unit (FDU, LAUL, LAUX or LRU) in each line segment
actually connected. After you define the markers, the system is able to
collect the status of all units connected, as soon as lines are turned on.
Then it will continually update the view in the main window.
.
At least one
marker on
each line
Figure 5-30 Marker setup
Tip: To enter a marker, you can drag and drop a unit from the main
window (Instrument graphic view) to the markers list box.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Layout setup
Box Type
As its label suggests, this field is used to choose the type of unit
(LCI428, LAUX428, etc.). Select the type actually implemented at the
location chosen as a marker
S. N.
Serial number of the unit actually implemented at the location chosen
as a marker.
Line Name
5
Used to specify the number of the Line the marker is attached to.
IMPORTANT
Each line should have at least one marker. If the line is composed of
several segments, enter a marker on each segment.
Below are two examples:
Two line segments with a transverse cable used as a detour
Enter one marker for this Enter another marker for

line segment this line segment
Transverse cable
Figure 5-31

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Layout setup
End-to-end line segments with no wireline connection

Enter one marker for Enter another marker
this line segment for this line segment
No wireline
connection
r r
ke ke
ar ar
M M
Figure 5-32
Point Nb
Used to specify the Point Number (i. e. stake number) of the location
used as a marker.
Note By convention, an LAUL or LAUX assumes the number of the

first topographic stake encountered on its Low side.
(Remember topographic stakes are defined in the Survey
Setup).
110 111 112 113
To set a marker on this

LAUX, enter 111 as Point
Number
Figure 5-33
Channel Nb
Used to specify the channel number implemented at the location used
as a marker, in the case of a multi-channel unit.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Layout setup
Marker Increment
Typically, the Marker Increment is set to 1, meaning that a receiver
channel is deployed at each stake number.
Line 109 110 111 112 113 114 115

10 LAUX
428 r
ke FDU
ar
M xxxx
5
FDU-428 xxxx 10 112 1
Figure 5-34
To implement a Receiver Position (i. e. a receiver channel) every “n”

stake numbers on a line segment, enter “n” into the Marker Increment
field. See Logical line mapped with several physical lines on page 133.
Reversed
Typically, the “Reversed” button should be left unticked.
This button is used to reverse the direction of the assignment of receiver
channels to receiver positions over a line segment.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Layout setup
Auxiliary channels
Figure 5-35 Auxiliary channel setup
Use this window to describe auxiliary channels. You can use FDUs
connected direct to the 428XL control module and also FDUs located
anywhere in the spread.
Tip: To enter an auxiliary channel, you can drag and drop a unit from
the main window (Instrument graphic view) to the list box.
In the topographic view of the spread, all auxiliary channels are
gathered at the record unit position.
Nb
Row number in the list box. This identification number is used in the
Instrument tests (page 167) setup to specify which auxiliary channels to
test.
Label
Used to assign a name to the Auxiliary channel (e. g. Pilot). That label
is used in the Operation window to describe the type of processing to
perform to generate an auxiliary trace. See Correlation with (page 204).

December 4, 2006
Line
The Layout setup
Box Type
Used to choose the type of unit used for this auxiliary channel (FDU,
FDU428, FDU2S, etc.).
S. N.
Used to enter the Serial Number of the unit used for this auxiliary
channel.
Channel Nb
Used to specify the channel number of this auxiliary channel, in the case
5
of a multi-channel unit.
Gain
Used to choose the preamplifier gain for this auxiliary channel. See the
gain code table on page 123.
DPG
This field only appears if two or more vibrator controllers (DPGs) are
attached to the system (for example if vibrator fleets are used in Slip-
Sweep mode).
The DPG field is used to specify which DPG enclosure this auxiliary
channel is attached to. You have to enter the “DPG Module” number
that is prompted when you run the Look function in the VE432 window.
Each type of auxiliary signal supplied by DPGs working in Slip-Sweep
mode must be identified with the same name (e. g. “Pilot”), in the Label
field, for each DPG.
Same Two
name DPGs
Figure 5-36 Auxiliary channels from DPGs in Slip-Sweep mode

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Layout setup
Comments
Used to enter any comment you think necessary, for example if the
Label is not self-explanatory.
Detour
Use this window to specify the location of detours, if any, between
receiver positions. All units within a detour will be inactive (unused).
Last active channel First active channel

on Low side on High side
Figure 5-37 Detour setup
Below is a typical example where a detour is set between two adjacent

receiver positions.
1068 1069
Last active unit on Low First active unit on

side (enter its Serial No. High side (enter its
Unused unit
into Low S. N. field) Serial No. into High
SN field)
Figure 5-38
To create that detour, you can use the Detour setup window or the
shortcuts available by right-clicking in the Instrument topographical
view.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Layout setup
(1) Right-click on last active unit on the Low side and choose “Set low
box of detour” from the popup menu. A flag should appear on that unit.
(2) Right-click on first active unit on the High side and choose “Set
high box of detour” from the popup menu.
(1) (2)
Denotes low end of

5
detour
Detour a
detour
Figure 5-39
This automatically creates the detour in the setup window (see the
description of each field below).
Low Box Type

Used to specify the Type of the adjacent active unit located ahead of
(on the Low side of) the detour.
Low S. N.
Used to specify the Serial Number of the adjacent active unit located
ahead of (on the Low side of) the detour, meaning that the unit on the
other side is the Low end of the detour.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Layout setup
Low Chann. Nb
In the case of a multi-channel unit, use this field to specify the adjacent
active channel ahead of (on the Low side of) the detour, meaning that
the channel on the other side is the Low end of the detour.
High Box Type

Used to specify the Type of the adjacent active unit located after (on
the High side of) the detour.
High S. N.
Used to specify the Serial Number of the adjacent active unit located
after (on the High side of) the detour, meaning that the unit on the other
side is the High end of the detour.
High Chann. Nb
In the case of a multi-channel unit, use this field to specify the adjacent
active channel after (on the High side of) the detour, meaning that the
channel on the other side is the High end of the detour.
Stop Marking
Typically, the Stop Marking button should be left unticked.
This button is only used where a change is required in the automatic
assignment of receiver channels to receiver positions. (See also
Advanced layouts (page 131)).

December 4, 2006
Line
The Layout setup
Mute channels
5
Figure 5-40 Mute setup
Use this window to specify the location of mute receiver points, if any.
The channel from a mute receiver point is acquired, but its data is
zeroed. In the case of multi-sensor receiver point, all channels are mute.
Tip: To enter a mute receiver point, you can drag and drop it from the
main window (Instrument graphic view) to the list box.
Line Name, Point Number

Used to specify the location of a mute unit.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Spread Type setup

In this section:
• Absolute spreads (page 123)
• Generic spreads (page 125)
General
You have to specify the complete acquisition spread to be used for each
and every shot. The programming of these spreads can be done not only
automatically via SPS files but also manually, using the editing tools
provided by the GUI.
Enter the description of your spread here
Figure 5-41 Spread type setup
In either case, a shorthand method of defining all of the channels to be

used is available in the 428XL. The concept of a “Generic Spread”
(generic means “Standard”) is especially helpful for manual
programming. The alternative method uses “Absolute Spreads”, which
are more suitable for automated programming.
To define a new spread in the list box, fill in the description,
identification number and label fields, then click Add.

December 4, 2006
Line
Absolute spreads
An absolute spread is defined in terms of line and stake numbers, for
example: Line 10, from stake 101 to stake 103, then from stake 106 to
stake 115. (It therefore follows that you need to define a completely new
absolute spread every time the acquisition spread moves even by a
single receiver point).
5
Gain code
10:101-103g1,106-115g1
20:101-103g1,106-115g1
30:101-103g1,106-115g1
40:101-103g1,106-115g1
Figure 5-42 Absolute spread setup
Enter a colon (:) between the Line Number and the Receiver positions.
Enter a hyphen (-) to specify a series of Receiver positions.
Enter a comma (,) to specify a gap between two or more Receiver
positions (or to specify series of Receiver positions with different
channel gain codes (e. g. 106-110g1,11-115g2).
To describe another Line or set of Lines, press Return or type a slash
character (/).
The system automatically adds “as” (abbreviation for “Absolute
Spread”) ahead of the Identification Number in the list box.
Choose the gain code from the table below.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Gain Code Input scale FDU DSU3
g1 1600 mv 0 dB 5 m/s²
g2 400 mV 12 dB
Tip: A simple way of creating an absolute spread type consists of

selecting the desired spread in the graphic view with the mouse,
copying the selected area and pasting it into the Spread Type setup
window. See Figure 5-9 on page 95.
You can benefit from the extra large acquisition capacity of the 428XL
to speed up shooting, by defining a “Superspread” in the Absolute
Spread setup and using it in the Operation window. The Superspread
itself is an absolute spread that encompasses several successive
absolute spreads. With a Superspread, you save time because after the
Superspread is formed, line forming is not required every time the
active spread moves (unless the Aux descriptor changes). See
Superspread (page 218).
Superspread
Figure 5-43
WARNING
When you are using a Superspread, the Gain code for any given trace
must be the same in all individual spreads making up the Superspread,
and in the Superspread itself (because the acquisition of a trace must be
done with the Gain code specified for that trace in the active individual
spread).

December 4, 2006
Line
Generic spreads
A generic spread describes the pattern of the active channels. The
fundamental difference between an absolute and a generic spread is that
generic definitions are always relative. You may wish to define one
generic spread to be used throughout the life of a crew.
To take a textbook example, a symmetrical split spread could be defined
as a number of lines with 100 stakes, a gap of 2 and then another 100
stakes. There is nothing in the basic definition that says where the
spread should be implemented. If one or more receiver units fall outside
the boundaries or within a gap specified in the Survey Setup, those
5
channels, will not be implemented.
Generic Line
Generic spread
Generic Line
Generic Line
Generic Line
Figure 5-44
Line
50g1+50g2
Figure 5-45
The description of generic spreads makes use of Generic Line Types

that you define in this window. When you describe a Generic Line Type
December 4, 2006
5 Line
you assign a gain code to a set of channels. See the gain code table
above.
Note If any receiver units are laid out between receiver points, they
must be described as “Skipped channels (page 131)” or
“detours” in the The Layout setup (page 111).
Note To skip receiver points, enter rs in the description.

Use brackets to repeat sets of two or more gain codes, with a repetition
factor placed ahead of the leading bracket. Below are two examples:
• 10(g1+g2) will describe 10 pairs of channels where, in each pair, the
1st channel has a 0 dB gain and the 2nd channel a 12 dB gain.
• 10(g1+rs) will describe 10 pairs of channels where, in each pair, the

1st channel has a 0 dB gain and the 2nd channel is skipped.
The system automatically adds the letter "l" ahead of the Identification
Number in the list box.
Spread
10l1+10l2
Figure 5-46
When you describe a Generic Spread type you assign a generic Line
Type to a set of lines. Line types are defined in the Generic Line
window.
To skip lines, enter ls in the description.

December 4, 2006
Line
Use brackets to repeat sets of two or more lines, with a repetition factor
placed ahead of the leading bracket. For example 10(l1+ls) will
describe 10 pairs of lines where, in each pair, the 1st line is L1-type and
the 2nd is skipped.
The system automatically adds “sd” (abbreviation for “Spread
Descriptor”) ahead of the Identification Number in the list box.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Look setup
The Look setup

You open this window by selecting “Look
Setup” from the Setup menu. The Look
function is used to see if any new units are
connected, so as to display them in the Line
main window.
Look
Figure 5-47
• Manual: Each LAU will only identify the
connected units when you go to “Field On”
or you click on the “Look” button.
If a disruption arises, only the units encountered on the connected line
segment are re-identified by the LAU.
In the event of a transmission sync error, a red path appears at the
output of the LAU controlling the line segment affected. You have to
launch a manual Look to re-identify the FDUs located between the
LAU and the disruption.
• Auto (default option): Each LAU continually looks for any new units
connected so as to identify them.
On a line segment including an LSI, the automatic look is disabled:
to see new FDUs, you must use manual Look in that case.
With Tests
After each Look, whether Automatic or Manual, the Sensor tests you
choose with these buttons (Resistance, Tilt, Leakage) will be performed
on the FDUs identified.
The Resistance and Tilt tests are selected by default.
In “field update” mode, if the Resistance value exceeds the specified
limit (e. g. with nothing connected on the channel input), the Tilt and
Leakage tests are not performed, even if they are selected in this setup.

December 4, 2006
Line
LAU Leakage setup
LAU Leakage setup

A leakage sensor circuitry in each LAU senses any leakage arising
between a conductor in the telemetry cable and ground.
The LAU Leakage command available from the Setup menu allows you
to set an alert level. If the leakage current exceeds that alert level, the
LAU reports a fault to the GUI. As a result, the LAU is shown in red in
the Instrument topographic view and a Leakage error appears in the
Instrument numeric view for that LAU.
5
Tells you which port

Available from is affected Leakage current
Setup menu displayed in red if
exceeding alert level.
Figure 5-48
The “Connections” column in the Instruments graphical view, and the

properties of an LAU (available on a right-click) tell you which port(s)
is (are) powered up, so you can see which port is affected by leakage. In
the case of an LAUX, you can use the Form Line function to enable/
disable its low or high port in order to discriminated between the two
ports.
In each LAU, a leakage measurement is taken every 5 seconds, using
the test circuitry shown on the simplified diagram below.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
LAU Leakage setup
LAUL FDU
or
LAUX
Telemetry pair
+24 V FDU 6.3 V

Pwr
Sply 2.7 V
-24 V
Telemetry pair
Leakage
Leakage current
Rsense ADC
Housing
Leakage
current
Figure 5-49
Note: Leakage between the two telemetry pairs is not revealed by this
test circuitry, but transmission may be lost as a result of such leakage.

December 4, 2006
Line
Advanced layouts
Advanced layouts
Some fields or options (like “Marker Increment”, “Stop Marking”,
“Reversed”) in the Setup windows make the deployment of 428XL
field electronics extremely flexible. Below are textbook examples of
advanced layouts that can easily be implemented:
• Skipped channels (page 131).
• Logical line mapped with several physical lines (page 133)
• Detour with skipped receiver points (page 135) 5
• Snaking layout (page 136)
Skipped channels
You may want to skip channels because, for example, you want to
increase the receiver spacing without changing the spacing of your
FDUs. In that case, the inactive units laid out between the active
receiver points must be specified as “Skipped Channels” in the Point
Code used, by adding the code “cs” in the Sensor Type field (in the
Survey setup window).
Example with a Marker on an FDU

2 skipped 2 skipped
channels channels
109 110 111
LAUX
r
ke FDU
ar xxxx
M
1 2 skipped s1+cs+cs
FDU xxxx 10 110
Figure 5-50
Note A distinction must be made between “skipping channels” and

“skipping receiver points”. To skip some receiver points, you

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Advanced layouts
may use the Spread setup (see page 126) or the Detour setup
(see page 135).
Example with a Marker on an LAUX

The system uses the following rule in interpreting the Point Code:
if an LAUX is used as a Marker, the Sensor Type (e. g. “s1”) specified
in the Point Code is assigned to the first channel encountered on the
“Low” side of the LAUX (if none is found on the Low side, a virtual
channel is assumed).
In the example below, the Point Code will be interpreted by the system
as follows:
• On line 10, using “s1+cs+cs” as a Point Code assigns “s1” to the first
channel encountered on the “Low” side of the LAUX,
• On line 20, using “s1+cs+cs” as a Point Code assigns “s1” to the third
channel on the High side because none is found on the Low side.
2 skipped 2 skipped
channels channels
109 110 111
Line LAUX
10 r
ke xxxx
ar
M
2 skipped 2 skipped
channels channels
109 110 111
Line LAUX
20 r
ke yyyy
ar
M
A virtual channel is assumed on the Low side
LAUX xxxx 10 109 1 2 skipped s1+cs+cs

LAUX yyyy 20 109
Figure 5-51

December 4, 2006
Line
Advanced layouts
In the example below, do not use the LAUX as a Marker. Use an FDU
instead.
2 skipped 2 skipped
channels channels
109 110 111
Line
LAUX
10 r
ke xxxx
ar
M
FDU xxxx 10 109

1 2 skipped s1+cs+cs 5
Figure 5-52
Logical line mapped with several physical lines
Line
109 110 111 112 113 114 115
10 LAUX
428 r
ke
Line ar FDU
M xxxx
10 LAUX
428 r
ke FDU
Line ar
M yyyy
10 LAUX
428 r
ke FDU FDU
ar
M zzzz nnnn
Line
20 LAUX
428
Line
20 LAUX
428
FDU-428 xxxx 10 109 3
FDU-428 yyyy 10 110 3
FDU-428 zzzz 10 111 3
Figure 5-53
The flexibility of channel assignment in the 428XL allows you to split

a line into several segments laid out side by side (or group several
segments laid out side by side into one logical line). For example, this

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Advanced layouts
lets you shorten the receiver spacing without changing the spacing of
your FDUs.
In the Marker setup window, set a marker assigning a known FDU to
a known receiver position on each segment to be grouped, with the same
Line number and the same Marker Increment (chosen to be equal to the
number of segments).
When you go to “Field On”, each split line will act as a single line.
Below is an example where three segments are grouped into one logical
line (or a line is split into three segments).
Note The segments making up the split line don’t need to be attached
to the same LCI board.
Note The Marker position can be chosen elsewhere within each line
segment, that is on any FDU belonging in the line segment. For
instance, if it is easier for you to know the position of FDU No.
nnnn, you may just as well set the marker on it rather than FDU
No. zzzz.
Note If any detour is implemented in a split line, it must be described
in each segment making up the split line.
Line 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116

10
r r
ke xxxx ke nnnn
10 ar ar
M r M r
ke yyyy ke
ar ar uuuu
10 M M
er r
ke vvvv
a rk zzzz ar
M M
FDU-428 xxxx FDU-428 nnnn

FDU-428 yyyy FDU-428 uuuu
FDU-428 zzzz FDU-428 vvvv
Figure 5-54

December 4, 2006
Line
Advanced layouts
Detour with skipped receiver points
109 110 111 112 113 114 115

Line
10 r FDU r
ke ke FDU
ar xxxx ar yyyy
M M
5
FDU-428 xxxx 10 110 1
FDU-428 yyyy 10 114 1
FDU-428 xxxx FDU-428 yyyy
Figure 5-55
To implement this example:

• You have to set two markers (one on either side of the detour);
• In the Detour setup, you must choose the Stop Marking option. This
will actually assign FDU No. yyyy to Receiver Position 114.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Advanced layouts
Snaking layout
Line 109 110 111 112 113 114

10 LAUX
r FDU
ke xxxx uuuu
ar
M
(*)
FDU
Line yyyy
20 r
FDU ke FDU
ar
nnnn M vvvv
(*)
(*) Those FDUs
must be declared
Line with the “Stop
30 r Marking” option
ke FDU
ar zzzz ticked.
M
LAUX-428 xxxx 10 108 1

FDU-428 vvvv 20 113 1
FDU-428 zzzz 30 109 1
FDU-428 uuuu FDU-428 vvvv

FDU-428 yyyy FDU-428 zzzz
Figure 5-56
An example of “snaking” layout is shown above. In the Detour setup

window, create a detour on each change in the direction of the
assignment of receiver channels to stake positions, each time choosing
the Stop Marking option. In the Marker setup window, be sure there
is a marker on either side of each detour, using the “Reversed” option
where channels are assigned in decreasing order of stake positions.
The Marker position can be chosen elsewhere within each line segment,
that is on any FDU, LAUL or LAUX belonging in the line segment. For

December 4, 2006
Line
Advanced layouts
instance, if it is easier for you to know the position of FDU No. nnnn,
you may just as well set the marker on it rather than FDU No. vvvv.
The snaking topology cannot be used in place of any secondary
transverse.
LAUX LAUX LAUX

428 428 428
Secondary
NO YES Transverse
LAUX
428 LAUX
428
LAUX
428 5
Figure 5-57

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Working with DSU3-428 links

In this section:
• DSU3-428 topology (page 138)
• DSU3-428 in the Survey Setup (page 139)
• DSU3-428 in the Layout Setup (page 141)
• DSU3 in the Spread Setup (page 142)
• DSU3 in the Test Setup (page 142)
• Form Line function (page 143)
• Acquisition using DSU3 channels (page 145)
• DSU3 tilt correction (page 146)
DSU3-428 topology
The channel assignment in the DSU3 is as follows:
• Channel 1 is assigned to the Vertical sensor,
• Channel 2 is assigned to the Inline horizontal sensor,
• Channel 3 is assigned to the Crossline horizontal sensor.
For 3C polarity conventions see 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3.
The arrow engraved in the
Arrow engraved
cable takeout overmould in DUS3 takeout
points to the positive direction
of the Inline horizontal axis of
ch1 ch2 ch3
the DSU3. (V) (I) (C)
Figure 5-58 DSU3-428 topology

December 4, 2006
Line
DSU3-428 in the Survey Setup
Sensor
If the system is configured for operation with both FDU and DSU
channels (in the Install window), a distinct setup window is available
for each type of channel.
You have to define three Sensor Types (s1, s2, s3), i. e. one for each
sensor in the DSU3, using the Sensor tab in the Survey Setup window
.
Figure 5-59
The system assigns the Sensor Types as follows:

• s1 is automatically assigned to Channel 1 (Vertical);
• s2 is automatically assigned to Channel 2 (Horizontal, Inline);
• s3 is automatically assigned to Channel 3 (Horizontal, Crossline).
In the “Tilt” (Degrees) and “Noise” (µm/s2) fields, enter the desired
limits for the results of Sensor tests. Note that no Instrument test results
will be available for DSUs that return a Tilt error.
Choose the appropriate SEGD code for each axis. The SEGD code is
not used by the GUI. It is only written to tape (byte 21 in block 1 of the
Trace Header Extension).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Point Code
1 DSU3 channels s1+s2+s3
Figure 5-60
After defining three Sensor Types for a DSU3, define its Point Code as
s1+s2+s3.

December 4, 2006
Line
DSU3-428 in the Layout Setup
Marker
A DSU3 can be used as a marker in a line segment, just like an FDU.
Aux
You cannot use any DSU3 for auxiliary channels. FDUs must be used
for auxiliary channels, even if all seismic channels are DSU channels.
Detour
5
If any DSU3 is included in a detour, all three channels are part of the
detour.
Snaking layouts are allowed. In the example below, you must set a
Detour with DSU3 No. 4149963 (point No. 1216) as the last active
channel at the Low end of the detour, and DSU3 No. 4151751 (point
No. 1216) as the first active channel at the High end of the detour. Also
you must activate the “Stop Marking” option.
No. 4149963
No. 4151751
Figure 5-61
Note: In the Marker setup, you have to set a marker on Line 160 (for
example assign point No. 1216 to DSU3 No. 4151751), and activate the
“Reversed” option for that marker. See also Snaking layout on page 136.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Mute
If a DSU3 is planted at a muted receiver point, all three channels are
mute. The maximum allowable number of mute receiver points is 1024.
DSU3 in the Spread Setup

Use the same syntax as with FDU channels to describe receiver
positions.
DSU3-428 channels have a single input scale (gain code G1).
DSU3 in the Test Setup

Naturally, the channel electronics and the accelerometers in a DSU3 are
tested as a whole assembly, never as separate functions. Therefore, the
distinction between “Instrument” and “Sensor” tests is not significant
for a DSU. However, because DSU links can be used jointly with FDU
links in a spread, some DSU tests are regarded as Instrument tests and
others as Sensor tests.
The following tests are available for the DSU:
- Sensor tests: Tilt (degrees), Noise (µm/s2).
- Instrument tests: Distortion, Gain/Phase, Crosstalk, Gravity.
DSU3-428 channels have a single input scale (gain code G1).
If the spread you specify in the Test Setup includes both FDU and DSU3
channels, the system only applies the test to the channels that support
that test, with the relevant test limits. For the syntax to be correct in the
Absolute Spread Setup, you have to specify a gain code (e. g.
10:100-150g1) but the system actually uses the gain selected with the
Gain option button.
The limits for DSU3 Instrument test results are contained in files (one
for each allowable sample rate) the format of which is described in
428XL User’s Manual Vol. 2. The Instrument test limits for the DSU3

December 4, 2006
Line
are distinct from those for the FDU. For the factory-settings of
Instrument test limits, see Specifications in User’s Manual Vol. 3.
The limits for Sensor tests are user-selected in the Survey Setup (see
Sensor on page 139).
Form Line function

As usual, the Form Line function is applied to the number of channels
you specify in the “Channels to Form” field. This must be a multiple
of 3 if you apply Form Line to a DSU line segment.
5
Sensor view
Figure 5-62

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Instruments view
Figure 5-63
Seismonitor
The Gain slider button, in conjunction with the Sensor Type option
button, allows you to adjust the Seismonitor gain for each type of sensor
(i. e. each channel).
Used to choose which channel

to adjust with the Gain slider
button
Figure 5-64

December 4, 2006
Line
You can open a separate view to monitor each Sensor Type. Any
change to the seismonitor gain for a Sensor Type in a window is
replicated in the other windows.
Acquisition using DSU3 channels

To work with DSU3 lines, you must enable that option in the Install
window.
DSU3 links can be used jointly with analog-sensor units (FDU, etc.)
within a spread, but a DSU3 line segment (i. e. a portion of line that
includes DSU3 channels and is delimited by two LAUs) should include
5
only DSU3 channels. The DSU3 is compatible with all 428XL
components and with QC tools (eSQC Pro, eSGA).
DSU3 channels use the same Filter and Sample Rate as FDU channels.
While performing seismic acquisition, the LAU controlling the DSU3
corrects all inherent errors (attributable to the construction or geometry
of the DSU3). It does not correct Tilt errors attributable to planting, nor
does it remove the offset resulting from the tilt angle (that offset is
removed by the central unit).
In order to see if DSU3 units are properly planted, a Tilt test should be
done from time to time (this can be automated with the Auto Look
option; see The Look setup on page 128). The Tilt test will return the tilt
angle of the I- and C-channels, that is the angle between the direction
axis of the channel and the horizontal plane. For 3C polarity
conventions, see 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3. The results from the Tilt
test are recorded in the Trace Header. This allows corrections to be
made at a later date. See DSU3 tilt correction (page 146).
The Descale Multiplier recorded in the Scan Type Header allows
recorded samples to be converted into mV. See User’s Manual Vol. 3
(Reference Information).
The sensor Sensitivity is recorded in the Trace Header (453 mV/m/s2).
See User’s Manual Vol. 2 (SEGD format).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
DSU3 tilt correction

In the Install window, you can choose to enable or disable correction of
DSU3 traces with the tilt angle recorded during tilt tests. See
Instruments On Field (page 59).
If you choose to enable tilt correction, the correction to each trace is
done using the formula given in User’s Manual Vol. 3 (Reference
Information).
If tilt correction is enabled and a DSU3 does not have any tilt test result
available, then the correction is not done on its channels and a warning
message is displayed.
If any square root cannot be calculated because the value involved is
negative, the correction is not done and a message is displayed.

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
Radio telemetry
In this section:
• Radio telemetry equipment (page 147)
• Instrument Topographic view (page 148)
• The Radio QC Limit setup (page 149)
• Frequency management (page 150)
• LRU parameters (page 157) 5
• LAUR parameters (page 162)
• Wakeup/Sleep (page 162)
• Loop test (page 163)
Radio telemetry equipment

The 428XL radio telemetry equipment includes a data acquisition unit
(LAUR-428) and a transceiver unit (LRU).
The LRU (Line Remote Unit) is used as a long range point-to-point
radio relay, or as master transceiver in a radio cell. It can be inserted
anywhere in a spread as an element of the 428XL network to relay the
data transmission on a Line or a Transverse. It connects to any type of
428XL field electronics (LAUX, LAUL, FDU Link, etc.), except for
100 MHz Ethernet ports. Built in the LRU is a full performance LAUX.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
Instrument Topographic view

LAUR
LRU
(Master)
LRU
Show/hide
radio path LAUR
(Slave)
Figure 5-65 Radio instrument view
The colour of each radio path (green/orange/red) is determined by the

LRU, depending on the rate of retries for messages from the LAUR (any
message that is affected by RF communications problems is transmitted
again until it is received properly).
Each LAUR is displayed in green, or orange or red, depending on its RF
power margin and on your alert settings, adjustable using The Radio QC
Limit setup (page 149), so that you can instantly see if any radio link is
in trouble.
You can view detailed information on each LRU, LAUR or radio path
by right-clicking on it and choosing Properties from the contextual
menu that pops up.
Right-click on
radio path
Right-click on
LRU
Figure 5-66 Popup menu

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
The contextual popup menu also prompts the available shortcuts, like
Set Wireless (see LRU parameters on page 157) or Enable/Disable
Radio (see Wakeup/Sleep on page 162).
The Radio QC Limit setup

Choose Radio QC Limit from the Setup menu. This opens a setup
window with two scale boxes that allow you to set two alert thresholds
for monitoring the RF power margin in all the LAUR’s deployed.
The RF power margin (typically at least 27-dB in 428XL radio links) is
calculated as the amount of RF power above the minimum required to
5
maintain a safe link. It is affected by the link length, terrain
characteristics, atmospheric conditions, local jammers (electric motors,
etc.).
Orange alert
LAUR antenna colour setting
tells you if radio link is
safe
Orange alert
setting
Figure 5-67 Radio QC limit setup
Each LAUR is displayed in:

• green so long as its RF power margin remains higher than your
Orange alert setting;
• orange if its RF power margin lies between your Orange and Red
alert settings;
• red if its RF power margin drops below your Red alert setting.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
Frequency management
Half-duplex protocol
In the LRU transmission protocol (Half-duplex), time is shared between
transmission of Master-to-Slave messages and transmission of Slave-
to-Master messages.
Master-to-Slave messages are called Network Control Sequences
(NCS), used for synchronization, zero-time transmission and control.
Slave-to-Master messages are called Data Transfer Sequences (DTS),
used for data retrieval, seismonitor and collecting test results.
Radio frame
(50 ms) (50 ms)
NCS DTS NCS DTS

time
Figure 5-68
Typically, NCS messages are transmitted every 50 ms. In reply to an

NCS message, the LAUR transmits a DTS message (1.5 to 40 ms long).
The LAUR does not transmit its DTS until and unless its clock is locked
onto that of the LRU.
NCS
DTS
(Master) (Slave)
Line or
Transverse to
recording
LRU LRU
Line or
truck Transverse
Figure 5-69 Radio Relay

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
(Slave)
NCS
LAUR
Line or DTS
Transverse to (Master)
recording
truck LRU
(Slave)
Line
(30 channels max.)
LAUR
Line
(30 channels max.)
5
Figure 5-70 Radio Line segment cell
Different setups can be implemented, depending on the required data

rate and on the expected transmission range. See 428XL Installation
Manual for details.
Frequency channels
The RF transceiver in the LRU or LAUR uses a single 2-MHz band for
both transmission and reception. That band is selected between 216
MHz and 249 MHz using the “Center Frequency” parameter.
Within the 2-MHz bandwidth, you can choose which channel(s) to use
for NCS and DTS messages, by specifying:
• a Control Channel Frequency for NCS messages,
• one or more Data Channel Frequencies for DTS messages (one for
a radio relay, up to eight for a radio cell).
The necessary bandwidth (0.2 to 0.8 MHz) for a Data Channel depends
on the expected Data Rate (256, 512, 1024 or 2048 kbps). See
page 153.
Note Because the LRU or LAUR uses a half-duplex protocol, you

can choose the same frequency for the Control Channel and
the Data Channel.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
The LAUR must have the same frequency and data rate settings as the
associated master LRU.
IMPORTANT
The two LRU units making up a radio relay should have the same
frequency and data rate settings, and the same Cell Number. Each
LAUR should have the same Cell Number and Center Frequency as
its master LRU.
Note The available frequency band depends on the regional settings
chosen by the user when installing software on the 428XL GUI
and on the FDPA428 terminal. For compliance with Canadian
and US communications regulations, the frequency band is
limited to respectively:
• Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz.
• USA: 217 to 220 MHz (and 216 to 217 MHz by licence prior to
January 01, 2002).

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
Center Default channel

Freq. Available channels
Control Freq.
NCS
- 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8

Center F. 0.2 MHz Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
DTS
Data Channel Freq. # 1
5
256 k
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Data Channel Freq. # 1 Data Channel Freq. # 2
DTS
512 k
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
DTS
1024 k
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Data Channel Freq. # 1 Data Channel Freq. # 2
DTS
2048 k
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Figure 5-71 LRU Relay data channels

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
Center Default channel

Freq. Available channels
Control Freq.
NCS
- 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8

Center F. 0.2 MHz Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
DTS Data Channel Freq. # 1

256 k (QPSK)
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
DTS
1024 k (DQPSK)
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Figure 5-72 LAUR data channels
Desensitization
Note that the maximum covered range may be shorter on desensitized
channels (i. e. channels on which the strength of the received signal is
normally decreased by the presence of spurious signals from the 8-MHz
and 33-MHz master oscillators in the LRU). In the table below are the
channels that may be affected by desentization, depending on the
selected Data Rate.

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
Centre Freq. Data Rate Desensitization

(MHz) (kb/s) affects on channels
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 221.2
221.0
1024 & 2048 DTS 221.1
221.184 221.2
221.3
221.4
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 229.4
229.2
1024 & 2048 DTS 229.3
229.376 229.4
229.5
229.6
5
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 233.3
233.1
1024 & 2048 DTS 233.2
233.309 233.3
233.4
233.5
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 237.6
237.4
1024 & 2048 DTS 237.5
237.568 237.6
237.7
237.8
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 245.7
245.8
245.6
245.760 1024 & 2048 DTS 245.7
245.8
245.9
246.0
TDM (Time Division Multiplex)

The Time Division Multiplex technique allows several LRU relay cells
to use the same bandwidth without any conflict, by assigning distinct
“Subframes” (i. e. time slots) to adjacent cells transmitting in that
bandwidth.
The TDM technique is especially helpful in situations where
neighbouring relay cells are likely to impinge on one another, as is the
case:

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
• where two series-connected relay cells use the same antenna mast,
• where too few frequency channels are available.
Where the TDM technique is implemented, each relay cell uses a
dedicated “Subframe” (i. e. one radio frame out of two or four) instead
of using every radio frame.
LRU LRU
LRU LRU
Relay cell 1 Relay cell 2

(transmits on Subframe No. 1) (transmits on Subframe No. 2)
Number of subframes = 2
Subframe No. 1 Subframe No. 2 Subframe No. 1 Subframe No. 2

(50 ms) (50 ms) (50 ms) (50 ms)
1 NCS DTS NCS DTS
2 NCS DTS NCS DTS
Figure 5-73
As a result the “Data rate” is divided by the “Number of subframes”.

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
LRU parameters
LRU parameters are available by choosing Set Wireless from the menu
that pops up when you right-click on an LRU in an Instrument view.
An LRU can be set up to be in either Relay mode or Cell mode (Figure 5-
74). In Relay mode, the LRU is either a Master unit communicating to
an LRU Slave unit, or a Slave unit communicating to an LRU Master
unit. No other radio units are allowed. In Cell mode, the LRU is a
Master unit communicating to a cell of LAURs.
5
Figure 5-74 LRU standard parameters
In either Relay or Cell mode, the User option in the Advanced

Parameters tab allows the user to modify additional parameters. The
Default option displays these parameters, but does not allow the user
to change them (see Figure 5-75).
Click Go (or Apply) to permanently save the RF parameters into non-
volatile memory (flash). This also saves the RF parameters in all
LAURs currently linked in this radio cell.
See the description of each parameter below. See also Radio telemetry
equipment (page 147).
Cell Number
(Allowable range 1 to 31). You must enter a distinct Cell Number for
each LRU radio relay or cell in the 428XL network so that it can be
identified by the 428XL GUI. That is, the two LRUs (Master and Slave)
in a radio relay must have the same Cell Number that is different from
any other Cell Number used in the 428XL network. Likewise, all radio

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
units in a radio cell (LRU Master and LAURs) must have the same Cell
Number, but that Cell Number must be different from any other Cell
Number used in the 428XL network.
Center Frequency
(Allowable range 216.0 to 249.0 MHz, in 0.1-MHz steps). Center
frequency of the 2-MHz band within which to choose the transmission
channels for the radio relay or cell, depending on the frequencies used
by other radio relays or cells and on the desired data rate. See Figure 5-
71 on page 153.
Data Rate
(Available options: 256, 512, 1024, 2048 kbps for Radio Relay, 256
kbps for Radio Cell).
• For a radio relay, the 512 and 2048 options require two data
transmission channels. See Figure 5-71 on page 153.
• For a radio cell, the 256 kbps option requires up to 8 data
transmission channels. See Figure 5-72 on page 154.

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
Figure 5-75 Cell Mode Frequency Display
Transmit Power
(Available options: Standard, Low; defaults to Standard).
• Low: Transmit power is 1 mW (0 dBm) for all radio units in this cell.
This option is helpful for tests over a short range.
• Standard: Transmit power is 6 W (38 dBm) for all radio units in this
cell. For standard RF transmission conditions.
Number of Subframes
Available options: 1 or 2. See TDM (Time Division Multiplex) (page 155).
Subframe Number
Available options: 1 to the value specified for the “Number of
Subframes”. See TDM (Time Division Multiplex) (page 155).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
CAUTION
Where two or more LRU cells are deployed, changing the “Number of
Radio Subframes” and “Subframe Number” parameters in the Line
main window is likely to result in conflicting situations in the relay
cells. Use the FDPA428 instead.
Control Channel (Relay Mode Only)

(Adjustable from Center Freq –0.8 to Center Freq +0.8 MHz in 0.2-
MHz steps; defaults to Center Freq). Center frequency of the 0.2-MHz
channel is used to transmit network control messages (NCS).
Example: if Center Freq = 218 MHz, the list of available Control
frequencies are 217.2, 217.4, 217.6, 217.8, 218.0, 218.2, 218.4, 218.6,
218.8 MHz. See Figure 5-71 on page 153.
Data Channel #1 Frequency (Relay Mode Only)

Center frequency of the 0.2-MHz channel is used to transmit data
retrieval messages (DTS) (Table 5-1). See Figure 5-71 on page 153.
Table 5-1 Data Channel #1 Frequency
Data Rate 256 512 1024 2048

Data From From From From
Channel #1 Center Freq 0.8 Center Freq 0.8 Center Freq 0.5 Center Freq 0.5
Freq to Center Freq +0.8 to Center Freq +0.8 to Center Freq +0.5 to Center Freq +0.5
in 0.2 MHz steps in 0.2 MHz steps in 0.2 MHz steps in 0.2 MHz steps
Default Center Freq Center Freq Center Freq Center Freq
+ 0.1 MHz –0.3 MHz
Data Channel #2 Frequency (Relay Mode only)

Center frequency of the second 0.2-MHz channel is used to transmit
data retrieval messages (DTS), depending on the selected data rate
(Table 5-2). See Figure 5-71 on page 153.

December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
Table 5-2 Data Channel #2 Frequency
Data Rate 256 512 1024 2048

Data Not required From Center Freq 0.8 Not required From Center Freq 0.5
Channel #2 to Center Freq +0.8 in to Center Freq +0.5 in
Freq 0.2 MHz steps 0.2 MHz steps
Default Center Freq +0.2 MHz Center Freq +0.3 MHz
Where Data Channel #2 Freq is required, the system checks that the
difference between Data Channel #1 Freq and Data Channel #2 Freq is
at least 0.2 MHz at 512 kbits/s and 0.8 MHz at 2048 kbits/s.
Note The available frequency band depends on the regional settings
5
chosen by the user when installing software on the 428XL GUI
and on the FDPA428 terminal. For compliance with Canadian
and U.S. communications regulations, the frequency band is
limited to
• Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz
• USA: 217 to 220 MHz (and 216 to 217 MHz by licence prior to
January 01, 2002).
Control Channel (Cell Mode Only)

Selection that specifies which one frequency is to be used as the control
frequency (NCS). This frequency is used to send messages from the
LRU to the LAURs. See Figure 5-72 on page 154.
Data Channel (Cell Mode Only)

Selection(s) that specify which frequencies (maximum of eight) are to
be used to transmit data retrieval messages (DTS) from LAURs back to
the LRU.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Radio telemetry
LAUR parameters
LAUR parameters (Figure 5-76) are available by choosing Set Wireless
from the menu that pops up when you right-click on an LAUR in an
Instrument view.
See LRU parameters on page 157 for details on these parameters.
Note An LAUR is a slave of a master LRU that is configured in Cell
mode. The Cell Number and Center Frequency must be the
same as the master LRU.
Figure 5-76 LAUR Parameters menu
Click Go (or Apply) to permanently save the RF parameters into non-

volatile memory (flash). Thus, if the LAUR is powered off and on
again, the latest modifications are recalled.
Wakeup/Sleep
Choosing Disable Radio from the contextual menu that pops up when
you right-click on an LRU, and then going to Field Off, causes the LRU
to go to a power-saving mode called Sleep mode. This allows you to put
a whole radio cell to sleep and then wake it back up again. Note that
when you next go to Field On, a slave LRU will not respond until it has
scanned for new control messages (and there is only one scan cycle per
minute in Sleep mode).
The LRU automatically goes to the Sleep mode if it is left idle for
30 minutes.
The “Sleep” status is not saved to the LRU’s non-volatile memory.
To wake up the radio cell, right-click on the master LRU and choose
Enable Radio from the popup menu.
December 4, 2006
Line
Radio telemetry
Right-clicking on an LAUR and choosing Disable Radio from the

popup menu allows you to put this one LAUR to sleep. Likewise, you
can wake it up individually by right-clicking on it and choosing Enable
Radio from the popup menu.
Loop test
LRU Loop test

Right-clicking on an LRU and choosing Start Loop from the popup
menu allows you to check RF communications between that LRU and 5
any distant LRU (in Relay mode) or LAURs (in Cell mode). So long as
the LRU is busy with the Loop test, it is displayed in red in the
Instrument Topographic view.
LAUR Loop test

Right-clicking on an LAUR and choosing Start Loop from the popup
menu allows you to check RF communications between that LAUR and
the master LRU.
Results
If communications are established with a distant radio unit, the Loop
test returns the attenuation of the signal (in dB) and rate of retries. This
updates those fields in the Numeric view.
IMPORTANT
The Loop test is not possible on a distant radio unit that is in Sleep
mode. To wake up the radio unit see Wakeup/Sleep on page 162.
You cannot launch a Loop test if the radio unit is busy (e. g. during
acquisition, seismonitor, etc.).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Test functions
Test functions
In this section:
• Instrument tests (page 167)
• Sensor tests (page 169)
Overview
You open this window by selecting Test Setup from the Setup menu. It
allows you to create a list of tests to do, choose whether or not to record
the results, and specify which channels to test. For Instrument tests, you
also have to choose the channel gain and record length.
Click and then choose

from pull-down menu that
pops up
List of tests to be
done in sequence
Figure 5-77
Select the desired test (from the Test Type pull-down menu) and
options. Click Add to enter the test into the list box. Click Apply to
activate your changes, then click Go to launch the test.
The results appear in the Numeric and/or Graphic view, whichever is
selected. To interpret the results of a particular test, see the legend at the
foot of the main window (with the appropriate test selected in the
graphic view).

December 4, 2006
Line
Test functions
The settings in the Test Setup window are also used for every test you
launch with the Go button in the graphic view.
Test
Instrument Sensor Sample Rate Gain Filter Type
Noise User-selected User-selected User-selected

Distortion User-selected User-selected User-selected
Gain&Phase User-selected User-selected User-selected
CMRR
Crosstalk
User-selected
User-selected
User-selected
User-selected
User-selected
User-selected
5
Resistance User-selected See Vol. 3 See Vol. 3
Leakage User-selected See Vol. 3 See Vol. 3
Noise User-selected See Vol. 3 See Vol. 3
Tilt See Vol. 3 See Vol. 3 See Vol. 3
Distortion User-selected See Vol. 3 See Vol. 3
Note For a description of the principle of each test, see 428XL

User’s Manual Vol. 3.
Test Type
Click in this field and choose the desired type of test from the option
button that pops up.
Recorded
Choose this option if you wish to record the acquisition to a test file.
Size of the record: 4 bytes per sample. (Data is not compressed).

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Test functions
Absolute Spread
The Absolute Spread list box is used to specify the lines and receiver
positions to be tested (e. g. 10: 101-105g1),
IMPORTANT
You have to specify a gain in the Absolute Spread description or else
the syntax would not be correct, but in Instrument tests the gain
actually used (for seismic and auxiliary channels) is the one selected
with the Gain option button in the Test Setup.
Note With a rectangular spread, there is an easier way of specifying

the lines and receiver positions to be tested: select the desired
units in the graphic view, then choose and start the desired test
with the buttons available in the main window. See To select
one or more elements (page 95).
Note In Sensor tests, auxiliary channels are not tested (regardless of

whether or not they are included in the spread). In Instrument
tests, auxiliary channels can be tested (you have to specify a list
of aux channels to be tested).
Note After doing an Instrument test, use the Look function.
Note If an overscaling arises during the acquisition of the test signal
(in an Instrument or Sensor test), no result is available (N/A)
for that test.

December 4, 2006
Line
Test functions
Instrument tests
5
Figure 5-78 Instrument test setup

Note After doing an Instrument test, use the Look function.
Auxiliary Descriptor
The Aux Descr text box is used to specify which auxiliary channels to
test (with the same gain as seismic channels). Use the identification
number assigned to each channel in the Auxiliary channels (page 116)
setup, prefixed with the letter “a”, with a comma as a separator.
Example of description: a1,a2, etc.
The + operator is not allowed. Use a hyphen to specify more quickly a
range of auxiliary channel numbers (e.g. a1-a4 rather than a1,a2,a3,a4).
Gain
This option button allows you to choose the preamplifier gain to be used
for the Instrument tests.
See the gain code table on page 123.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Test functions
Record Length
Duration of the acquisition.
Sample rate Record length

(ms) Minimum (sec.) Maximum
0.25 1
0.5 2 See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3
1 3 (Specifications).
2 3
4 3
Note For an Instrument Crosstalk test, the minimum length required

is 5 s @ 2 ms SR for FDUs, 8 s for DSU3s.
Instrument Noise
(Microvolts) During this test, the channel input is shorted via an internal
resistor. Geophones are not connected. The gain, filter type and sample
rate parameters are user-selected.
Instrument Distortion
(dB) During this test, geophones are not connected. The built-in
generator of the FDU is used as input to the channel under test. The
gain, filter type and sample rate parameters are user-selected.
Instrument Crosstalk
(dB) The test includes two sequences: during the first sequence, the test
generator applies a sine wave to the test network in each even FDU. The
ADC converter in each odd FDU measures the resulting voltage across
its own test network. (The test generator in odd FDUs is disabled).
Conversely, during the second test sequence, the test sine wave is fed to
each odd FDU and the resulting voltage is measured across the test
network in each even FDU.

December 4, 2006
Line
Test functions
Note On the plotter, the test sine wave may appear on adjacent
channels (on either side of an LAU). See User’s Manual Vol. 3.
A minimum test length is required (5 s @ 2 ms SR for FDUs, 8 s for
DSU3s).
The gain, filter type and sample rate parameters are user-selected.
Instrument Gain/Phase error

(%) This test returns the maximum error in amplitude and phase.
Geophones are not connected. The built-in generator of the FDU is used 5
as input to the channel under test. The gain, filter type and sample rate
parameters are user-selected.
Common Mode Rejection

(dB) During this test, geophones are not connected. The built-in
generator of the FDU is used as input to the channel under test. The
gain, filter type and sample rate parameters are user-selected.
Sensor tests
Figure 5-79
The Test Setup window lets you manually launch a Sensor test on the
receivers that you specify in the Absolute Spread list box.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Test functions
The fault threshold is adjustable by selecting Survey from the Setup

menu, then choosing Sensor (see page 108).
Note Sensor tests are run automatically when FDUs have no

acquisition to perform. Whenever Sensor tests are launched
automatically, i. e. whenever you turn on the line power, or
when you click on the Look button, or when neither acquisition
nor seismonitor is underway (field update mode or Auto Look
option), the Sample Rate defaults to 2 ms for Resistance and
Leakage tests.
Resistance
(ohms) This test allows you to see if geophones are connected. The
Sample Rate is user-selected.
Sensor Leakage
(Mohms) This test displays the global leakage resistance between the
input conductors of the receiver link and the earth. The Sample Rate is
user-selected.
Note If the channel Input is left unconnected (or if the resistance

connected exceeds 9999 ohm), the Sensor Leakage test is
irrelevant. In “field update” mode, if the Resistance value
exceeds the specified limit, the Leakage test is not performed,
even if it is selected in the Look Properties setup.
Sensor Noise
(microvolts) In this test the noise picked by the geophones is measured
by performing data acquisition with no Firing Order. The Sample Rate
is user-selected.

December 4, 2006
Line
Test functions
Tilt
(%) The Tilt test is sensitive to a number of faults relating to the sensors.
The test results will be affected by anomalies on cutoff frequencies,
damping, sensitivity, distortion (sticking, friction, etc.) and tilt
(geophone not properly planted).
Note In “field update” mode, if the Resistance value exceeds the

specified limit, the Tilt test is not performed, even if it is
selected in the Look Properties setup.
5
Tilt Model
The Tilt Model function is used to store a model of the response to a
pulse on geophones, from a number of geophone arrays known to be in
good repair. The model will be used subsequently in Tilt tests. Because
the samples stored are average values, the higher the number of tested
channels, the closer the model to the theoretical impulse response.
If several sensor types are associated with the channels selected for the
Tilt Model test, a model is computed for each sensor type to be used in
further Tilt tests.
In Dual telemetry, separate models are computed for wireline telemetry
and radio telemetry.
For any sensor type that is not associated with the channels selected for
the Tilt Model test, the corresponding saved model is not modified.
Clicking Go connects the channel input to both the built-in generator
and geophones. Then, acquisition is performed and the model is
computed by averaging the responses of all the geophones tested.
Sensor Distortion
The Sensor Distortion test is only available for FDU2S channels.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
Test functions
Multiple tests
Rather than launching tests individually, you may want to do a number
of tests in sequence with a single click on Go. You can do that by
creating batches in this setup window.
Figure 5-80
You can create up to 10 test batches, automatically labelled Test 1 to

Test 10 by the system. When you start from scratch, all test batches are
blank. To create a test batch, do the following:
1. Choose a batch name from the Test Setup option button;
2. Choose the first test to do from the Test Type pull-down menu,
choose the desired gain (for an Instrument test), and specify which
channels to test in the Absolute Spread field. Click Add;
3. Likewise, choose the second test to do in sequence, and click
Add, and so on and so forth.
4. If you want to insert a pause between tests, enter the desired
interval (milliseconds) into the Delay Between Tests field;

December 4, 2006
Line
Test functions
5. Enter the duration (milliseconds) of the acquisition into the

Record Length field. The record length is the same for each test
in the batch.
6. If you want to record the results from each test, tick the Record
Results option and enter a file number into the Test File Nb field.
Click Apply to save and activate your settings.
If you want to repeat a group of consecutive tests a number of times:
1. Click on the last test in the group to repeat;
2. Choose Control Loop from the Test Type pull-down menu;
5
3. In the Loop Line Nb field, enter the index number of the first test
to repeat;
4. In the Nb of Loops field, enter the desired number of cycles;
5. Click Add.
The test batches you create in this setup window are not available from
the test option button associated with the Go button in the main window.
Seismonitor
This window allows you to monitor the input signal on the channels you
specify in the Absolute Spread box.
10: 100-500g1
20: 100-500g1
30: 100-500g1
40: 100-500g1
Figure 5-81

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Form Line setup
The Form Line setup

In this section:
• Line Troubleshooting (page 175)
• Network Management (page 177)
General
You open this window by selecting Form Line from the Setup menu.
List of manual power on/

power off commands
Figure 5-82
This window is mainly used for:

• Troubleshooting the line, by going step-by-step with line forming;
• Managing the network in case of multi-path layout.
The typical way of using Form Line is as follows: create a specific
power on/off command by selecting the desired options as explained
below (see Line Troubleshooting on page 175) and clicking on Add. You
can save it by clicking on Apply. Then select a command in the list box
by clicking on it, and launch it by clicking on Go.
Note After a set of LAUs is powered on/off and channels are

identified by Form Line, all functions can be performed,
including Sensor and Instrument tests, seismonitor and
acquisition.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Form Line setup
Also note that field update is not done automatically on a segment

powered up by Form Line: click on Look (in the Sensors view) to
collect the field update data.
WARNING
All the information stored in the Form Line menu is used at line power-
up. This may prevent some LAU ports from being powered up.
Typically, clear Form Line menu entries after you are finished with
troubleshooting. 5
Note If the Form Line menu is not empty as lines are powered up, the
spread is formed step by step. The propagation of power from
LAU to LAU is slower than in the normal mode even if
referenced LAUs are not connected in the spread (due to the
fact that power-up propagation is controlled by software rather
than hardware). An “M” appears on the readout of the LCI428
line controller (standing for “Manual mode”).
Line Troubleshooting
To investigate a problem on a line segment, you can power down one of
the ports of an adjacent LAUL or LAUX, or power up that port and form
a number of channels (or all) attached to it. Also, you can gradually
power up/down a Transverse. To do that:
1. Use the Serial Number field, and the option button that pops up
as you click in the Box Type field, to specify which unit is
targeted.
2. From the Orientation option button, choose the port you want to
power up or power off.
3. If you want to power up the port, tick the “Enable” option. If you
want to form all the channels attached to that port, tick the “All”
option, otherwise specify how many channels you want to form in
the Channels to Form field.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Form Line setup
4. Choose the appropriate Speed, depending on which type of

channel is attached to that segment: FDU428 channels support
both 8 and 16 Mbits/s data rates; FDU408 channels support only
the 8 Mbits/s option (see Default Line Data Rate on page 76).
5. Click Add, then Go.
Forming all channels

With the “All” option in the Channels to Form field, the Form Line
function applies the line power to the selected port. All the channels
attached to that port are identified and displayed graphically.
If an LAU is connected at the end of that series of channels, it is
powered up, identified and displayed graphically too. The line power is
not propagated automatically by this LAU; this must be done using the
Form Line function.
This allows you to go step-by-step with line power up.
Forming a number of channels

If you choose to form only a number of channels, then the Form Line
function applies the line power to the line and the requested channels
are identified and displayed graphically.
If an LAU is connected at the end of the series of channels, it is powered
up, but is neither identified nor displayed. In this mode, you cannot
power up LAUs beyond the selected LAU.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Form Line setup
Network Management
In case of multi-path layout, it may be interesting to enable/disable
some paths to control the data path and make it optimum.
To that end, you can use the Form Line menu as described below to
prevent the line or transverse power from being set by some LAUs.
Assuming the configuration below:
5
Rig
ht
R ig
ht
Tra
n sv LAUX #22
ers
e Ri g
ht
LAUX #12
Ri
gh
t
LAUX428 #21
Ri
gh
t
LAUX428 #11
Figure 5-83
If the network is powered up without any control in the Form Line

setup, the data path may be that of Figure 5-84 or Figure 5-85 (page 178),
depending on how hardware line power is relayed.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Form Line setup
LAUX428 #22
LAUX428 #12
LAUX428 #21
LAUX428 #11
Figure 5-84 Data Path 1
LAUX428 #22
LAUX428 #12
LAUX428 #21
LAUX428 #11
Figure 5-85 Data Path 2
In order to enforce the second situation (Data path 2), optimum for data
retrieval, enter a command in the Form Line menu to power off the
Right port of LAUX22 (as a result the LAUX#12 to LAUX#22
secondary transverse is displayed but not used for data transfer).

December 4, 2006
Line
The Synthetic setup
The Synthetic setup

This setup window allows you to create a virtual spread and use a
synthetic signal as seismic source energy to take virtual shots. For
example, you can take virtual shots on a virtual spread to see if your
setup parameters are consistent.
2 Selecting an
object to add
5
1 Navigating
Focus point
3 Adding objects
Figure 5-86
1. Use the navigation keys to move the focus point to the left/right or
upward/downward, depending on where you would like to insert
an element into your virtual spread.
2. Click on the desired icon at the top to choose which object to add.
3. Click on the appropriate add button, depending on which port you
wish to connect to. The two buttons that add elements on the Low/
High sides also allow you to choose how many elements you want
to add. This is an easy way of replicating line segments.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Synthetic setup
Transverse (Left)
Add one or more Click to
elements on Low choose how
side many to add
Add on Right
side
Add on Left side Line (Low) (High)

Add one or more
(Right)
elements on High
side
Figure 5-87
4. Clicking on any element in your virtual spread causes its

description to appear in the upper right corner.
Figure 5-88
The example in Figure 5-89 shows how to connect a Right

Transverse with four FDU links in just a few clicks.
Move
focus to
Right Connect an Connect an
Trans- LAUX FDU link
verse Add an FDU link Add two FDU links
Figure 5-89 Example

December 4, 2006
Line
The Synthetic setup
Synthetic file
In order to simulate shots, you have to load a file containing the
necessary samples to generate the test signal. Use the Browse button to
do that.
The synthetic signal file should contain the description of the signals fed
to Seismic and Auxiliary channels. Three cases may arise:
• A single synthetic signal is described: the same signal is fed both to
Seismic and Auxiliary Channels.
• Two synthetic signals are described: the first one is fed to Seismic 5
channels and the second is fed to Auxiliary channels (used to simulate
single-source correlation operations).
• Three synthetic signals are described: the first one is fed to Seismic
channels, the second to the first Auxiliary channel, and the third to the
other Auxiliary channels (used to simulate dual-source correlation
operations).
See also 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 2.
File Syntax
• Blank lines and lines beginning with # in the first column are ignored.
• Acquisitions are identified with a text line starting with the character
@ (in the first column) followed by a space character and an
acquisition number. If there is no @, the signals described are
common to all acquisitions.
• Each synthetic signal described begins with an asterisk (*) in the first
column.
• The signal is made up of a succession of samples and described with
5 sample values per line, each line starting with the sequential
number of the first value in the line (0, 5, 10, 15 etc.), for the sake of
better legibility.
• Each sample is described in the form of a signed integer between -
8388608 and 8388607. The maximum number of samples is 32000,

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Synthetic setup
allowing descriptions of signals with a maximum length of 32000

times the Sample Rate. If the Acquisition Length exceeds the length
of the described synthetic signal, then, after the last sample, the signal
starts again with the first sample (sequential number 0).
Example With Signals Common To All Acquisitions

# Example of file with 3 signals
* Seismic signal with 20 samples
0 0 1 2 3 4
5 5 6 7 8 9
10 10 11 12 13 14
15 15 16 17 18 19
* AUX1 signal with 20 samples
0 0 1 2 3 4
5 5 6 7 8 9
10 10 11 12 13 14
15 15 16 17 18 19
* AUX2 to AUXN signal with 20 samples (N depending on the spread).
0 0 1 2 3 4
5 5 6 7 8 9
10 10 11 12 13 14
15 15 16 17 18 19

December 4, 2006
Line
The Synthetic setup
Example With Different Signals In Two Or More Acquisitions

# Example of synthetic file with different signal in two acquisitions.
@1
0 0 1 2 3 4
5 5 6 7 8 9
10 10 11 12 13 14
15 15 16 17 18 19 5
* AUX signal with 20 samples
0 0 1 2 3 4
5 5 6 7 8 9
10 10 11 12 13 14
15 15 16 17 18 19
@2
0 50 51 52 53 54
5 55 56 57 58 59
10 60 61 62 63 64
15 65 66 67 68 69
* AUX signal with 20 samples
0 50 51 52 53 54
5 55 56 57 58 59
10 60 61 62 63 64
15 65 66 67 68 69

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Download setup
The Download setup

Typically, you need to use the Download setup after installing a new
release of 428XL software (and patches if any), to update firmware in
LCI428 boards and in the remote field electronics deployed. You also
have to use this setup window if you connect any unit that does not have
the required software version and/or patches.
Figure 5-90
Typically, this setup window should be used as follows:

1. Be sure the 428XL LCI controller is powered up and all remote
line interfacing units (LAUX428, LAUL428, etc.) to be upgraded
are connected to it. (FDUs and DSUs may be present but they are
not involved).
2. Go to On Line in the Config main window and Field Off in the
Line main window.
3. Click on the Show Reference Release button. This opens a result
window showing the latest software release loaded on the server.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Download setup
The name of the file containing the latest release and patches
appears after each type of unit in the result window.
LAUX428 428.1.x dwnfile.hci428.V1x
LAUL428 428.1.x dwnfile.hci428.V1x
LAUR 428.1.x dwnfile.hci428.V1x
Name of the
428.1.x file to load
Product
Version No.
Patch No.
5
Figure 5-91
4. Click on the Show Units Version button to view the current

version of all line interfacing units deployed (i. e. LCI428 boards,
and field electronics other than FDUs and DSUs). Check to see if
all units have the required software version, revision and patches.
LAUX428 #---, version 428.1.x
LAUR #---, version 428.1.x

Serial number
Current software version
& patch No.
Figure 5-92
5. If all LCI boards have the required software release and patches
but you still wish to update them, choose the Force LCI428
Download option in the Download setup window.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Download setup
6. If all field electronics units have the required software release and
patches but you still wish to update them, choose the Force
Download option in the Download setup window.
7. If any LCI or field electronics unit does not have the required
release and/or patches, or you wish to download the release again
anyway, click on the Select Download Files button. This opens a
file selection dialog box that automatically takes you to the
appropriate directory (lcCommon/work). Choose the
dwnfile.hci428.V1x file that was prompted by the Show
Reference Release button at step 3 above.
Figure 5-93
8. Click OK. This causes the name of the selected release file to
appear in the Download setup window. As a result, the Update
LCI428 and Update Spread buttons are enabled.

December 4, 2006
Line
The Download setup
Software release
file to download
Figure 5-94
9. To update LCI428 boards, click on the Update LCI428 button.

10. To update field electronics, do the following:
- From the Box Type option button, choose which type of unit you
want to update, or choose All.
- Either choose the All Boxes option or use the S/N field to specify
the Serial Number of a particular unit you want to update.
- Click on the Update Spread button.
WARNING
Update commands will be rejected if the power supply of the targeted
remote units is below 10.5 V. The power supply must stay above 10 V
until downloading is complete.
After updating LCI428 firmware, you have to go to Off Line / On Line

in the Config main window to restart operations.
If you do not update LCI428 firmware, you only have to go to Field On
to resume operations.

December 4, 2006
5 Line
The Download setup
Note 1: It is alright if you directly download a patched software version,

rather than downloading the original release first, then downloading the
necessary patches separately.
Note 2: If, instead of the message “Download completed”, you have the
message:
Erroneous download ...
WARNING: turning units off now may make them unusable if not
properly downloaded.
Do you want to retry another download before units are turned off
(y / n)?
- If you choose “y”, then the download procedure is restarted, and

software is downloaded again to those units that are not properly
upgraded. If the above error message (Erroneous download ...)
appears again, then choose “n” rather than retrying, and click on
the Update LCI428 button again.
- If you choose “n”, then the download procedure is aborted.
Check all connections. Go to Off Line then On Line in the
Config main window. click on the Update LCI428 button again.
Note 3: A “Battery failure” error message is generated (logged into the
“dwnreport.hci428” report file) if the update process is aborted, that is:
- if the power supply of any targeted unit lies below 10.5 V before
downloading begins,
- or if the power supply of any targeted unit drops below 10 V
during the download process.
Note 4: See also Field electronics (page 83) in 428XL Installation
Manual.

December 4, 2006
Chapter
6 Operation
• The Main Window (page 190)

• The Process Type setup (page 200)
• The Source Point Setup (page 215)
• Seismic setup options (page 221)
• The Source Type setup (page 226)
• The Delay setup (page 232)
• The Noise Editing setup (page 233)
• The Observer’s Comment Type Setup (page 239)
• How to take shots or sweeps (page 240)
• More About Noise Elimination (page 256)
• More About Correlation (page 262)

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Main Window
The Main Window

In this section:
• The Operation Table (page 192)
• The Active Source view (page 194)
• The Active Acquisition view (page 199)
General
The Operation client window takes care of the list of shots, providing
details on those planned, the one in progress, the next to do, and those
done if any. It also provides access to shot controls, lets you view the
status of the acquisition, and provides information about the progress of
it, i. e. ITB, Transmit Error.
Operation table
(planned shots)
Click to add view
Stacked acquisitions
Shot controls within the selected VP
Resize by
dragging border
Click to close
view
Figure 6-1 OPERATION client window

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Main Window
This button allows you to get different views of a table, referred

to as The Operation Table (page 192), which contains the main
information for the acquisition of the data, and also allows you to select
which Source Point to shoot, if necessary.
The Setup menu allows you to generate the Operation table. Each
source point in the operation table is associated with a “Process Type”
that determines how the Impulsive or Vibroseismic signal is processed.
In the case of Vibroseismic operations, the Process Type is itself
associated with an “Acquisition Type” that determines which sweep
signal to use and which fleet should generate it. If stacking is used, the
stack order is visible in the “Active Acquisition” view.
In this manual, the abbreviation “VP” (standing for Vibrated Point) is 6
understood as a source point, completely defined with the SEGD
parameters appearing in the Operation table (Shot Number, Source
Point Index, Source Point Line, Source Point Nb). It is used
indifferently for Vibroseismic or Impulsive shooting.
like them, see the Hands-on guide (page 44).
You can show or hide columns in tables by right-clicking in any column
For details on the buttons (Go, Stop, etc.), see The Active Source view
(page 194).

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Main Window
The Operation Table
Available views
Operation Table
Done
Right-click to
Ready choose source
To do
Figure 6-2 Operation table
The Operation Table contains the main information for the acquisition
of the data and allows you to select which Source Point (VP) to shoot.
Different views of that operation table are available (showing all VPs,
or only those to do, or only those done).
The source operation table is created using the Setup menu or by
importing an SPS file with the Log window.
Resize the main window, if required, so that all the desired columns can
be viewed, or use the “Customize” menu (popping up if you right-click
on any column heading) to remove unnecessary columns.
For a description of the parameters appearing in the operation table
(except the Source Point Index), see The Source Point Setup (page 215).
The Source Point Index allows you to do a VP several times if
required: the original value is 1 and that value is automatically
incremented by 1 every time the VP is done again.
Right-clicking on a VP to do in the Operation Table causes a menu to
pop up that allows you to choose which source to use to do that shot.
Then the system uses your settings in The Source Type setup (page 226)
to automatically determine which next VPs to assign to that source.

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Main Window
The indicators ahead of shot numbers should be interpreted as follows:
Indicator Meaning
Shots to do (planned Source Points).

This Source Point has the focus. A Source is assigned to it. The
system is ready to send the Firing Order.
This Source Point has the focus, and acquisition is in progress.
Shot suspended (a number of acquisitions remain to do but the focus
has gone to another Source Point).
Shot done. The data from this Source Point has been logged.
If all necessary parameters have been set in all main windows, then 6
clicking any row in the table causes the following functions to be
performed automatically in succession:
1- Look function.
2- Spread configuration (Line Forming).
3- Seismonitor function.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Main Window
The Active Source view

The available sources created with The Source Type setup (page 226)
appear in this view telling you which Source Point is currently assigned
to each source, and allowing you to manually assign another one if
required.
“Ready” status received, VP currently associated with

suspended until you click to the source
accept it.
VP to be associated with
suspended “Ready” status.
Figure 6-3
In the “Rdy” (Ready) column is a pushbutton for each source that lets
you choose how to handle the “Ready” status from the blaster controller
or vibrator leader:
• With the pushbutton released, an “R” appears in it when the “Ready”
status is received. The system does not accept it until you click on the
button.
• With the pushbutton depressed, the system automatically accepts the
“Ready” status as soon as it is received.
The “Rdy VP” column tells you which VP (Source Point) will be
associated with the suspended “Ready” status when you click on the
pushbutton, whereas the “Shot #” column tells you which VP is
currently associated with the source.

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Main Window
Popup menu available by

right-clicking in row
Figure 6-4
Right-clicking in any row causes a menu to pop up with the following

commands allowing you to manually enable/disable the source:
• Disassociate VP: use this command if, for any reason, you no longer
want to use the source, or you want to put it to standby or to manually 6
assign another VP to it. For example if you are working in Slip-
Sweep mode and one of the sources has a problem, you can use
Disassociate VP to momentarily stop using that source but continue
with the others. As a result, the remaining VPs that were formerly
assigned to the unused source will be omitted (unless you decrease
the Step parameter in the Sources setup).
• Associate VP: opens a dialog box that allows you to specify which
VP (by entering its Shot Number) you want to assign to the source.
This does much the same as the “Start Seismonitor with Vib
Source” command available by right-clicking in the operation table.
After you manually assign a VP to the source, with either of these
commands, the system uses the Increment or Step parameter from
the Sources setup to automatically determine which next VPs to
assign to the source.
• Associate SPL & SPN: does much the same as the Associate VP
command, but rather than entering the Shot Number of the VP you
want to assign to the source, you have to enter its SPL (Source Point
Line) and SPN (Source Point Number).
• Clean Ready: used to discard the “Ready” status suspended and
recorded in the pushbutton, for example if you do not want to do the
VP associated with it (displayed in the “Rdy VP” column). As a

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Main Window
result, you will have to ask the shooter or vibrator leader to send the
“Ready” status again.
The indicators in the leftmost column should be interpreted as follows:
Indicator Meaning
Next shot to do with this source.

Shot to do with this Source. The system is ready to send the Firing
Order.
This Source has the focus, and acquisition is in progress.
Source unused until you manually assign a VP to it (with the popup
menu available by right-clicking on the source or in the list of shots to
do).
Go pushbutton
Clicking this pushbutton sends the Firing Order. Unless you are using
an Impulsive process type, the selected Automation option (Continuous/
Discontinuous/Manual) determines the way of launching the first or
next acquisition for the Source Point selected in the operation table, (see
page 222).
Stop pushbutton
By clicking on Stop, you stop the progress of the acquisition sequence.
You finish the current operation (acquisition or dump). At this point, in
Impulsive mode, you may dump the data to the record process. In other
modes, you can choose either to continue the sequence or do again the
acquisition or end the sequence, using the three pushbuttons (Go,
Cancel, End respectively) prompted:
• by clicking on Go you continue the sequence, i.e. you start over at the
acquisition number highlighted in the acquisition table;
• by clicking on Cancel you skip the remaining acquisitions: the data
from the incomplete Source Point is discarded but the shot number

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Main Window
remains highlighted (i.e. selected) in the table. You only need to click
Go to do it again.
• by clicking on End you record the incomplete Source Point without
the remaining acquisitions. Then clicking Go will start the next
Source Point.
Abort pushbutton
Clicking this pushbutton interrupts the current Source Point after the
current acquisition is complete. This stops the sequence and opens a
dialog box that lets you record the data or cancel the Source Point:
• If you click OK, the current acquisition is recorded to the SEGD file.
Then clicking Go will cause the sequence to continue.
6
• If you click Cancel, the current acquisition is NOT recorded. The Go,
Cancel, End buttons are prompted and have the same effect as after
clicking Stop.
The Abort pushbutton is legal while waiting for the Time Break.
T. E. indicator
(Transmit Errors) That indicator may appear in the Active Source view
in the event of transmission incidents on the Lines. Those errors are
automatically recovered by the system (the data is successfully
transmitted again) and the seismic data is no way affected. This is
simply indicative of difficult transmission conditions.
ITB indicator
Figure 6-5 Internal Time Break

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Main Window
(Internal Time Break) This indicator appears if the 428XL fails to

receive the Time Break within the TB Window. An ITB is generated
after the “Time Break Window” following the Firing Order has expired,
with an accuracy of +/- 5ms. See TB Window (page 202).
With a Vibroseismic source, ITB is an abortive error. With an impulsive
source, at the end of the acquisition the GUI asks you if you want to
record the data (click OK) or discard it (click Cancel).
Blaster indicator
In the case of an impulsive-type source with a SHOTPRO, or SGS, or
Boombox, or Macha blaster controller, the Active Source view also
includes a “Blaster” indicator along with Uphole and TB fields. During
acquisition an ASCII message is received from the blaster box (via the
XDEV adapter on the Auxiliary line) containing the Uphole Time and
Time Break values.
• Uphole Time The time the pulse from the blast is detected uphole,
determined by analysis of the Uphole Geophone
signal.
• TB Confirmed Time Break, amount of time that current
flow to the blasting cap was greater than 4 amps. The
start of current flow is set up to start at Time Break
in the Shot Pro Encoder.
The Blaster indicator may be:

• red “No Fire” status code received,
• green “All OK” status code received,
• orange No Confirmed Time Break or Uphole Time, or any of the
following Warnings:
- Confirmed Time Break received but no Uphole
Time.
- Low battery.

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Main Window
- Uphole Geophone resistance not measured or out

of tolerance.
- Cap resistance not measured or out of tolerance.
If the message includes position data ($GPGGA message), the Source
Point position is viewed in the POSITIONING client window.
The Active Acquisition view

The acquisitions to stack, defined with The Process Type setup
(page 200), appear in this view.
6
Figure 6-6
The indicator ahead of shot number should be interpreted as follows:
Indicator Meaning
Acquisition to do.
Acquisition in progress.
Acquisition done.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Process Type setup

In this section:
• Auxiliary traces (page 205)
• Impulsive type (page 207)
• Impulsive Stack (page 208)
• Correlation Before Stack (page 209)
• Correlation After Stack (page 211)
• Vibroseismic Stack (page 212)
• How to Generate a Process Type (page 214)
General
Figure 6-7
The “Process Type” associated with each shot determines which type of
seismic signal to generate (depending on the associated “Acquisition

December 4, 2006
Operation
Type”) and which type of processing to perform prior to recording the

seismic data acquired.
Standard/Advanced
In each process type setup window, the “Advanced” option prompts an
extra parameter: Refraction Delay (for Impulsive modes) or Listening
Time (for Vibroseismic modes).
Most of the parameters available for the different Process Types you can
create are described below but only the first three are always required.
Refer to the description of each Process Type to see which parameters
you need to set up. See also Auxiliary traces (page 205) and How to
Generate a Process Type (page 214).
6
Firing Order
For the 428XL to transmit the Firing Order and receive the Time Break,
you can choose to attach the source controller to an LCI428 interface or
to an LAUX428 unit. Use the “Box Type” option to choose which way
to use.
In the Serial Nb field, enter the Serial Number of the LCI428 or
LAU428 to use.
If you choose the LCI428 option, use the Plug option button to choose
which “Blaster” port to use on the LCI428.
Record Length
The time (seconds) that the data is recorded. In Impulsive modes, this
duration determines the acquisition length (i. e. the length of time that
the seismic data is recorded into LAU acquisition units).
See also Specifications in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3.
Listening Time
The time (seconds) that the data is recorded (i. e. Record Length), in
Vibroseismic modes. The acquisition length in Vibroseismic modes is
equal to the sweep length plus the Listening Time. (The acquisition
December 4, 2006
6 Operation
length is the length of time that the seismic data is recorded into LAU
acquisition units).
TB Window
The TB Window is a time interval that starts when the 428XL sends a
Firing Order (FO). During the TB Window the 428XL is waiting for
the TB from the shooting system. If the TB occurs within that interval
then the acquisition starts. If it doesn’t, then the 428XL generates an
Internal TB (ITB) and the acquisition starts. In Vibroseismic operations,
ITB is an abortive error. In impulsive mode, at the end of acquisition the
GUI will ask you if you want to dump the data to the record process.
Note In Radio or Dual telemetry, the TB Window field is used to

adjust the delay between the FO and TB in Dynamite
operations, or the delay between Early TB and TB.
Note If you are using an LSI, the delay between the Firing Order and
the predicted Time Break must be entered in the TB Window
field.
Refraction Delay
(Allowable range: 0 to 64000 ms, precision 500 ms). This parameter is
only available if you choose the “Advanced” option.
The Refraction Delay allows you to insert a delay between the Time
Break received by the 428XL and the beginning of the acquisition.
Using the Refraction Delay, you can shorten the acquisition length, but
this assumes that you know how long it will take for the signal to travel
from the shot point to your spread, or else you may lose data.
Acquisition Index
Sequential number of each individual acquisition in process types
where Stacking is requested.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Acquisition Type
Type of acquisition, to be chosen from those defined in the Vibrator
main window’s Setup menu. This may be from 1 to 32. In each
Acquisition Type, the following is specified:
- type of sweep to be performed by the vibrator fleet or fleets to be
used,
- pilot signals to be output by the vibrator controller,
- automatic lift and high line pickup options.
Note for VE432 users only: A noise elimination Threshold Type

(modulo 16) is automatically associated with each Acquisition 6
Type:
Threshold Type 1 <=> Acq Type 1
... ...
... ...
Output option
The Output button allows you to select different operations on the
processed data. It is used, associated with the Add, Change and Delete
buttons, to build the acquisition table.
• None. You have to select it when you don't want to do any operation
on the processed data.
• Dump: This allows you to dump the data to the record process and
the plotter after processing the acquisition. The memory is cleared
afterwards. You need at least one Dump at the end of the table.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
• Xdump: You can use this option if you want to request an extra dump
to the record process and the plotter after processing the acquisition,
although that is not the last acquisition. With this option, the
correlation memory is not cleared. Because it increases memory
usage, Extra Dump should only be used with consideration of the
impact on memory resources.
Correlation with
Used to specify which auxiliary channel is the reference (Pilot) signal
for the correlation of seismic channels. For example, enter “Pilot” if you
have assigned “Pilot” as label to that channel. See Label (page 116). This
will tell the system where the reference signal is physically connected,
for correlating the seismic channels with that signal.
Auto Correlation Peak Time

Used to shift the autocorrelation peak (recorded on two auxiliary
traces). Unless a value other than 1 is entered for the “Auto Correlation
Peak Time” shift, only one half of the correlation wavelet will be
recorded on each of the two auxiliary traces (negative time side of the
peak on one trace and positive time side on the other). Theoretically, the
autocorrelation wavelet is symmetrical with respect to the correlation
peak standing for zero time offset between the correlated signals.
This time shift is applied to the results of cross-correlation and to
similarity tests.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Auxiliary traces
The Auxiliaries pane allows you to describe the process that you want
to be done on your auxiliary channels and specify which auxiliary traces
you want to record.
Auxiliary Trace Auxiliary channels

Number and processing
3 Aux2*Pilot-
1st Aux Trace in SEGD file ta1 Pilot
2nd Aux Trace in SEGD file ta3 Aux2*Pilot-
3rd Aux Trace in SEGD file ta2 Aux2*Pilot+
Reference for seismic

Pilot 6
channel correlation
Figure 6-8
For an auxiliary channel to be correlated with another, use the * operator

(e. g. Aux2*Pilot). The system will automatically use the second
operand as the reference signal for the correlation operation.
Autocorrelation or cross-correlation will cause two auxiliary traces to
be generated (one trace for the positive time side of the correlation peak,
and another trace for the negative time side). To specify which auxiliary
trace is used to record the positive (negative) time side, append a Plus
(Minus) sign to the description of the trace.
The order in the Auxiliaries list box determines how the auxiliary traces
will appear in the SEGD file and on your plotter output. (See Figure 6-8
above).
With the example shown in Figure 6-8 on page 205, the 1st auxiliary
trace in the SEGD file will record the uncorrelated pilot, the 2nd
auxiliary trace (Aux2*Pilot-) will record the negative time side of the
correlation peak, whereas the 3rd auxiliary trace (Aux2*Pilot+) will
record the positive time side.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Example for a similarity test

Assuming:
- the reference sweep signal is fed to your 1st auxiliary channel
and labelled “Pilot”,
- the ground force signal is fed to your 2nd auxiliary channel and
labelled “ReturnSweep”,
- the sweep signal shifted by radio delays is fed to your 3rd
auxiliary channel and labelled “ReturnPilot”.
Also assuming you want the following signals on your plotter output
and in your SEGD file:
- positive time side of the Autocorrelation wavelet on the 1st
auxiliary trace,
- uncorrelated pilot on the 2nd auxiliary trace,
- positive time side of the cross-correlation of ReturnSweep with
ReturnPilot on the 3rd auxiliary trace.
Then, you have to use the following description in the Auxiliaries pane:
Autocorrelation wavelet
on Aux Trace 1
Uncorrelated pilot ta3 ReturnSweep*ReturnPilot+
on Aux Trace 2 Cross-correlation of
ta1 Pilot*Pilot+ ReturnSweep with
ta2 Pilot ReturnPilot on Aux Trace 3
ta3 ReturnSweep*ReturnPilot+
Figure 6-9

December 4, 2006
Operation
Impulsive type
This type of process is intended for traditional impulsive-source
operations (e. g. explosive).
6
Figure 6-10
See also:
• Standard/Advanced (page 201)
• Firing Order (page 201)
• Record Length (page 201)
• TB Window (page 202)
• Refraction Delay (page 202)

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Impulsive Stack
Figure 6-11
This type of process is used to stack impulsive data (from any kind of
impulsive low energy source, e. g. weight drop) before recording it.
For any auxiliary traces to be stacked too, you must have them on Radio
telemetry channels, and use the Prestack option.
The Acquisition pane allows you to create a list of acquisitions to stack.
On each acquisition in your list, use the Output option to choose
whether to record the stacked data (Dump option) or not (None option).
You have to choose at least one Dump on the last acquisition.
If you choose the Raw option, then you record the data unprocessed at
the end of each acquisition (with no stacking). So at the end of the
sequence you will have one record for each individual acquisition and
another one for the result from the stacking process.
Note Because they increase memory usage, the Raw and Xdump
options should only be used with consideration of the impact on
memory resources.
See also:

December 4, 2006
Operation

• Refraction Delay (page 202)
• Acquisition Index (page 202)
• Output option (page 203)
Correlation Before Stack 6
Figure 6-12
You use this type of process in Vibroseismic operations. As the wording

of the option suggests, correlation will be performed before stacking.
The Raw option is used when you want to record each individual
acquisition too. In your SEGD file, you get the stacked correlated data
and also the raw uncorrelated acquisition data.
You need at least one Dump of data for each correlation source at the
end of your table.”D” can be combined with the two sources, for

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
example D1 to dump the stacked result of the acquisition correlated

with source 1.
The possible single-source or dual-source combinations are: d1, d2,
d1d2.
memory resources.
See also:
• Auto Correlation Peak Time (page 204)
• Listening Time (page 201)
• Acquisition Type (page 203)

December 4, 2006
Operation
Correlation After Stack
6
Figure 6-13
This is another way to work with a vibrator. The first operation consists
of stacking the data and, at the end of it, performing a correlation on the
stacked data and recording the result.
All parameters are the same as with the Correlation Before Stack option.
You just have one more column in the description table, to specify the
sign to apply to the acquired data. The sign will be applied to the data
and the Pilot.
memory resources.
See also:

December 4, 2006
6 Operation

• Auto Correlation Peak Time (page 204)
Vibroseismic Stack
Figure 6-14
With this mode of operation you just do a stack of the acquisitions. As

a result you will record uncorrelated data in your SEGD file.
The Acquisition Type is defined, as is the case for all Vibroseismic
operation modes, in the Vibrator main window.
The Stack Sign is used to specify the sign to apply to the acquired data.
If you choose the Raw option, then you record the data unprocessed at
the end of each acquisition (with no stacking). So at the end of the

December 4, 2006
Operation
sequence you will have one record for each individual acquisition and
another one for the result from the stacking process.
Like for all Vibroseismic modes you must request a Dump at the end of
the acquisition sequence.
memory resources.
See also: 6

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
How to Generate a Process Type

Select Process Type from the Setup menu.
Use the option button at the top of the Process Type Setup window to
choose the desired type of processing. As a result the relevant
parameters are prompted in the upper pane.
For a process type with multiple acquisitions, build the acquisition table
as follows:
• Click in the Acquisition index box and enter the necessary range of
rows for your acquisition table. For example, to create 8 rows in one
click, enter “1-8” into the index box;
• Select “None” from the “Output” option button,
1-8
Figure 6-15
• Click Add,
• For each acquisition in the list box, select the desired “Output” option
(Double-click on the desired acquisition number, select the output
option, then click Change).
After entering all the parameters to define your Process Type, you only
need to enter a process type number and label in the list box at the foot
of the window, and click Add then Apply to save the process type.
To view the parameters of any process type, double-click on it in the list
box. Then you can make any changes needed and click Change, or
Add, or Delete, as required. To save your changes, click Apply.

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Source Point Setup

In this section:
• Source point parameters (page 215)
• To generate a Source Point setup (page 219)
Source point parameters

To open this setup window, select Operation from the Setup menu.
Creating a source point setup consists of generating an “operation table”
containing the characteristics of the successive Shot Points planned.
When you are loading SPS files to the database in the Log main
6
window, you automatically generate this table. The window below
shows an example of operation table. You can use the Log main window
to save the table to a file.
Figure 6-16
Shot Id.
Shot Point or Vibrated Point sequential number.
Break Point
If you enter “Yes” in the “Break Point” column, for any Shot/VP, then
the spread will not be configured automatically for this source point (so
that you can skip it if required).
December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Swath Id
Identification number of the set of seismic lines to shoot (i. e. the set of
receiver positions and source points depicted in a set of SPS R-, S- and
X-files).
Source Line
Source Point Line Number, adjustable in steps of 0.1 between Lines L
and L+1. Used jointly with the Source Receiver field to define the
source location, and displayed as “Source Point Line” in the operation
table.
Source Receiver
Source Point receiver position Number, adjustable in steps of 0.1
between receiver positions RP and RP+1. Used jointly with the Source
Line field to define the source location, and displayed as “Source Point
Nb” in the operation table.
Source Receiver
L
RP RP+1 RP+2
Source Line
L+1
Figure 6-17
Spread Type
Choose one of the Spread Types defined through the “Absolute” or
“Generic” Spread Setup menu, in the “Line” main window.
• With an “Absolute” spread, you have to specify the complete
acquisition spread to be used for each and every shot. When you are
loading SPS files to the database in the Log main window, you
automatically generate an operation table with the Absolute spread.
• A “Generic” spread describes the pattern of active channels. That is
helpful if the programming of the spread is done manually and you
do not want to change the description every time the spread moves.

December 4, 2006
Operation
SFL
Spread First Line: lowest Line Number in the spread; used along with
“SFN” to specify the origin of the spread.
• For a generic spread, SFL is entered by the operator.
• For an absolute spread, SFL is automatically computed by the
system.
SFN
Spread First receiver position Number: lowest Receiver Position in the
spread; used along with “SFL” to specify the origin of the spread.
• For a generic spread, SFN is entered by the operator.
6
• For an absolute spread, SFN is automatically computed by the
system.
Process Type
Choose one of the Process Types defined through the “Process Type”
Setup menu in the Operation main window. The “Process Type” you
choose will tell the system which type of seismic signal to generate and
which type of processing to perform prior to recording the seismic data
acquired.
Comments
May be used to enter a comment for each VP. Such comments are
displayed in the Operation table and recorded in the User Header in the
SEGD file. If the “User Header” is entered into the list of parameters for
an Observer Report or an SPS text file (using the LOG main window),
then the comments will also be included in the Observer Report or SPS
text file.
Any ASCII character is allowed except double quotation marks (“).

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Superspread
If you want to use a Superspread (an absolute spread that encompasses
several successive spreads), enter its identification number into this
field. You must have created it in the Line main window (see Absolute
spreads on page 123).
Superspread
Figure 6-18
If you do not want to use a Superspread, leave this field empty.

If you generate your Source Point setup by importing an SPS Relation
file, then, because the SPS format does not have any Superspread field,
the Superspread number defaults to the Spread number (the Spread
number contained in the SPS file is automatically copied to the
Superspread field).
The advantage of using a Superspread lies in that you save time because
after the Superspread is formed, lines don’t need to be formed every
time the active spread moves (unless the Aux descriptor changes).
WARNING
When you are using a Superspread, the Gain code for any given trace
must be the same in all individual spreads making up the Superspread,
and in the Superspread itself (because the acquisition of a trace must be
done with the Gain code specified for that trace in the active individual
spread).
Note If you are using different Process Types for the shots associated
with a superspread, be sure the Aux descriptor is the same in all

December 4, 2006
Operation
of them, or else the spread will need to be formed again every

time a change appears in the Aux descriptor, which takes time.
Note When you are using a Superspread, all the channels included in
the superspread are acquired. The system automatically sorts
them and only records the traces belonging in the active spread,
i. e. that which is actually selected in the Operation table (and
described in the input SPS X file if you are using such a file).
Note If any line is disconnected in the Superspread, an acquisition
error will appear even if the disruption is outside the spread
actually selected.
Note Only the channels from the active spread are viewed by the
Seismonitor function.
6
Note Channels in the Superspread that do not belong in the active
spread are viewed in brown.
To generate a Source Point setup

Select Operation from the Setup menu.
Use “-” and “/” and comma as shortcuts, in combination with the
command buttons (Add, Change, Delete, Reverse), to generate your
table in a minimum number of steps (see Working with 428XL windows
on page 22).
Shortcut with Add button

In Shot/V.P. Id column:
Inserted between two numbers, those become the limits of the modification, i.
-
e. 1-6 from 1 to 6.
No change in cells, or step operator, e. g. 1-6/2 (from 1 to 6 every two, only
/
cells referring to 1, 3 and 5 will be affected.
Only named cells are affected e. g. 1,3,5,7 (cells 1, 3, 5 and 7 will be
,
affected).

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
In all other columns except Comment.

- , will give you a syntax error.
no change if alone; allows values to be incremented or decremented if it
/ follows a number, e. g. 10.00/-0.05 (on each change of row you will do the
subtraction -0.05).
Any changes you make will not take effect until you click the Apply
button.
The Reset button works like an undo command. It restores the table as
it was before you last clicked on Apply.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Seismic setup options

In this section:
• Operating Mode (page 221)
• Automation (page 222)
• Look (page 224)
Operating Mode
Figure 6-19
To open this setup window, select Options from the Setup menu. Click
on the Operating tab. To enable and save your changes, click Apply.
• Standard: choose this option to work with an Explosive-type source
(dynamite, air gun or any other kind of impulsive energy), or with a
standard Vibroseismic source (single source or flip-flop dual source).
• Slip-Sweep: this option enables slip-sweep operations (for VE432
users only). See Slip-sweep on page 248.
• HFVS: (High Fidelity Vibratory Seismic) Selecting HFVS enables
data retrieval from LAUR radio telemetry units used to record
vibrator motion signals picked up on each vibrator, as soon as each
sweep is complete (rather than waiting for the listening time to
expire), so that they can be recorded as Auxiliary channels in the

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
SEGD file. Correlated shots are only sent to the QC processing tool
(not recorded). Uncorrelated (Raw) data is only recorded (not sent to
the QC processing tool). See HFVS (page 400).
Automation
Figure 6-20
To open this setup window, select Options from the Setup menu.Click
on the Operating tab. To enable and save your changes, click Apply.
With a Vibroseismic source or Stacked Impulsive source, the progress
of the acquisitions depends on which Automation option you choose.
(With an Impulsive source, the automation option is of no effect).
Continuous
You are in automatic mode. That means, if you don't have any problem
during acquisitions, you click Go and you are able to shoot
consecutively the SPs or VPs defined in the Operation Table,
respecting the operator-selected delay between acquisitions and SP/
VPs, without any further action until the next Break Point (if any) is
encountered.
You can click Stop to stop the sequence on completion of the current
operation (acquisition or dump) and click Go to resume the sequence.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Note Whenever a new field unit is laid out, it does not appear in the
Line main window’s topographic view until the spread is
formed again. If the spread remains the same for consecutive
shots (VPs) in continuous mode, no spread forming is
performed, so any new unit laid out will not be visible unless
you program a Look between VPs (see Look on page 224). If
any Sensor tests are selected in the Look setup menu, they are
performed too.
Discontinuous
You will do the entire shot point or VP sequence with the specified
delays between acquisitions, and you have to click Go for the next shot
6
point or VP.
The delay between VPs is not used.
You can click Stop to stop the sequence on completion of the current
operation (acquisition or dump) and click Go to resume the sequence.
Manual
Each acquisition within each shot point must be started manually, by
clicking the Go pushbutton. The Delays Between Acquisitions and
Between VPs are not used.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Look
Recurrence
every n VPs
Figure 6-21
To open this setup window, select Options from the Setup menu. Click
on the Look tab. To enable and save your changes, click Apply.
This Seismic Setup is used for automation of Look and Sensor tests
between shot points.
• The AutoLook option is used to enable or disable automatic
performance of a Look function between shot points. Tick this option
to select the Automatic mode, untick it for the Manual mode
(meaning that you will have to click on the Look button in the Line
main window).
• Every: This field is used to specify the recurrence rate of the Look
function if AutoLook is enabled. The selected tests will
automatically be launched after completing the number of shot points
specified in this field.
• With Tests: These buttons allow you to choose one or more Sensor
tests to be performed by the Look function, in Automatic or Manual
mode.
The Resistance and Tilt tests are done jointly: running either of them
also runs the other but, unless its button is activated the results from the
other test are not used.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Note If AutoLook is used, the acquisition cycle time is lengthened

by 0.5 second, plus the time that each test requested takes to
execute, that is:
- plus 1.5 s. if you select the Resistance and/or Tilt test;
- plus 1.5 s. if you select a Leakage test.
Note On a line segment including an LSI, the AutoLook function is
disabled: to see new FDUs, you must use manual Look in that
case.
Note The tests selected in the Look setup use the Gain code selected
in the Line main window’s Test setup. If DSUs are used, it is
important to see if the Gain selected in the Test setup is the
6
same as that used in the production spread (because switching
the gain is time-consuming and also because it is preferable to
do the Tilt test with the gain used for production). See
Instrument tests (page 167).

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Source Type setup

In this section:
• Sources (page 226)
• Explosive source parameters (page 227)
• Vibroseismic source parameters (page 228)
Sources
Select Sources from the Setup menu. This setup window is used to
assign a name to each available seismic source and determine how the
system will select the next shot to do with that source from the operation
table.
The Explo option is for all types of impulsive energy (dynamite, air
gun, etc.). The Vibro option is for vibroseismic sweeps.
Figure 6-22
After entering all the parameters to define a type of seismic source, you
only need to enter a source type number in the Nb field, and click Add
then Apply to save the source type.
To view the parameters of any source type, double-click on it in the list
box (at the foot of the Setup window). Then you can make any changes
needed and click Change, or Add, or Delete, as required. To save your
changes, click Apply.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Explosive source parameters
Figure 6-23
To open this setup window, select Sources from the Setup menu, click
on the Explo tab.
Label 6
Use this field to enter a self-explanatory name that will identify the
source in plain (e. g. a shooter’s name).
Shooter Nb
Use this field to enter the identification number of the source controller.
Comment
Use this field to enter a description of the impulsive source in plain if
required.
Increment Nb
This field is used to specify the increment step to use after a shot is done,
to automatically determine which shot should next get the focus in the
list of shots to do. Typically the increment step is 1. An increment step
other than 1 is especially helpful in multishooter operations.
• With 0 as Increment step, the Shot Number is not incremented after
a shot is done, and no new spread is formed.
• With a Increment step other than 0 (a positive or negative integer),
the number of the next shot to do is computed accordingly, the focus
jumps to that shot, and the new spread is formed.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Vibroseismic source parameters

To open this setup window, select Sources from the Setup menu and
click on the Vibro tab.
Figure 6-24
Label
Use this field to enter a self-explanatory name that will identify the
source in plain (e. g. a vibrator leader’s name).
Fleet Nb
Use this field to enter the identification number of the group of vibrators
to use as the source. To determine which vibrators are included in each
fleet, use the VE432 window (see Vibrator Fleet on page 375).
Moving: Sequentially
Choose the Sequential option if you wish to take VPs as scheduled in
the operation table.
After a VP is done, with this option, the system will use the increment
step specified in the“Step” field to determine which VP to do with this
source and select it automatically from the list of VPs to do.
If this source is for VPs with multiple acquisitions to stack, you may or
may not have to choose the “Work by Acq” option, depending on
whether or not you want to shift the fleet’s vibrators after each sweep.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Moving: Randomly
Choose the Randomly option if you want to allow the Source Points to
get the focus in any order (e. g. if you are using a “DSD network”) rather
than follow the order determined in the list of shots to do.
Step
This field is used to specify the increment step to use after a VP is done,
if you choose Sequential as Moving option, to automatically determine
which VP should next get the focus in the list of VPs to do. Typically
6
the step is 1. An increment step other than 1 is especially helpful for
Flip-flop Vibroseismic operations (see Flip-Flop sweeps on page 243).
• With 0 as step value, the Shot Number is not incremented after a VP
is done, and no new spread is formed.
• With a step other than 0 (a positive or negative integer), the number
of the next VP to do is computed accordingly, the focus jumps to that
VP, and the new spread is formed. For an example with a negative
step, see Figure 6-33 on page 246.
Work by Acq
• Do not choose “Work by Acq” if the multiple acquisitions are to be
stacked without shifting any vibrator. As a result:
- In the standard mode (no Slip-Sweep), the multiple acquisitions
to stack are done in succession, using the operator-selected delay
between acquisitions (see The Delay setup on page 232), without
interleaving with other VPs.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
- With Slip-Sweep enabled, because acquisitions are stacked with

all vibrators at the same place, the vibrator fleet is implicitly
Ready at the end of each sweep (unless this is the last sweep
within the VP); therefore, it can shake as soon as the Slip Time
has expired. As a result, a VP’s acquisitions will interleave with
those of other VPs.
• Choose the “Work by Acq” option if the multiple acquisitions to
stack require the vibrator fleet to shift after each sweep. As a result:
- In the standard mode (no Slip-Sweep), after a sweep is done, the
focus will pass to the next VP determined with the increment
“Step” value (that may be a suspended VP with still a number of
acquisitions to do). As a result, a VP’s acquisitions will
interleave with those of other VPs.
- With Slip-Sweep enabled, the focus may pass to whichever
vibrator fleet is ready to shake, if it falls inside the VP grabbing
circle, after the Slip Time has expired. As a result, acquisitions
can interleave with those of other VPs. For details on the “VP
Grabbing Radius”, see page 278.
Note To enable the system to open and suspend two or more VPs, see
428XL scalability (page 67).
The very first time any vibrator fleet is reported ready to shake at a
location that falls within the VP grabbing circle around a planned source
COG position, that fleet is assigned to the first acquisition for that VP.
If the fleet’s position falls within more than one VP grabbing circles, a
dialog box pops up so the operator can choose between the eligible VPs.
The subsequent acquisitions to stack will be done by the same vibrator
fleet when it is next ready to shake within the same circle.
Cluster
This field is used for simultaneous dual-source operations. The Cluster
number determines the two fleets to use simultaneously.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Comment
Use this field to enter a description of the vibroseismic source in plain,
if required.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The Delay setup
The Delay setup

To open this setup window, select Delay from the Setup menu.
Figure 6-25
• “At end of Acq”: use this slider to set the required minimum time
between any two successive acquisitions to stack. This delay is not
used if the Manual automation option is selected (see Automation on
page 222).
• “At end of VP” use this slider to set the required minimum time
between any two successive VPs. This delay is only used if the
Continuous option is selected and no Break Point is set on the
selected VP.
Each delay is selectable from 0.0 to 99.0 seconds in 0.1-second steps.
If the Slip-Sweep Operating Mode (page 221) is enabled, the Delay
setup window is used to adjust the Slip Time instead.
Figure 6-26
The Slip Time is used as follows: after a sweep is started, the Firing
Order for the next sweep will not be generated until the vibrator fleet is
ready and the Slip Time Delay has expired.
The Slip Time Delay should not be shorter than the desired listening
time. See Slip-sweep (page 248) for details.

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Noise Editing setup

In this section:
• Noise editing parameters (page 233)
• Noise editing thresholds (page 237)
Noise editing parameters

To open this setup window, select “Noise Editing” from the Setup
menu. To enable and save your changes, click Apply.
Figure 6-27
Prior to any processing, an offset correction operation is performed on

each sample:
n
∑ A( k , i )
k =1 For details about “n”, see Reference
A( k , i ) = A ( k , i ) − Information in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3
n

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
The stack formula is given below as a reminder:

s
A( k , i ) = ∑ A( k , i , p)
p =1
A(k) = kth sample
n = number of samples in the acquisition
i = trace index
p = stack index
s = current stack fold
Noise Editing
(see also More About Noise Elimination on page 256).
Historical
If you choose this option, then the noise editing function is enabled.
Then you must define the set of parameters which are necessary to
remove impulsive noise using an historical type of editing.
Diversity Stack
If you choose this option, then the Diversity Stack noise elimination
function is enabled. For this type of noise elimination, you are not
required to enter any parameter, apart from the Low Trace Percentage,
Low Trace Value and Nb of Windows.
The energy (E) from each trace is calculated by averaging the squares
of the samples (before correlation). Then each sample is multiplied by
the inverse of the energy previously computed.
At the end of n sweeps (when the VP is complete) each sample stacked
(before or after correlation) is multiplied by the inverse of the sum of
the inverses of the energies previously computed.
There's no peak editing function for that type of noise elimination. The
Diversity Stack function cannot be used in Stack-Only operation.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Off
If you choose this option, then the noise editing function is disabled, and
no parameters need to be defined.
Editing Type
Zeroing
If you choose this option, then any sample equal to or greater than the
editing threshold will trigger the process which zeroes the samples over
a window length that is selected by the “Zeroing Length” parameter.
Linear-variation taper, over a window selected by the “Zeroing Taper
Length” parameter, is programmed before and after the zeroed portion
in order to prevent discontinuity.
6
Clipping
If you choose this option, then every sample equal to or greater than the
threshold will be clipped to the editing threshold value by the noise
editing process.
Nb of Windows
(Allowable range: 1 to 64). Number of noise editing windows.
With the noise elimination function activated, the acquisition length
may be divided into one or more windows (1 to 64).
With “Diversity Stack” noise elimination and the “Correlation Before
Stack” processing option, a single window is used.
Zeroing Taper Length

2n (allowable range for n: 0 to 8). This parameter represents the number
of samples corresponding to the linear-variation taper length before and
after a zeroed window, when the “Zeroing” option is selected for the
“Editing type” parameter.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Zeroing Length
(Allowable range: 1 to 500 milliseconds). Zeroing window length when
a sample exceeds the editing threshold, when the “Zeroing” option is
selected for the “Editing type” parameter.
Threshold Init Value

(Selectable from 0 to -132 in 6-dB steps). Initialization value for all
noise editing thresholds and threshold types in all windows of every
channel, for “Historical” noise elimination.
Low Trace %
(Selectable from 0 to 100%). Criterion for deciding whether a channel
is “Low”. If the number (in percent) of samples which are below the
value specified in the “Low Trace Value” field exceeds the value
specified in the “Low Trace %” field, then the trace is reported as
“Low”.
If a trace is “Low”, threshold update is not performed at the end of the
sweep.
Low Trace Value

(Selectable from 0 to -132 in 6-dB steps). Upper limit for “Low”
channel detection. If any channel sample is less than or equal to this
limit, then the “low channel detection” process is triggered for the
corresponding channel.
Noisy Trace %
(Selectable from 0 to 100). Criterion for deciding whether a channel is
“noisy”. If the number (in percent, computed with respect to the
acquisition length) of zeroed or clipped samples exceeds the value
specified in the “Noisy Trace %” field, then the trace is considered as
noisy.

December 4, 2006
Operation
The corresponding trace number is simply reported in the observer's

log. No further action is taken (i.e.normal threshold updating takes
place).
Noise editing thresholds

Clicking “Manual” isolates the Noise Editing process from the
preceding process stage and enables local functions for the management
of noise editing thresholds. As a result, data acquisition will be
suspended until you click “Auto”.
Clicking “Auto” connects the Noise Editing process to the preceding
process stage and allows data acquisition and processing to be
performed.
6
Figure 6-28
Hold/Var.
This button is used to enable or disable automatic updating of noise
editing thresholds in the “Historical” noise elimination process.
Choosing “Var.” enables thresholds to be automatically updated.
Choosing “Hold” causes thresholds to remain fixed at the latest value
updated before the “Hold” function was selected.
Init.
Clicking “Init.” presets all thresholds (64 windows) on all channels on
all threshold types (up to 16) to the initialization value entered for the
“Historical” noise elimination process.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Load
Clicking “Load” restores the latest noise editing thresholds saved, so
that they can be used as initialization values in the next “Historical”
noise elimination process.
Save
Clicking “Save” saves all current noise editing thresholds so that they
can be used at a later date in “Historical” noise elimination.
This command should be used prior to turning the power off or prior to
taking a shot with a different geometry which could affect noise editing.
The “Save” command saves:
• the threshold types used after power-on, or after clicking “Init.” or
“Load”, until “Save” is next used,
• the traces used in each threshold type,
• and the 64 windows on each trace (unused windows are initialized at
the threshold initialization value).

December 4, 2006
Operation
The Observer’s Comment Type Setup
The Observer’s Comment Type Setup

Selecting Comments from the Setup menu opens this window that
allows you to incorporate favourite comments of your own. Using this
function, you can easily and faster insert comments into your Obs Log.
These comments are not copied to the SEGD file.
6
Figure 6-29
Any ASCII character is allowed except double quotation marks (“).

Once you have entered a comment in the upper pane, enter a Number
and Label in the respective text boxes in the lower pane, and click
“Add” (or “Change”, as required) to add the new comment type into
the list box.
Click Apply to save your changes.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
How to take shots or sweeps

In this section:
• Blaster shots (page 240)
• VE432 sweeps (page 241)
• Flip-Flop sweeps (page 243)
• Slip-sweep (page 248)
Blaster shots
Shooting system not supplying the Shooter position

If the shooting system does not supply the position of the blaster, an
audio radio channel is required for the shooter to tell you when he is
ready to shoot and which Source Point to shoot. If this is the first shot
to do with this shooter, you have to right-click on the Source Point in
the Operation table and select the shooter from the pop-up menu. As a
result, the focus passes to that shooter and Source Point in the Active
Source view. Clicking “Go” will send a message to the blaster and
launch the acquisition.
After a shot is done, the system uses the operation table and the
increment “Step” associated with the Source to determine which shot
should next get the focus (appearing in the Active Source view). Then
you only need to click “Go” when the shooter says he is ready, unless
you want to choose another shot (by clicking) and shooter (by right-
clicking) in the operation table.
Shooting system supplying the Shooter position

(Not supported yet).

December 4, 2006
Operation
VE432 sweeps
In Vibroseismic operations, the way the focus passes from a VP to
another depends on the options you choose in Seismic setup options
(page 221) and The Source Type setup (page 226):
• In the standard mode (no Slip-Sweep, actual vibrator positions not
available), the system relies on the Operation Table and on the
parameters associated with the source (increment “Step”, “Moving”
and “Work by Acq” options) to determine which VP should next get
the focus after an acquisition is done. Two sources can be used
simultaneously (see Cluster on page 230). Up to four sources can be
used alternately (see Flip-Flop sweeps on page 243).
• If Slip-Sweep is enabled but actual vibrator positions are not
6
supplied, the system relies on the Operation Table to determine which
VP should next have the focus after an acquisition is done. Stacking
is not allowed.
• If actual vibrator positions are supplied, VPs are not necessarily done
as scheduled in the Operation Table. When a fleet is ready to shake
and its COG lies in the vicinity of a planned source point to be done
with that fleet, the system automatically selects and highlights the
matching VP in the operation table, regardless of which VP is next
scheduled. The “Acquisition Type” associated with the Process Type
determines which sweep signal to use. The “Active Acquisition”
view lets you see which acquisition is in progress.
Below is a reminder of the available methods of starting sweeps
automatically:

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Source “Moving” option (Source Type setup menu)

Sequentially Randomly
(VE432 DSD network)
Standard Slip-Sweep Navigation Navigation &
(VE432) Slip-Sweep
- Vib. Fleet Ready. Slip Time expired. - Vib. Fleet Ready - Vib. Fleet
Sweep start Or And Ready
conditions - Delay between - Source COG And
Acquisitions or VPs matching planned - Source COG
expired. VP. matching
(See Note 1) (See Note 2) planned VP
And
- Slip Time
expired.
(See Note 2)
Note (1) In that case, the arrival of the “Ready” status overrides the
operator-selected delay.
Note (2) The VE432 “DSD Network” option (see page 344) allows
each vibrator to supply its GPS position. When a vibrator fleet
is ready (pads down) the leader sends a message containing
both the Ready status and the resulting Centre Of Gravity of the
source, calculated from the GPS position of each vibrator. This
enables the system to automatically select the matching source
point in the Operation Table. This way of shooting is referred to
as the source “Navigation” shooting mode. If the COG falls
outside the programmed circle, then a warning dialog box
shows up: click OK if you choose to accept the source position
as it is, Cancel otherwise (in that case the system will wait for
the next fleet to be ready).
Note (3) In the VE432 main window, a button is associated with each
fleet, enabling the Fleet Ready status to be relayed
automatically to the Operation window, or retained until you
choose to let it go.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Flip-Flop sweeps
What is meant by “Flip-Flop” mode with the 428XL is the use of
multiple sources alternately (not only two, but up to four).
Flip-flop with two sources

A simple textbook example of Source Type setup for flip-flop
operations is shown in Figure 6-30 where two sources (Source1 and
Source2) are alternately generated by two vibrator fleets (respectively
F1 and F2). In this example, no stacking is requested.
6
1 Source1 2
Source1 2
Source2 2
Source1 1 3 1
Source2 2 4 1
3 1 1 Dump
F1 moving to F1 moving to
VP5 location VP7 location
Source1 VP3 (Acq1) VP5 (Acq1)
F2 moving to
VP6 location
F1 Ready F2 Ready Expired delay F2 Ready
Figure 6-30 Typical Flip-Flop, no stacking
With the above settings, if you right-click on VP3 and choose “Start
Seismonitor with Vib Source1”, and right-click on VP4 and choose

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
“Start Seismonitor with Vib Source2”, then the system will do VP3
with fleet #1, VP4 with fleet #2, VP5 with fleet #1, and so on.
In the example shown in Figure 6-31 below, the same scheme is used but
two acquisitions are stacked at each VP without shifting the vibrators.
1 Source1 2
Source1 2
Source2 2
Source1 1 3 1
Source2 2 4 1
3 1 2 No Dump
3 2 2 Dump
F1 moving to
VP5 location
Source1 VP3 (Acq1) VP3 (Acq2) VP5 (Acq1)
F1 F2 Expired Expired F1 Expired Expired

Ready Ready delay delay Ready delay delay
Figure 6-31 Flip-Flop, stacking with no vib shift
“Start Seismonitor with Vib Source2”, then the system will do two
stacked acquisitions for VP3 with fleet #1, and then two stacked

December 4, 2006
Operation
acquisitions for VP4 with fleet #2, two stacked acquisitions for VP5
with fleet #1, and so on.
In the example shown in Figure 6-32 below, the “Work by Acq” option
is used. As a result the two acquisitions to stack are not done in
succession: while the vibrators are shifting to the location of the second
acquisition, the system takes an acquisition for another VP.
1 Source1 2
Source1
Source2
2
2 6
Source1 1 3 1
Source2 2 4 1
3 1 2 No Dump
3 2 2 Dump
F1 moving to
F1 shifting VP5 location
F2 moving to
F2 shifting VP6 location
F1 F2 Expired F2
Ready Ready delay Ready
Figure 6-32 Flip-Flop with “Work by Acq” option
“Start Seismonitor with Vib Source2”, then the system will do the
first acquisition for VP3 with fleet #1, and then the first acquisition for
December 4, 2006
6 Operation
VP4 with fleet #2 (while a pause icon appears ahead of VP3), and
resume VP3 with fleet #1 (while a pause icon appears ahead of
VP4), resume VP4 with fleet #2, and so on and so forth.
Note You can use a positive or negative value in the “Step” field.
In the example in Figure 6-33 below, the two source are moving in
opposite directions because a negative “Step” is used for source #2.
In progress
(source #1)
Negative step
1st acq. done

Done To do with
(source #2) source #2
2nd acq. in
progress
Figure 6-33 Negative “Step”

December 4, 2006
Operation
Flip-flop with three or four sources

The above simple schemes can be extrapolated to four sources.
Note If you want to use three or four sources with the “Work by Acq”
option, you have to use the Administration window to set the
Maximum open VP parameter (2 by default) to 3 or 4. See
In the example shown in Figure 6-34 below, the system will do only two
VPs out of four because the Step field is set at 4 but only two sources
are used. You still have to choose the first VP to do with source #2
(using the right-click popup menu) and that with source #4.
6
In progress
1st acq. done

Not used
Suspended
2nd acq. in
Not used progress
Figure 6-34 Flip-flop, 4 sources, with “Work by Acq” option

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Slip-sweep
(For VE432 users only)
Theory of operation
Each vibrator fleet you want to use in slip-sweep mode must have its
own vibrator controller (DPG). Since up to four DPGs can be attached
to the system, you can use up to four fleets in slip-sweep mode.
With the slip-sweep option enabled, the system lets a vibrator fleet start
sweeping without waiting for the previous fleet's sweep to be
completed. The system only waits until a delay specified by the operator
has expired (the estimated time for a given frequency in the previous
sweep to die out) and lets the next vibrator fleet start sweeping when it
is ready, with the appropriate receiver stations activated.
The system cuts the acquisition data flow at the appropriate time-zeroes.
The data appear in SEGD files as individual correlated records.
Fleet 1 sweep Fleet 1 sweep
Slip Time T Slip Time T
Fleet 2 sweep Fleet 2 sweep
Slip Time T Slip Time T
Fleet 3 sweep
Slip Time T
T = time from FO to
TB
Fleet 2 Fleet 3 Fleet 1 Fleet 2 Fleet 3
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Figure 6-35
Note After the Slip Time has expired and the Firing Order is
generated, the time required for the VE432 DPG to send the
Time Break depends on the number of T0 codes used to
synchronize the vibrators.
With two T0 sync codes, the FO to TB time is about 1.5 s, i. e. T = 2 s
approximately. See the T0 Setup in the VE432 DPG main window
(page 370).

December 4, 2006
Operation
How to implement slip-sweep

1. To enable the Slip-sweep option see Seismic setup options on
page 221.
2. To set the Slip Time, see The Delay setup (page 232).
3. Use the The Acquisition Type setup (page 362) menu in the DPG
window to create an Acquisition Type (this determines which
type of sweep signal will be generated by the vibrator fleets).
4. Use the Process Type setup menu in the Operation main window
to create a Process Type for each fleet.
6
Same type for all
acquisitions to stack in
Correlation operation this process type
Same list of auxiliary specific to this process
channels in all type
process types
Stacking fold
Figure 6-36
- You must use the Correlation Before Stack option.

- All the Process Types you want to use must include the same list
of auxiliary channels to acquire. In the example shown in
Figure 6-36, “aux1” and “aux2” should appear in each Process
Type to use. Process Type #1, is set to display “aux1*aux1”
(autocorrelation of “aux1”) on the third auxiliary trace; Process

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Type #2, can be set to display “aux2*aux2” (autocorrelation of

“aux2”) on the third auxiliary trace.
- In each Process Type, use a single Acquisition Type for all the
acquisitions to stack.
5. Use the The Source Point Setup (page 215) menu to create a list of
VPs and build an Operation Table. All VPs should use the same
spread (this is easy to achieve by creating a Superspread). Assign
one of the Process Types created at step 4 to each VP, for example
(see Figure 6-39):
VP11 Process Type 1
VP12 Process Type 2
VP13 Process Type 1
VP14 Process Type 2
VP15 Process Type 1, etc. .
6. Create a Source name and number for each vibrator fleet to use.
See Vibroseismic source parameters (page 228) for details. If you
choose Sequential as Moving option, choose the appropriate Step
(typically to be equal to the number of fleets used), depending on
how VPs are to be taken in sequence in your operation table.
Figure 6-37
7. Start each source by right-clicking on the first VP to do with it

(e.g. VP11 in the example shown in Figure 6-38) and choose the
appropriate source number from the “Start Seismonitor with Vib
Source”popup menu (e. g. source #2).

December 4, 2006
Operation
Figure 6-38
1st acq. done
Second VP11 acquisition starting with

Source #2 before first VP12 acquisition is
complete with Source #3
Figure 6-39 Slip-Sweep with two sources
With the Navigation option enabled (see Seismic setup options on

page 221), Slip-sweep shots are not necessarily taken in the order
defined in the Operation Table. Instead, the system automatically
selects the planned VP that matches the source location received from
the next vibrator fleet leader that becomes ready, regardless of which
VP is next scheduled to get the focus in the Operation Table.

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Examples
In the examples shown in Figure 6-40 and Figure 6-41, each fleet can
start shaking right after the Slip Time has expired.
F1 moving to
VP3 location
Fleet 1 VP1 (Acq1) VP3 (Acq1) VP5 (Acq1) VP7 (Acq1)

Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time
F2 moving to
VP4 location
Fleet 2 VP2 (Acq1) VP4 (Acq1) VP6 (Acq1)

Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time
Figure 6-40 Slip-sweep with sequentially moving source, no stacking
F1 moving to
VP3 location
Fleet 1 VP1 (Acq1) VP1 (Acq2) VP3 (Acq1) VP3 (Acq2)
Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time Slip Time
F2 moving to
VP4 location
Fleet 2 VP2 (Acq1) VP2 (Acq2) VP4 (Acq1)

Figure 6-41 Slip-sweep with sequentially moving source, stacking (2)

December 4, 2006
Operation
In the example shown in Figure 6-42, each fleet can start shaking when
it is Ready and the Slip Time has expired and its COG matches a
planned source point to be done with that fleet (see VP Grabbing Radius
on page 278), regardless of which VP is next scheduled to get the focus
in the Operation table.
F1 moving to F1 moving to
VP6 location VP8 location
VP1 (Acq1) VP6 (Acq1) VP6 (Acq1)

Fleet 1 F2 moving to
VP4 location
Fleet 2
VP2 (Acq1)
Slip Time
VP4(Acq1)
Slip Time F3 moving to
VP5 location
6
VP3 (Acq1) VP5 (Acq1)
Fleet 3
Slip Time Slip Time
F1 F2 F3 F2 F1 F3 F1
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Figure 6-42 Slip-sweep, randomly moving source, Navigation option, no stacking

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
In the example shown in Figure 6-43, you have to choose the Work by
Acq option for each source (see Vibroseismic source parameters on
page 228). Each fleet can start shaking when it is Ready and the Slip
Time has expired and its COG matches a planned source point to be
done with that fleet (see VP Grabbing Radius on page 278), regardless of
which VP is next scheduled to get the focus in the Operation table.
F1 moves to VP1 second

acquisition. location

Fleet 1
F2 moves to VP2 second

acquisition. location
Fleet 2
Slip Time Slip Time

Fleet 3
Slip Time Slip Time
F1 F3 F2 F1 F2 F3 F1
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Figure 6-43 Slip-sweep with randomly moving source, Navigation option, stacking (2)

December 4, 2006
Operation
In the example shown in Figure 6-44, each fleet will start shaking when
it is Ready and the Slip Time has expired and its COG matches a
planned source point to be done with that fleet (see VP Grabbing Radius
on page 278). Because acquisitions are stacked at the same place, the
fleet is implicitly Ready at the end of each sweep (unless this is the last
sweep within the VP), so it can shake as soon as the Slip Time has
expired.
Implicit
Ready F1 moving to
VP4 location

Fleet 1
Slip Time Slip Time
Implicit
Ready
Slip Time
6
Fleet 2 VP3 (Acq1) VP3 (Acq2)
Slip Time Slip Time

Fleet 3
Slip Time Slip Time
Implicit
F1 F3 F2 Ready F1
Ready Ready Ready Ready
Figure 6-44 Slip-sweep with randomly moving source, Navigation option, stacking (2)

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
More About Noise Elimination

In this section:
• “Spike Editing” method (page 256)
• Diversity Stack (page 259)
“Spike Editing” method

The Spike Editing method removes all samples exceeding a special
threshold.
The traces are processed successively in the order generated by the
acquisition process. Acquisition is performed line by line (from Low to
High receiver positions), starting with the farthest Left line.
The first trace is therefore the farthest in the Low branch, in the farthest
Left line.
When the number of traces increases (roll in), the new traces are
initialized with the value of the “Threshold Init Value” parameter.
When the number of traces decreases (roll out) it is the last ones which
disappear.
Each trace is divided into several time windows whose length is equal
to Acquisition Length/Nb of Windows.
The maximum number of windows for each trace is 64.
Each window has its own threshold, expressed as a multiple of 3 dB.
Every acquisition with the same length and energy spreading can be
associated with the same threshold type (i.e. if the initial phase only is
different). If acquisition types with different lengths or energy levels are
used, they must be associated with different threshold types.
There may be up to 16 different threshold types.
Two aspects are to be considered in the processing of a trace: removal
of samples exceeding a threshold, and threshold updating.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Removal of samples exceeding a threshold

Two methods can be used:
Zeroing
With this method, any sample greater than or equal to the threshold
causes a number of samples to be zeroed.
The number of zeroed samples is specified by “Zeroing Length”, and
the zeroing process is brought in and removed gradually, i.e. beginning
and ending with a “linear-variation taper”.
The Taper Length is expressed as a number of samples and equal to a
power of 2. 6
Clipping
Any sample exceeding the threshold is cut down to the value of the
threshold.
Threshold updating
In each window, the threshold is updated with respect to the highest
sample in the window.
Threshold updating is performed at the end of the noise elimination
process, using the Range parameter (12 dB) as follows (see also
Figure 6-45 on page 258):
Highest sample within D area:

If Threshold-3dB-Range > Highest sample, then Threshold is decreased
3dB.
Highest sample within C area:

If Thresh -3dB > Highest sample ≥ Thresh-3dB-Range, then Threshold
is unchanged.
Highest sample within B area:

If Threshold > Highest sample ≥ Threshold-3dB, then Threshold is
increased 3 dB.
December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Highest sample within A area:

If Highest sample > Thresh and VP's 1st acquisition complete, then
Threshold is increased 3 dB.
A A A A
Thr.
B 3 dB B B B
-3 dB
Range
C C C C
(12 dB)
D D D D
Thr.-3dB-Range Thr.-3dB Thr> max sample
> max sample > max sample ≥ Thr.-3dB
≥Thr-3 dB-Range max sample >Thr.
⇒Thr = Thr-3 dB ⇒Thr unchanged ⇒Thr = Thr+3 dB ⇒Thr = Thr+3 dB
Figure 6-45
Special cases
Threshold updating is not performed:
- if the trace is reported “Low”,
- if the “Hold” option is selected, rather than “Var.” (variable),
- if the trace is “dead” (corrupted).
A trace is “Low” if, before noise elimination, the percentage of samples
which are smaller than the specified “Low Trace Value” exceeds the
specified “Low Trace %”.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Diversity Stack
The Diversity Stack method is only used with “Correlation After
Stack” process types.
Each trace is divided into several windows whose length equals:
AcquisitionLength
----------------------------------------------------
NumberOfWindows
The maximum number of windows for each trace is 64.
The entire processing is performed before correlation but includes two
parts: before stacking and after stacking.
A(k) = kth sample
6
n = number of samples in the window
i = trace index
j = window index
p = current stack fold
Processing before stack

For each window in a trace, the following computation is performed:
n
[ A( k ) ] 2
E (i , j , p ) = ∑k =1 n
On the first window, the following computation is performed:

1
A ( k )* ---------------------
E ( i, j, p )
On the subsequent windows, a ramp is applied to the samples:

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
• Computation of the ramp increment (S) for a window:
E ( i, j, p ) – E ( i, j – 1, p )
S ( j ) = ---------------------------------------------------------
n
• Processing on the samples:
A(k)
---------------------------------------------------- where (1 ≤ k ≤ n).
E ( i, j – 1, p ) + S ( j )*k
Assuming the current stack fold is p, when the whole ith trace is
computed the following computation is performed on all the E(i,j,p)
terms for each window:
1 1
--------------------- + ------------------------------
E ( i, j, p ) E ( i, j, p – 1 )
Processing after stack

Assuming m is the last stacking fold prior to writing to the SEGD file,
the following computation is performed:
On the first window, the following computation is performed:
1
A( k ) ∗ m
1
∑p =1 E (i , j , p)
On the subsequent windows, a ramp is applied to the samples:

• Computation of the ramp increment (S) for a window:

December 4, 2006
Operation
1 1
m − m
1 1
∑
p =1 E (i , j , p)
∑ p =1 E (i , j − 1, p)
S ( j) =
n
• Processing on the samples:
⎡ ⎤
⎢ ⎥
A( k ) ∗ ⎢
⎢
1
+ [ ]
S ( j) ∗ k ⎥
⎥
6
m
1
⎢ ∑ E (i , j − 1, p) ⎥
⎣ P =1 ⎦
where (1 ≤ k ≤ n).
See also More About Correlation (page 262).

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
More About Correlation

In this section:
• Description (page 262)
• Data Distribution (page 265)
Description
Correlation is achieved in the frequency domain, using the “Fast Fourier
Transform” method. It is performed on a set of data whose length is 2n,
greater than “Pilot length” or “Sweep length”, whichever is the longest,
+ “Investigation length”.
The results from the correlation process begin with positive time result
data and end with negative time result data.
Correlation may be performed on three types of traces:
• auxiliary traces
• seismic traces
• seismic traces in similarity tests.
Correlation of auxiliary traces

The following operations are allowed on an auxiliary trace:
• Autocorrelation (e.g. aux1*aux1)
• Cross-correlation (e.g. aux2*aux1)
• Stack (e.g. aux3)
For Autocorrelation or Cross-correlation, the second term in the
expression of the correlation operation stands for the reference wavelet.
Autocorrelation and cross-correlation

Autocorrelation and crosscorrelation processings are identical. The
results consist of two traces: one for negative time shifts, one for
positive time shifts. Correlation is performed as follows:

December 4, 2006
Operation
• A direct Fast Fourier Transform is performed on the “pilot” auxiliary

trace, with this trace as real part and 0 as imaginary part.
• A direct Fast Fourier Transform is performed on the “operand”
auxiliary trace, with this trace as real part and 0 as imaginary part.
• A complex multiplication is performed of the result from the
“operand” auxiliary trace FFT by the result from the “pilot” auxiliary
trace FFT.
• A reverse Fast Fourier transform is performed on the result from the
complex multiplication.
Stack
No correlation is performed on an auxiliary trace. Only stacking is
6
performed.
When two pilots are used, the results from auxiliary traces are located
in the two records.
The order in which the result traces are written in SEGD files agrees
with the order of sequences in the description of the processings to be
done.
Correlation of seismic traces

The following operations are allowed on seismic traces:
• Correlation with one auxiliary trace (1 Pilot);
• Correlation with two auxiliary traces (2 simultaneous Pilots).
Correlation with 1 Pilot

Each correlated trace yields a single result trace (positive time).
Correlation with 2 Pilots

Each correlated trace yields two result traces:
• 1 trace results from correlation with the first pilot (positive time).
• 1 trace results from correlation with the second pilot (positive time).

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
This gives rise to two records with the same trace count.
If a trace is “dead”, then all its samples are zeroed.
Correlation is performed as follows:
• A direct Fast Fourier Transform is performed on the “Pilot” auxiliary
trace, with this trace as real part and 0 as imaginary part.
• A direct Fast Fourier Transform is performed on two seismic traces
with one seismic trace as real part and the other seismic trace as
imaginary part.
• A complex multiplication is performed of the FFT result from the 2
seismic traces by the FFT result from the pilot auxiliary trace.
• A reverse Fast Fourier Transform is performed on the result from the
complex multiplication.

December 4, 2006
Operation
Data Distribution
Pilot length < Sweep length

Seismic trace correlation
sweep length +
0 record length 2n
seismic trace
(sweep length + record length) 0
Aux trace (Pilot) 0
Pilot length
6
0 2n
Figure 6-46
Auxiliary trace correlation
0 sweep length + 2n
record length
Aux. trace 0 0
Aux trace (Pilot) 0
Pilot length
2n
Figure 6-47
Raw data or trace stacking

0 sweep length +
record length
seismic trace
(sweep length + record length)
Aux trace
Pilot length
0
Figure 6-48

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Pilot length = Sweep length

sweep length +
0 record length 2n
seismic trace
0
Aux trace (Pilot)

0
Pilot length
0 2n
Figure 6-49
0 sweep length + 2n
record length
Aux. trace 0 0
Aux trace (Pilot) 0
Pilot length
2n
Figure 6-50

sweep length +
0 record length
seismic trace
Aux trace
Pilot length
0
Figure 6-51

December 4, 2006
Operation
Pilot length > Sweep length and ≤ (Sweep length + Record

length)
sweep length +
0 record length 2n
seismic trace
0 0
Aux trace (Pilot) 0
0
Pilot length
2n
6
Figure 6-52
0 2n
sweep length +
record length
Aux. trace 0 0
Aux trace (Pilot) 0
Pilot length
2n
Figure 6-53

sweep length +
0 record length
seismic trace
Aux trace
Pilot length
0
Figure 6-54

December 4, 2006
6 Operation
Pilot length > Sweep length and > (Sweep length + Record
length)
Pilot length +
0 record length 2n
seismic trace
0 0
Aux trace (Pilot)

0
Pilot length
0 2n
Figure 6-55
0 2n
Pilot length +
record length
Aux. trace 0 0
Aux trace (Pilot) 0
Pilot length 2n
Figure 6-56

0 Pilot length
seismic trace
Aux trace
0 Pilot length
Figure 6-57

December 4, 2006
Chapter
7 Positioning

• The Setup menu (page 273)
• The layer manager (page 286)
• The geographical view (page 282)
• The Tracking view (page 295)
• Vehicles (page 300)
• The Alert system (page 305)
• Working with the GIS (page 311)

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The main window
The main window

To open the Positioning main window, click on this icon in the
launcher bar.
The Positioning client window makes use of Receiver and Source SPS
files to generate an image of the spread, possibly superimposed on a
background map, so that you can monitor the progress of a seismic crew
in real time.
Vibrator status messages (including vibrator positions if each vibrator is
equipped with a radiopositioning receiver) are used to display actual
source positions which are compared to expected ones for the purpose
of Quality Control.
The following major features are available:
• Geographical view or your survey, based on the set of source points
and receiver points in it (see SPS files on page 412).
• Viewing the progress of acquisitions in real time with:
- graphical display of the actual position of vibrators;
- calculation of the actual Centre of Gravity of the source, and
comparison with the planned point;
- predicted position of vibrators, depending on the stacking fold.
• Launching a shot by simply dragging and dropping a source onto a
source point in the graphical view.
• Real-time tracking of vehicles equipped with an MRU tracking
system; broadcasting waypoints to the tracked vehicles.
• Enhancing safety in the crew with a variety of alerts (emergency
alarm, vehicle speed, inclusion/exclusion areas, etc.).
• Requesting and building all sorts of reports and/or histograms on any
object appearing in the window, by simply clicking on the object in
the graphical view.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The main window
Figure 7-1
The View menu allows you to customize the main window by choosing
one or more views to display. For details on how you can arrange the
views and toolbars as you would like them, see the Hands-on guide
(page 44).
A GIS (Geographical Information System) is used to display the
geographical data in a multi-layer manner. The left-hand pane in the
Geographical view (Figure 7-1) reflects the structure of the GIS and
serves as a plot layer manager window for the different drawing layers
that can be plotted in the right-hand pane. See The layer manager
(page 286).

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The main window
The following information is displayed in the locator bar at the foot of

the window:
• Coordinates (Easting, Northing, Elevation) of the position the mouse
is pointing to, within the graphical view.
• Line number of the Line on which the mouse pointer is resting.
• Point Nb number of the point on which the mouse pointer is
resting.
• Distance Distance between two points selected with the mouse.
WARNING
If a background map is loaded but not viewed, the map is still active and
used as reference for Source and/or Receiver position views. (The map
remains active until you unload it).

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Setup menu
The Setup menu

In this section:
• The Datum Type setup window (page 273)
• The Projection Type setup window (page 275)
• Quality Warning setup window (page 277)
• The Vehicle Identity setup (page 280)
The Datum Type setup window
Figure 7-2

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Setup menu
In order to locate a point on the earth you need to know its coordinates
and the geodetic DATUM.
To open this setup window, select Geodetic from the Setup menu and
click on the Datum Type tab. This setup allows you to display Datum
parameters and make any changes needed.
A Datum is defined with the following parameters:
• Datum Spheroid: datum name.
• Semi-major Axis: allowable range 0.001 to 99999999.999 m.
• Inverse Flattening: allowable range 0.0000001 to 9999.9999999.
• Shift Dx: allowable range -9999.999 to 9999.999 m.
• Shift Dy: allowable range -9999.999 to 9999.999 m.
• Shift Dz: allowable range -9999.999 to 9999.999 m.
• Shift Rx: allowable range -99.999 to 99.999 s.
• Shift Ry: allowable range -99.999 to 99.999 s.
• Shift Rz: allowable range -99.999 to 99.999 s.
• Datum Scale Factor: allowable range 0.0000000001 to
1.1000000000.
After entering all the parameters to define a Datum, you only need to
enter an identification number in the Nb field (allowable range 1 to 16),
and click Add then Apply to save the Datum type.
To view the parameters of any Datum type, double-click on it in the list
box (at the foot of the Setup window). Then you can make any changes
needed and click Change, or Add, or Delete, as required. To save your
changes, click Apply.
Note You can define up to 16 Datum types.

You select the Datum type to use through the Projection Type Setup.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Setup menu
The Projection Type setup window

Your GPS receivers normally output GPGGA-type messages (Latitude,
Longitude, Altitude above the ellipsoid). The computer has to perform
a projection so that the position can be pinpointed on your survey map.
Figure 7-3
To open the Projection setup window, select Geodetic from the Setup
menu, then click on the Projection Type tab. This setup allows you to
display the projection parameters and make any changes needed.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Setup menu
The option button at the top (Currently used Projection Type) allows
you to choose which projection type to use.
A Projection Type is defined with the following parameters:
• Datum Type: This option button is used to choose which Datum
Type to attach to the projection. You define Datum types through The
Datum Type setup window (page 273).
• Other parameters depending on the kind of projection used (Lambert,
UTM, etc.).
For angular parameters (Central Meridian, Latitude origin, Reference
Latitude, North Latitude, South Latitude, Skew Angle) the format is:
dddmmss.ss
(Degrees, Minutes, Seconds with two decimal places).
Examples:
Latitude North 16° 4' 56.24" = 160456.24
South 16° 4' 56.24" = -160456.24
Longitude East 120° 1' 2.3" = 1200102.3
West 120° 1' 2.3" = -1200102.3
• Elevation referenced to (Geoidal Model/Local Ellipsoidal Model):
This option button allows you to choose the reference for the Surface
Elevation parameter which may appear in log files (APS, SPS, COG,
etc.):
- Geoidal Model: with this option, Surface Elevation is equal to
geoidal altitude + altitude correction
- Local Ellipsoidal Model: with this option, Surface Elevation is
equal to:
(geoidal altitude + geoidal separation) + altitude correction
Note The geoidal altitude and separation are extracted from

$GPGGA messages.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Setup menu
After entering all the parameters to define a Projection, you only need
to enter an identification number in the Nb field (allowable range 1 to
16), and click Add then Apply to save the Projection type.
To view the parameters of any Projection type, double-click on it in the
list box (at the foot of the Setup window). Then you can make any
changes needed and click Change, or Add, or Delete, as required. To
save your changes, click Apply.
Note You can define up to 16 Projection types.
Quality Warning setup window

Selecting “Source Quality Warning” from the “Setup” menu opens a
dialog box used to enter alert thresholds for source positions.
7
Figure 7-4
Click Apply to save and enable your changes.
COG Radius Threshold

(Allowable range: 1. to 99.9 m). Determines the allowable area for the
actual COG around the planned source position. Each planned source
position in the graphic display is represented by a (blue) tolerance circle
the size of which is proportional to the “COG Radius Threshold”
parameter.
The actual Centre Of Gravity of the source is computed from the GPS
positions contained in the status messages transmitted by the vibrators
making up the source.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Setup menu
VP Grabbing Radius
(Allowable range: 1. to 99.9 m). Used in Navigation mode to determine
the eligible VP, if stacking is used and the fleet has to move after each
sweep within the VP. This parameter determines a larger circle around
the source COG tolerance circle. When a vibrator fleet is located within
the VP grabbing circle and ready to shake, the system chooses the
matching VP from the list of VPs in the Operation main window. See
VE432 sweeps (page 241).
VP Grabbing
COG Radius Radius
threshold
Acq2
COG tolerance COG VP grabbing
circle circle
Acq1 Planned source

Centre Of Gravity
Figure 7-5
- For each acquisition, individual vibrator positions as well as the

fleet’s COG are displayed in the main window.
- The estimated COG of the VP is computed again at each
acquisition, using the actual COG of the acquisitions already
done and the predicted COG for the acquisitions still to be done.
- After the VP is completed, the information about the acquisition
is replaced by the actual COG of the VP.
Note With no stacking (i. e. a single acquisition per VP), the “VP
Grabbing Radius” should be set to be equal to the “COG Radius
Threshold”. Otherwise, if the COG falls outside the COG
Radius Threshold circle but within the VP Grabbing circle, the
operator will not be warned of the COG radial error when the
Ready message appears but only after the VP is done (the alert
threshold associated with the Ready message is determined by
the largest of the two circles).

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Setup menu
Vib Position Accuracy Threshold

(Allowable range: 0.0 to 99.9 m). This field is used to specify the
maximum allowable uncertainty on the GPS positions of the vibrators,
i.e. the maximum allowable value of the Horizontal Dilution Of
Precision contained in the status messages transmitted by the vibrators
making up the source. If the HDOP exceeds the Threshold specified in
this field, then the position is regarded as “inaccurate”.
About the vibrator position Quality Control

The quality of a vibrator's position is determined using the quality
figure contained in field No. 6 in the $GPGGA message from the GPS
receiver in the vibrator. The quality figure may assume values from 0 to
8. (See NMEA standard version 2.30).
The position is regarded as:
7
• “missing” for values 0, 6, 7, 8,
• “natural” (straight GPS) for 1,
• “actual” for values 2, 3, 4, 5.
The Horizontal Dilution Of Precision (HDOP) is taken from field No. 8
in the $GPGGA message.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Setup menu
The Vehicle Identity setup

To open this setup window, select Vehicle Ident from the Setup menu.
This setup allows you to specify which vehicles to track in the
Positioning window and, for each of them, specify the maximum
allowable speed.
Figure 7-6
Nb
(Allowable range: 1 to 50). Identity number of a vehicle, defined when
you configure the MRU for the vehicle. (See MRU User's Manual).
Name
Label you wish to assign to the vehicle identified in the Nb text box.
Max Speed
Determines the upper limit of the scale for colour-mapping the speed in
the vehicle’s trackline.
Tracking
For each vehicle in the list box this option button allows you to specify
whether or not the vehicle should be tracked in geographical views.
(Click in the field, then select the desired option from the button).
If you choose “True”, then MRU messages from that vehicle will be
interpreted. If you choose “False”, then the vehicle is not tracked, its

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Setup menu
MRU messages are rejected and no alarm is raised if that vehicle fails
to reply.
First Waypoint
Initialization value of the individual waypoint counter attached to each
vehicle tracked (by default: 1). This determines the waypoint number
that will be assigned to the first waypoint transmitted to any vehicle.
For a given vehicle, the waypoint number is incremented (up to 100)
each time a waypoint is transmitted to the vehicle. It is reset to the
current First Waypoint value in the event of overflow.
If you change the First Waypoint value, the new value will apply to
those vehicles which do not have any waypoint yet and those which
have a waypoint counter at 100. 7
To create a Vehicle Identity Setup
To define a new vehicle in the list box, fill in all the fields as required,
then click Add.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The geographical view

In this section:
• The layer manager (page 286)
• Background (page 287)
• GeoZones (page 289)
• Swath (page 290)
• Miscellaneous (page 292)
• Vehicles (page 293)
• Sources (page 293)
General
Layer manager
pane
Plot pane Right-click to
view object
properties
Graphical
Tools
Figure 7-7 Geographical view
That is the basic view in the Positioning client window, consisting of:
• a geographical view showing the planned source points and receiver
points imported from SPS files, the actual source points (calculated
COGs), service vehicles equipped with a tracking (MRU) box, the

December 4, 2006
Positioning
sources (Shooters and/or VE432 fleets) created in the Operation

window;
• a layer manager pane containing all the objects that can be viewed.
You can open as many geographical views as you like (using the View
menu). Each is independent and has its own layer manager.
Right-clicking on any object in or above the plot pane and selecting Get
Properties from the menu that pops up opens a secondary window
updated in real time, displaying the properties of the object.
Figure 7-8
7
Figure 7-9 Report document
• You can use the Export Selected or Export All button to export
some or all of those properties. This generates a report document and
opens a preview window that allows you to save, print or export the
document by choosing whichever output format you like (PDF, XLS,
HTML, TXT, etc.) from its File menu.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Graphical tools
Rectangular
spatial query
View All Panning
Zoom in
Undo zoom Zoom Circular spatial

Ruler
locker query
Figure 7-10 Graphical tools
• Zoom in: To zoom into an area in the plot pane, click on the Zoom
in button, position the mouse in one corner of the desired area, press
the left mouse button and hold it down, drag the mouse to the
opposite corner of the area (this causes a rubber-band box to appear)
and release the button. As a result, the region enclosed by the rubber-
band box is redrawn within the same view to occupy the entire plot
pane.
• Undo zoom: Reverts to the previous zoom factor.
• View All: Zooms out until all objects fit into the plot pane (in one
click).
• Zoom locker: Clicking on this button either locks or unlocks the
zoom-out factor, depending on whether it is already locked or
unlocked. With the zoom locker enabled, all zoom-out clicks will
take you back to the zoom factor you were using at the moment you
enabled it.
• Panning: Clicking the Panning button causes the mouse pointer to
change to a hand when resting in the plot pane. Then you can drag the
display in any direction with the mouse.
• Ruler: To read the distance from one point to another picked up in the
plot pane, click on the Ruler button, position the mouse on the first
point, press the left mouse button and hold it down, drag the mouse
to the other point. This draws a straight trackline in between. The
distance between the two points is displayed in a tip box on the first

December 4, 2006
Positioning
point picked up. The latest distance picked up as you release the
mouse button is displayed in the Distance field in the locator bar.
Tip box
Refreshed as you
release mouse button
Figure 7-11 Ruler
• Rectangular or circular spatial query: Draws a rectangle or circle

area over displayed objects. As a result, all visible objects enclosed
by the rectangle or circle are grabbed, and a secondary window
appears, showing the list of grabbed objects and their properties.
7
Objects in hidden layers, if any, enclosed by the rectangle or circle are
ignored.
Figure 7-12 Spatial query
- You can use the Export

Selected or Export All button
to export some or all of grabbed
objects. This opens a dialog box
that lets you choose which
properties to export. Figure 7-13
- Clicking Accept generates a report document and opens a

preview window (see Figure 7-9 on page 283) that allows you to
save, print or export the document by choosing whichever output

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
format you like (PDF, XLS, HTML, TXT, etc.) from its File
menu.
The layer manager

In the layer manager (left-hand) pane, the available drawing layers are
grouped into several folders that you can expand or collapse (Source
sets, Vehicles, Miscellaneous elements, Swath, Geographical Zones,
Background maps). If any layer is hidden, its name is dimmed. Each
layer has a specific popup menu, available by right clicking on it,
depending on which commands can be applied to that layer.
Layer manager
pane
Plot pane
Double-click to
expand/collapse folder
Double-click or
right-click to
show/hide layer
Figure 7-14 Layer manager
To show or hide any drawing layer, first expand the appropriate folder,
then double-click on the desired layer, or right-click on it and select the
appropriate command (Show Layer / Hide Layer) from the menu that
pops up.
The Rename Layer command lets you enter whatever name you like in
place of the default name.
The Layer Properties command allows you to view and modify the
image properties, for example to change the opacity of the background
or to enable or disable smoothing.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Delete Layer command lets you delete the layer from the layer
manager (e. g. to unload a background map), but this does not delete the
file from your computer’s disk. Not all layers can be deleted.
The arrangement in the layer manager pane determines the way the
layers are stacked (i. e. overprinted) in the plot pane, the bottom folder
being plotted on the background and the top folder on the foreground.
You can move any layer by dragging it up or down to change the
overprinting order. Naturally, you must be aware that a raster file (the
background map) will hide any layer placed below it.
Background
The Background folder is dedicated to background images.
7
Figure 7-15 Background map
The following file types are allowed:

• Geotiff: raster image with a geographical reference.
• DXF: vectorial data.
• Esri Shapefile: A shapefile stores non-topological geometry and
attribute information for the spatial features in a data set. The
geometry for a feature is stored as a shape comprising a set of vector
coordinates. Because shapefiles do not have the processing overhead
of a topological data structure, they have advantages over other data
sources such as faster drawing speed and edit ability. Shapefiles
handle single features that overlap or that are non-contiguous. They
also typically require less disk space and are easier to read and write.
Shapefiles can support point, line, and area features. Area features are
December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
represented as closed loop, double-digitized polygons. Attributes are

held in a dBASE® format file. Each attribute record has a one-to-one
relationship with the associated shape record.
• Simple Raster file (e. g. jpeg or gif or tif-format file): this type of file
has no geographical reference but the system lets you provide one as
you load such a file.
Right-clicking on any background layer and choosing Layer
Properties from the popup menu opens a dialog that allows you to
change the font and colour of labels if any, and adjust the following
image attributes.
Figure 7-16 Image properties
Opacity
This slider button controls how much of the background map will show
through.
Smoothing
The Optimal option applies appropriate smoothing for pixels not to be
visible, depending on the zoom factor. The Never option does not apply
any smoothing. The Always option achieves the best smoothing effect
but significantly increases the amount of CPU time consumed by your
Positioning window.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
GeoZones
You may wish to be alerted if any tracked vehicle (vibrator equipped
with a GPS receiver or other vehicle equipped with a tracking system)
leaves the work area, or gets into quicksands or a boggy or no-
trespassing area, etc. The system will take care of that, using the
inclusion and/or exclusion zones contained in the GeoZones folder to
determine the allowable perimeter.
Right-click
Click
7
Figure 7-17 Inclusion/Exclusion zones
After you select Create Exclusion Zone or Create Inclusion Zone

from the popup menu, the mouse pointer changes to an arrow. Then you
can draw a polygon in the plot pane by clicking at each vertex in turn
and closing the polygon with a last click at the first vertex. This adds a
new item into the GeoZone folder. Right-click on it in the GeoZone
folder to rename it as you like.
Create Exclusion Zone

Allows you to define the perimeter of an area that the crew’s vehicles
are not allowed to enter. That perimeter is automatically plotted in red.
Create Inclusion Zone

Allows you to define the perimeter of an area that the crew’s vehicles
are not allowed to leave. That perimeter is automatically plotted in
green.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Load from file

Allows you to load a DXF-format file depicting the desired perimeter.
Each file you load creates a new item in the GeoZone folder. Only
closed curves are interpreted:
• Red closed curves are interpreted as exclusion zones;
• All other closed curves are by default interpreted as inclusion zones.
Other shapes —if any— included in the file are ignored.
Swath
For each swath, a separate layer is automatically created in the Swath
folder, showing the source points and receiver points included in the
swath.
Figure 7-18 Swath layer
Source points
Each planned source position (from the Source SPS file) is represented
by a blue circle. The size of the circle is proportional to the “COG
Radius Threshold” specified through the “Setup” menu.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
Source COG
The COG position is represented by a solid
square inside the planned source position blue
circle if there is no radial error, or outside of
it if there is a radial error that is if the
deviation from the planned COG position
exceeds the “COG Radius Threshold”
specified through the Setup menu. Figure 7-19
The solid square denoting the COG may be:

• Green and inside the source blue circle if:
- this is the actual COG position (i.e all vibrator positions have
been received),
- and there is no radial error;
7
• Red and inside the source blue circle if:
- this is the actual COG position (i.e. all vib positions have been
received),
- and one or more vib position standard deviations exceed the
“Vib Position Accuracy Threshold” (specified in the Setup
menu). The COG is therefore regarded as inaccurate.
• Red and outside the source blue circle if:
- this is the actual COG position (i.e. all vib positions have been
received),
- but there is a radial error. In that case a warning box shows up,
displaying the radial error and the Source Point identification, so
that the operator can decide on whether to reposition the
vibrators and take the sweep again, or to continue.
• Blank (not shown) if no position is received from one or more
vibrators (in the event of a malfunction in the GPS receiver or in the
radio link; in that case, no COG is computed).

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Note If an “Impulsive” source is used instead of vibrators and the

blaster controller returns a position message ($GPGGA) to the
recording unit (e. g. with a SHOT PRO blaster) then the shot
point position is viewed.
Receiver Points
Each planned receiver position is represented as a yellow + mark.
Miscellaneous
The Misc folder in the layer manager pane contains the icons for the
recording unit and the base camp.
Drag and drop

to move icon
Recording
truck icon
Figure 7-20 Miscellaneous objects layer
By default, if the icon file includes a geographical reference, the icon is

displayed at its exact location in the geographical view, otherwise the
object appears only in the layer manager pane.
You can place the recording unit or base camp icon into the plot pane by
dragging and dropping it from the layer manager pane to the plot pane
(left-click on it in the layer manager while pressing the Ctrl key, then
move the mouse to the desired location in the plot pane and release the
mouse button). Likewise you can move the icon within the plot pane by
dragging and dropping it where you would like it to appear.
To place the recording unit or base camp icon at its exact location, right-
click on its folder in the layer manager pane, and select Edit
coordinates from the menu that pops up. This opens a dialog box that
allows you to show or hide the icon (by ticking/unticking the Visible
option), and enter its precise Easting and Northing.
December 4, 2006
Positioning
Figure 7-21
Alternatively, you can enter the precise coordinates of the recording unit
or base camp in the Log window (see Editing/saving/loading 428XL
parameters on page 410).
Vehicles
If a vehicle tracking system is attached to the server computer, the
Vehicles folder in the layer manager pane contains all the vehicles
equipped with a tracking box (MRU). You can monitor the position of 7
those vehicles in real time, show/hide their tracklines and also send
waypoints to them by simply dragging and dropping a vehicle’s icon to
the desired location.
See Vehicles on page 300 for details.
Sources
This folder contains all the sources created in the Operation window
that you can use to take shots or sweeps.
Vibroseismic Impulsive source

source shooter
Drag and drop to

launch sweep or shot
Figure 7-22 Source layer
A flag (for a vibroseismic source) or human figure (for an impulsive

source) icon associated with each source is available above the plot
pane.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
You can drag a source icon and drop it onto a planned shot point in the
plot pane to launch a shot just like a click on Go would do in the
Operation window. To do that, left-click on the source icon while
pressing the Ctrl key, then move the mouse to the desired planned shot
point and release the mouse button.
For example, this allows you to redo a sweep without lifting the vibrator
pads. Dragging and dropping the vibroseismic source simulates the
Ready signal sent by the fleet’s leader when all its vibrators have their
pads down. You must have clicked on Go at least once beforehand in
the Operation window. Also, the fleet’s vibrators are assumed
positioned at the shot point, with their pads down. Unless that is already
done, you also have to click on the fleet’s button in the VE432 main
window to let its Ready status be relayed to the acquisition system.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Tracking view
The Tracking view

In this section:
• Graphical tracking view (page 295)
• Numerical tracking view (page 298)
• More about the estimated COG position (page 298)
Graphical tracking view

In the source tracking view are all the details on the Vibrated Point:
positions of vibrators (crosshair), the planned active Vibrated Point, the
predicted COG (orange square, or green if the stacking fold is
achieved), and information about the current VP (Acquisition number/
stacking fold, Device number, Source Point Line, Source Point Number,
7
Source Point Index).
Enable/disable
updating
Choose fleet Planned

to view V1
COG V2
V3 Fleet
Figure 7-23
The button in the upper left corner allows you to freeze/unfreeze the
view. Preventing the view from being updated may be helpful if you
need time to examine details. Since you can open as many tracking
views as you like (using the View menu), you can enable updating in
another view and still track the active source.
In each view, you can use any of the fleet (flag) buttons available at the
top to choose whichever fleet you would like to be tracked in that view.
If you do not choose any fleet, then the active source is tracked.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Tracking view
The tracking view shows the progress of vibrator positions and source
positions updated as soon as the status messages are received from the
vibrators. The solid square denoting the COG is:
• Orange and inside the source blue circle if:
- this is an estimated COG position (i.e. some vib positions have
not yet been received),
- but the estimation does not lead to any radial error.
• Orange and outside the source blue circle if:
- this is an estimated COG position (some vib positions have not
yet been received),
- and the estimation leads to a radial error (e.g. a status message is
indicating that a vibrator failed to vibrate. Therefore the
estimated COG is computed without the position of this vibrator,
leading to a radial error).
Note that COG radial errors are reported in the form of messages in the
mail pane at the foot of the window.
Figure 7-24
Each planned vibrator position is represented as a + mark which

changes from orange (i.e. estimated) to green as the actual position is
received. It turns red if the positions standard deviation exceeds the
“Vib Position Accuracy Threshold” specified through the “Setup”
menu. It is not shown if any of the status codes of the following
malfunctions is encountered:
- no sweep
- no status report
- position message error

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Tracking view
- no GPS position samples

The vibrator positions used in the latest acquisition are annotated
with the vibrator numbers.
The vibrator positions of those previous source points which are OK
(green solid square) are not shown.
Until the status messages are received from all the vibrators making up
the source, the theoretical centre of gravity of the source is estimated
from the vibrator pattern of the previous source point and represented
by a solid orange square. See More about the estimated COG position
(page 298). When status messages are received, the COG is shown as
explained above for the geographical view.
In “Navigation” mode with a Stack Order more than 1:
- For each acquisition within a VP, individual vibrator positions as
7
well as the fleet’s COG are displayed.
- The estimated COG of the VP is computed again at each
acquisition, using the actual COG of the acquisitions already
done and the predicted COG for the acquisitions still to be done.
- After the VP is completed, the information about the acquisition
is replaced by the actual COG of the VP.
v
Note When you generate the RAW daily Observer Report, at the end
of the day, the SPS “Source” file in the database is
automatically updated with the actual source COG positions.
(You can use the Log main window to save the updated source
file to an archival medium).
The Elevation reported is the elevation value contained in the $GPGGA
messages from radiopositioning receivers (referenced to the geoidal
model).

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Tracking view
Numerical tracking view

You can monitor one or more vehicles in real time by right-clicking on
the vehicle and choosing Numerical Track on from the menu that pops
up. This opens a view pane that continually displays:
• The position of the vehicle (Line name and Receiver Point).
• The distance to the nearest line.
• The vehicle’s speed: the line is displayed in red if the vehicle is
motionless.
Figure 7-25
More about the estimated COG position
Prediction table
The planned source positions (represented by blue circles) are known at
the outset as they are contained in Source SPS files. On the contrary, the
vibrator pattern is not known until all the vib positions of the first
complete pattern have been received.
For example, if 2 acquisitions are taken with 4 vibrators then 8 status
messages will be received, containing 8 vib positions, which will be
used to compute the actual COG but also to set up a prediction table. An
example is shown below.
Acquisition
DSD Number
1 2
V1 dx11, dy11 dx12, dy12
V2 dx21, dy21 dx22, dy22
V3 dx31, dy31 dx32, dy32
V4 dx41, dy41 dx42, dy42

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Tracking view
The dx,dy values are horizontal and vertical offset distances between
each latest known vibrator position and the latest actual COG position
(green solid square).
V1.1
dx
Latest actual vib

position dy
Latest actual COG
Figure 7-26
Locating the estimated COG

From the prediction table the dx,dy pair corresponding to the first
vibrator which, in the current pattern, supplied its actual position (green
7
+ mark) is chosen to locate the estimated COG.
The estimated COG position (orange solid square) is obtained by
adding the selected dx,dy pair (from the prediction table) to the actual
easting and northing (respectively) received for this vibrator.
Then the remaining dx,dy pairs in the prediction table are used to locate
the estimated positions of the other vibrators with respect to the
estimated COG.
The estimated vib pattern is represented by orange + marks.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Vehicles
Vehicles
In this section:
• Supported vehicle tracking systems (page 301)
• Customizing tracked vehicles (page 303)
• Vehicle trackline and history file (page 304)
Overview
GPS
Tracking Positio
Way n+Alar
poin m
ts+S GPS
Recording station ervic
e me
(Lab) ssag
es
Ser
Tracking
vic
em
ess
age
s
GPS
Tracking
Tracking
Monitoring station
(Camp)
Figure 7-27
Any vehicle equipped with a SERCEL MRU or Racal type tracking unit
can send its position —computed by a radio-positioning receiver— and

December 4, 2006
Positioning
Vehicles
status to a base station, and receive waypoints and/or messages from the
base station. This requires that the base station be equipped with a
tracking box too. For reference information on the necessary
communications scheme, see the MRU or Racal User's Manual. See
also Supported vehicle tracking systems (page 301).
The base station can be the GUI computer in the recording truck
(referred to as “Lab”) or a monitoring station (referred to as “Camp”).
On the base station, whether it be a Lab or Camp station, the Positioning
client window must be open.
Periodically, each tracked vehicle reports its latest position and status to
the base station, which updates the position in the Positioning window’s
graphic pane.
Supported vehicle tracking systems

7
To track the position of your vibrators and service vehicles, you can use
SERCEL MRU boxes or an equivalent type of tracking box from
RACAL.
• MRU type: To configure an MRU as Vibrator or Service Vehicle, see
the MRU User’s Manual. The message supplied by an MRU includes
the position, the type of unit (Vibrator or Service vehicle) and the
alarm status if any.
• Racal type: By default a Racal-type tracking box is identified as
“Service vehicle”. To identify it as a Vibrator, a serial port must be
modified. The message supplied by a Racal tracking box includes the
position, the type of unit (Vibrator or Service vehicle) and the alarm
status if any, and the type of message encoded as follows
(1 character):
- “E”: Alarm (interpreted as “Vehicle + Alarm”).
- “F”: Interpreted as “Vibrator”.
- Other: Interpreted as “Vehicle”.
An option button in the Installation client window on the workstation
lets the user choose which type of tracking box to use.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Vehicles
The tracking box connects to the computer through a serial line (A- and/
or B-port of the computer).
Position
Port A Port A
Waypoint, Service message
Computer
Tracking box
Port B Service message Port B
or printer
Figure 7-28
A-port
The computer’s A-port:
• Receives the position and alarms from the vehicles.
• Sends waypoints and service messages to the vehicles.
• It is also used to send specific commands to the tracking box. For
example, with a Racal tracking box, changing the record unit position
sends the command $PASHS,POS (record unit position). A hardware
switch is required between the port of the computer and that of the
tracking box.
The computer’s A-port is configured as follows:
• With SERCEL (MRU) tracking boxes: 4800 Bauds, 8 data bits, 2
stops bits, no parity.
• With Racal-type tracking boxes: 9600 Bauds, 8 data bits, 2 stops bits,
no parity.
B-port
The computer’s B-port receives services messages exchanged by the
Lab and Camp computers.
It is configured as follows:
• With SERCEL (MRU) tracking boxes: 9600 bauds, 8 data bits, 2
stops bits, no parity.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
Vehicles
• With Racal-type tracking boxes: 4800 bauds, 8 data bits, 2 stops bits,
no parity.
Note If the A-port is used for another link, the B port can be used in
place of it for the messages to and from the tracked vehicles. In
that case, communications between Lab and Camp computers
cannot be handled by the tracking box.
Customizing tracked vehicles

Right-clicking on the Vehicles folder in the layer manager and selecting
Add Vehicle Group opens a secondary window that allows you to
create vehicle groups and customize the aspect of vehicles in each
group.
7
Fuel
(Name=”Fuel”)
Figure 7-29
Each time you add a new group, a subfolder is created in the layer
manager (hence a sublayer in the plot pane). As a result, you can apply
specific actions to the whole sublayer, for example:
- Rename the group;
- Send a request for specific attributes in order to find the
matching vehicles (using the name, or GPS identifier number or
any other attribute as search criterion);

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Vehicles
- Assign an icon of your own to the vehicles in the group, rather

than using the default icon.
Vehicle trackline and history file

The trackline of each vehicle and also the associated alerts are
automatically saved to an XML log file on the client computer’s disk (in
the Jpos/workspace/history directory) and sorted by julian day. That
file can be imported into any viewing tool accepting XML files.
Real-time display
Right-click on the vehicle’s subfolder in the layer manager pane and
select “Show trace route” from the menu that pops up.
The trackline is displayed as segments the colour of which depends on
the speed of the vehicle.
The speed is mapped with 10 different colours starting from green
(standing for the vehicle’s minimum speed) to red (standing for the
maximum allowable speed specified in the The Vehicle Identity setup on
page 280. A circle appears on the trackline if any alarm is raised.
Playback from history file

Selecting Load History from the File menu allows you to choose a
trackline history file and load it to the Backgrounds folder in the layer
manager pane. Then the trackline can be displayed like any real-time
trackline (with colour-mapped speed and circles on incidents) and
shown/hidden like any other background layer.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Alert system
The Alert system

You can set alert conditions on vehicles by using the setup menu or the
toolbar, or simply right-clicking on a vehicle.
You are notified of any incident in two ways:
• An audible warning plus a visual effect in the geographical view (an
expanding circle around the vehicle that caused the incident). The
colour of the expanding circle depends on the type of incident.
• A tip box popping up as you drag the mouse over any vehicle affected
by an incident.
To dismiss an incident on a vehicle, either double-click on the vehicle
or right-click on it and choose Reset Alert from the menu that pops up.
This may or may not let you get rid of the alert, depending on the type 7
of incident.
Incidents are saved together with the trackline (meaning that they will
be visible when you play back the trackline).
The following types of incidents are monitored:
• Emergency (page 305)
• GeoZone perimeter (page 306)
• Global alarms (page 307)
• Excess speed (page 309)
Emergency
The system continually checks for any Emergency alert from the MRU
system (an Emergency alarm is automatically raised if a vehicle’s driver
pushes the Emergency button on the MRU tracking box). This requires
that the Tracking option in the The Vehicle Identity setup (page 280) be
set at “True”.
An Emergency alarm immediately causes a dialog box to show up in the
Positioning window, with the position of the vehicle at the moment the
alarm was raised.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Alert system
Figure 7-30
• Clicking the Send Help button automatically sends a waypoint to the

nearest three vehicles to that position, allowing for rescue as quickly
as possible. (This also dismisses the alert window).
• If the vehicle does not need any help, simply click Reset Alarm when
you want to dismiss the alert window.
GeoZone perimeter
Inclusion/exclusion zones are created by drawing closed curves in
geographical views or loading DXF files depicting such zones (see
GeoZones on page 289). GeoZones are intended for vehicles equipped
with an MRU system, and for all vibrators (with or without an MRU).
A visual alarm is raised (an orange expanding circle around the position
of a vehicle), and a GeoZone perimeter incident is reported, if a vehicle
or vibrator:
- enters an exclusion area;
- leaves an inclusion area.
The visual alarm disappears when the vehicle gets back to the allowable
perimeter, or if you delete the inclusion/exclusion zones affected (or
you double-click on the vehicle).
An inclusion/exclusion zone is active (can give rise to incidents) even
if hidden.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Alert system
Global alarms
All vehicles and vibrators equipped with an MRU system and for which
the Tracking option in The Vehicle Identity setup (page 280) is set at
“True” can be checked for the following types of incidents: Emergency,
No Reply, No Move, Camp Distance, Lab distance.
The monitoring of all these incidents is optional, except for
“Emergency” alarms. On vibrators, “No move” incidents are ignored.
Clicking on this button in the toolbar opens a dialog box that
allows you to choose which incidents to monitor and adjust the
alert conditions.
Figure 7-31
In the event of an incident on a vehicle, a visual alarm is raised (an

orange expanding circle around the vehicle) and the incident is reported
in the log file. The visual alarm disappears when the situation goes back
to normal (or if you dismiss it by double-clicking on the vehicle).
The type of unit (metres, feet, etc.) for the Distance and Radius fields
is determined in the The Projection Type setup window (page 275).
No reply
Alerts you if the position of a vehicle fails to be refreshed within the
time (seconds) you specify in the Delay field, for instance if no position
message is received from the vehicle.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Alert system
No move
Alerts you if a vehicle remains at a standstill (i. e. the position is
refreshed but remains within the circle determined by the associated
Distance field) for the time you specify in the Delay field (seconds).
Because of the so-called “noise” on the position, especially with
“straight GPS”, two successive positions from a vehicle can be different
even though the vehicle doesn’t move. The system will only assume the
vehicle is moving if the distance between two successive positions
exceeds the distance (metres) you specify in the Distance field.
Camp Distance
Alerts you if the distance from a vehicle to the “Camp” location exceeds
the distance (metres) you specify in the associated Radius field (i. e. the
position of the vehicle doesn’t fall within the circle determined by that
radius around the Camp location).
Lab Distance
Alerts you if the distance from a vehicle to the “Lab” (recording unit)
location exceeds the distance (metres) you specify in the associated
Radius field (i. e. the position of the vehicle doesn’t fall within the
circle determined by that radius around the “Lab” location).

December 4, 2006
Positioning
The Alert system
Excess speed
All vehicles equipped with an MRU system and for which the Tracking
option in The Vehicle Identity setup (page 280) is set at “True” can be
checked for speed excess.
Right-clicking on any of those vehicles opens a dialog box that allows
you to set the speed alert conditions for that vehicle. Therefore, you can
set individual speed alert conditions on each vehicle.
7
Figure 7-32
For each vehicle monitored, the speed is computed as the ratio of the
difference between the last two positions received to the difference
between the times when they are received.
In the event of an “Excess speed” incident on a vehicle, a visual alarm
is raised (an orange expanding circle around the vehicle) and the
incident is reported in the log file. The visual alarm disappears when the
situation goes back to normal (or if you dismiss it by double-clicking on
the vehicle). On vibrators, “Excess speed” incidents are ignored.
Max Speed
Tick this option if you want the vehicle to be checked for excess speed.
Untick to disable monitoring.
Delay
Use this field to specify the desired time interval (seconds) between two
speed tests on this vehicle.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
The Alert system
Speed
Use this field to specify the desired speed limit for this vehicle,
expressed in km/hr or miles per hour, depending on the type of unit
selected (see The Projection Type setup window on page 275).
Additional Effects
Use the options if you want excess speed incidents to open a dialog box
and/or generate an audible warning for this vehicle.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
Working with the GIS

In this section:
• Object labelling (page 311)
• Attribute colour maps (page 312)
• Query builder (page 314)
Object labelling
Each object appearing in a geographical view
can be annotated with a tag reporting
whichever of its attributes you choose. Those
tags are updated in real time, and do not
overprint one another. The more you zoom
7
in, the more tags are visible.
To create a tag and show or hide it, right-click
on the desired folder in the layer manager
pane (Source Point, Source Receiver, COG, Figure 7-33
or Vehicles) and choose Label Properties

from the menu that pops up.
In the example below, vehicles have a label displaying the name and
speed.
Figure 7-34

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Attribute colour maps

A Classifier tool is available for the items contained in the Swath layer
(Source Point, Source Receiver, COG).
This allows you to create classes for the different values of an object’s
attribute and have them colour-mapped in a geographical view. You can
choose the number of classes to create and which colours to use for the
colour mapping.
For example, assuming you want to have a colour-map view of the
source average distortion (an attribute available on COGs), then:
1. Right-click on the COG folder in the layer manager pane and
choose Classifier from the menu that pops up. This opens the
Classifier control window.
Figure 7-35
2. From the Feature Property Names option button, choose the

attribute to plot (Average Distortion).
3. From the Bins option button, choose the number of classes to
create.
4. Click on the Start button and select the desired colour for the
lowest value class.
5. Click on the End button and select the desired colour for the
highest value class.
6. Click on Preview to view the result in a Histogram window.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
Figure 7-36
7. Click on Apply. As a result, the average distortion is colour-

mapped in the COG layer in the geographical view.
7
Colour-mapped average
distortion in COG layer
Figure 7-37
To remove the colour map effect and go back to the default colour
encoding in the geographical view, right-click on the appropriate folder
in the layer manager and select “Reset Queries and Classification”
from the menu that pops up.

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Query builder
A Query Builder tool is available for the items contained in the Swath
layer (Source Point, Source Receiver, COG).
The Query Builder allows you to build any kind of query on displayed
objects on any attributes of an object, with logical operators (Or, And,
Not, etc.), and generate professional reports in PDF, HTML, XCELL
files, etc.
For example, assuming you want to get the list of COGs with an average
distortion greater than 16, then:
1. Right-click on the COG folder in the layer manager pane and
choose Build feature query from the menu that pops up. This
opens the query builder window for COGs.
Save and load back your

queries as you like.
The items matching your query can

be displayed in a geographical view.
Figure 7-38
2. Select the desired attribute from the Property Name list box.

December 4, 2006
Positioning
3. Choose the desired operator.

4. Choose the desired value from the Values list box.
5. Click on Add To Query.
6. If you want to preview the items matching your query in a
geographical view, click on the Create Selection button.
7. Clicking on the Generate Report button opens a secondary
window that lets you choose which attributes to export. Unless
you want to include all, untick those you want to discard by
clicking in the associated Export Enabled button.
7
Figure 7-39
8. Clicking Accept generates a report document and opens a preview

window (see Figure 7-9 on page 283) that allows you to save, print
or export the document by choosing whichever output format you
like (PDF, XLS, HTML, TXT, etc.) from its File menu.
Figure 7-40

December 4, 2006
7 Positioning
Basic Geodesy Glossary
Basic Geodesy Glossary

• Datum: Datum results from taking an ellipsoid and moving its centre
so the ellipsoid matches the geoid very closely in your area of
interest. For example, in Europe, the International ellipsoid is shifted
to fit and called ED50 (European Datum 1950).
For the same location, your latitude and longitude are different on
different Datums. Since your GPS receivers normally output on
WGS84 you need to convert the WGS84 latitude/longitude to a
latitude /longitude on whatever Datum you are surveying on. This is
done by on-line Datum transformation routines in SERCEL software.
This is why you are required to select the appropriate Datum. See The
Projection Type setup window (page 275).
• Ellipsoid: An ellipse which has been rotated about an axis (example:
WGS84). The shape of the ellipsoid is chosen to match the geoidal
surface as closely as possible.
• Geoid: An equipotential surface (meaning that the pull of gravity is
equal everywhere along the surface), approximately corresponding to
the Mean Sea Level. A plumb bob always points perpendicular to the
geoid, not to centre of the earth.
• Projection: A projection is a representation of a 3 dimensional plane.
In order to make a section of the ellipsoid into a flat surface, you have
to stretch some parts of the surface and compress other parts. The
amount of compressing/stretching is known as “scale factor”.
The distance you measure in the real world is usually not equal to the
distance measured on the projection.

December 4, 2006
Chapter
8 Export
This chapter describes the Export client window. It includes

the following sections:

• Export activity log views (page 319)
• File export controls (page 323)
• The Tape Setup menu (page 328)
• The Functions menu (page 330)
• Copying exported files (page 339)
• Working with tape drives (page 340)

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The main window
The main window

To open the Export main window, click on this icon in the
launcher bar.
The 428XL automatically saves its shot files to an SEGD repository on
its server computer’s disk. The Export main window is dedicated to the
process of exporting them from the SEGD repository to your archiving
media (disks and/or tape drives). Each file is not deleted from the SEGD
repository until its has been exported successfully. The activity of each
type of medium is logged in a separate view (Tape, NFS, FTP).
Figure 8-1
The View menu allows you to open a separate view for each type of
export target (Tape, NFS server, FTP server), showing a table in which
the activity of the export process is logged. For details on how you can
arrange the views and toolbars as you would like them, see the Hands-
on guide (page 44). You can move and resize columns in tables by right-
clicking in any column heading and selecting Customize (see Figure 2-
24).
In the toolbar are indicators showing the status of each device to which
the shot files can be exported. See Export device indicators (page 323).
The Functions menu is used for local controls of tape drives, mounting/
unmounting NFS disks, making an FTP connection, and for playback.
See The Functions menu (page 330).

December 4, 2006
Export
Export activity log views

The View menu allows you to open a separate view for each type of
export target (Tape, NFS server, FTP server), showing a table in which
the activity of the export process is logged.
8
Figure 8-2 NFS export log view
Figure 8-3 FTP export log view
Figure 8-4 Tape export log view
Swath Id
Identification number of the swath (parameter from the Operation
window). Depending on your Backup Settings (page 79) in the
December 4, 2006
8 Export
Configuration window, a subdirectory can be created for each swath in

the SEGD file repository used for temporary storage.
Device Id
Identification number assigned by the Export process to the export
target.
Julian Day
(NFS and FTP export reports only). Depending on your Backup Settings
(page 79) in the Configuration window, a subdirectory can be created
for each Julian Day in the SEGD file repository used for temporary
storage.
File #
Identification number of each SEGD file written to the removable disk,
or FTP server, or tape. This field can also display the number of a file
you are playing back.
Tape #
(Tape drive and NFS export reports only). Identification number of the
tape currently used, automatically incremented on writing the first file
after the “File Count” is reset to 0. If you are exporting to NFS disks,
the Tape number is still updated so that files can easily be copied to a
tape at a later date.
If two tape drives or two NFS disks are used simultaneously, two report
rows (one for each export target) are displayed for each SEGD file.
File Count
(Tape drive and NFS export reports only). Number of SEGD files
written to or read from the current tape. This number is automatically
reset to 0 when a double EOF is recorded to a tape (manually or when
the “File Count” matches your “Files per Tape” setting) or when a blank
cartridge is loaded. See The Tape Setup menu (page 328).

December 4, 2006
Export
Device Name
(NFS and FTP export reports only). Automatically determined by the
system. If you are using NFS disks, that is the disk identification
number entered by the user when configuring the NFS disk. See 428XL
Installation Manual.
Server Name
(NFS and FTP export reports only). IP address of the NFS disk or FTP
server machine, entered using the The Functions menu (page 330).
Remote Folder
(NFS and FTP export reports only). Directory to which SEGD files are
exported, on the FTP server or NFS disks, entered using the The
Functions menu (page 330).
8
File Name
(NFS and FTP export reports only). Automatically created by the
system with the “File number” and “segd” as extension.
Time
Time of writing to the removable disk, or FTP server, or tape.
Error
Indicates whether or not the SEGD file was recorded successfully.
Error Text
If an error occurred when recording the SEGD file, this field contains
the error message generated by export target.
SCSI address
(Tape Drive reports only). SCSI address entered by the user on the tape
drive.

December 4, 2006
8 Export
Tape Label
(Tape Drive reports only). From The Tape Setup menu (page 328).
Files per Tape

Write Retries
(Tape Drive reports only). Number of attempts to write the specified
file.
Trace Blocking

December 4, 2006
Export
File export controls

In this section:
• Export device indicators (page 323)
• Auto/Manual (page 325)
Export device indicators

In the Install window, you can choose to record your SEGD files to
cartridges and/or export them in real time to one or two disks
simultaneously, or to an FTP server on the local network. See Export
mode (page 65).
In the Export window’s toolbar, an indicator is associated with each
export device you enabled in the Install window. With the mouse
pointer resting on the indicator, a tip box pops up that shows the status
of the export device. Also, the status is shown by the colour of the
8
indicator light (red/orange/green), as explained in detail below.
Export device
indicators Status tip box
Figure 8-5
Tape drives
Up to 4 tape drives (identified as Device numbers 0 to 6) can be attached
to the SCSI bus. As soon as a tape drive is connected on the bus and
powered up, an indicator light appears in the toolbar in the main
window, displaying its Device number (that is the SCSI address
assigned to the tape drive by the user or the Operating System). The
indicator light is:
• Not shown: if the tape drive is not connected or not powered up;
• Red: if the tape drive is connected and powered up, but no cartridge
is inserted. The indicator turns red when the cartridge is ejected:

December 4, 2006
8 Export
- manually by the operator,

- or automatically when the number of files on the cartridge (“File
Count” field in the Tape view) matches your Files per Tape
(page 328) setting.
• Orange: if the tape drive is connected and powered up, with a
cartridge inserted (the tape is at the BOT);
• Green: if the tape drive is connected and powered up, with a cartridge
inserted and currently used for recording.
If two or more tape drives are attached to the system and you want to
know which is associated to each Tape indicator (because you do not
know which SCSI address is assigned to each drive), insert a cartridge
into one drive and look at the indicators to see which drive has a
cartridge inserted (or move the mouse pointer to each Tape indicator to
display the status popup).
FTP server and NFS disks

In the main window’s toolbar, an indicator light is associated with each
NFS disk and with the FTP server, if you have selected these options in
the Install window. The colour of the indicator should be interpreted as
follows:
• Red: device unmounted or not mounted (NFS connection) or not
accessible (FTP connection). The indicator turns red if the removable
disk is unmounted or the FTP connection is closed:
- manually by the operator,
- or automatically, because of a problem on the network.
• Orange: device mounted (NFS connection) or accessible (FTP
connection).
• Green: device mounted (NFS connection) or accessible (FTP
connection), and writing to that device is in progress or enabled.
The disks (NFS devices) are removable but cannot be unmounted while
a file is being written.

December 4, 2006
Export
Auto/Manual
Click to enable
exports
Figure 8-6
The system takes shots regardless of the status of any tape drive or other
export target, unless and until the SEGD repository disk space is
running out. 8
Choosing Manual enables the local control functions and causes the
system to stop exporting data (but data acquisition can continue so long
as the SEGD repository disk space is not running out).
For example, you have to go to “Manual” if you want to change the
working mode option (Data/Bypass), or to unload a tape, or to replace
an NFS disk.
Choosing Auto opens a secondary window that allows you to enable
file exports.
Disk#1
Disk#2
Figure 8-7

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The available export devices are prompted in the “Devices List” box.
• A removable disk is ready if it is “mounted”.
• An FTP server is ready if connection to it is successful.
• A tape drive is available if:
- its cartridge is blank;
- its cartridge is not blank but the tape is positioned at the end of
the last record. To go to the end of the last record, choose
Manual and use the Playback function (Last Record).
To enable file exports, you simply have to choose “Data” as working
mode, choose (click on) the device you want to export to (in the list
box), and then click on “Go”. To select two devices in the list box, press
and hold down the CTRL key while clicking.
Data/Bypass
Choosing “Data” enables the normal export function. This is the option
to use for production.
Choosing “Bypass” enables the data to be dumped to the plotter (and
the eSQC-Pro server if any) without recording to tape or exporting. The
system asks you if you really want to go to “Bypass”. To change the
dump directory, you have to go to “Data”.
With the Bypass option, all activity log views remain blank.
Simult
If two or more tape drives are attached to the system and you choose the
“Simultaneous” option, then the seismic data is recorded on two drives
concurrently (the first two reported “ready”, i. e. visible to the system
and with a cartridge inserted).
Go button
Clicking “Go” inhibits the local control functions and enables the
Export process to copy files from the SEGD repository to the export

December 4, 2006
Export
targets (tape drives, removable disks or FTP server) you have selected
from the “Devices List” box. If any SEGD file is available, after the
required devices are successfully selected, then it is copied to those
export targets. As a result the indicator of each export target selected
turns green and remains green so long as a file is being written to it.
In the event of an error in the export process, the system automatically
goes to “Manual” and an error message appears in the “Status Mail”
view. The file that was being recorded when the error arose is not
deleted from the SEGD repository.
If any of the export targets you select fails to be accessed, a message
(“Waiting for device ready”) shows up in the “Status Mail” view,
telling you which device gave rise to the error. The data cannot be
exported to any device.
If a cartridge is write-protected, or closed by a double EOF, it cannot be
selected. If any tape drive is required but cannot be selected, one of the
following messages may show up in the “Status” view:
8
- “Waiting for device ready” (if no cartridge is inserted).
- or “Device # not at end of last record” (if a non-blank cartridge
is inserted).

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The Tape Setup menu
The Tape Setup menu

To enable recording to a tape, you must choose the “Tape Drive” option
as “Export Mode” in the Install window.
Selecting Tape Setup from the Setup menu opens a secondary window
with the following parameters:
Figure 8-8
Tape Nb
(Allowable range: 0 to 9999).
Allows you to specify a reel tape number to be recorded in the header
block of the next records. It is automatically incremented after the Burst
is written on a tape. This parameter is still used (updated and recorded)
if you are exporting to NFS disks rather than tape drives. This makes it
easier to copy the files to a tape at a later date.
Tape Label
(16 ASCII characters max.). Used to enter a user-friendly name for the
reel tape #.
Files per Tape

(Allowable range: 1 to 9999). Allows you to specify the maximum
number of records that may be written to a tape. This parameter is still
used if you are exporting to NFS disks rather than tape drives (it is used
to update the Tape Number).

December 4, 2006
Export
The Tape Setup menu
Trace Blocking
This option is not available unless you choose the “Advanced” option.
To improve the system cycle time when recording to a tape drive, you
can shorten the record time by activating the Trace Blocking option.
With that option enabled, several traces are grouped to form a single
block limited to the size you choose with the associated option button.
Unless you choose the trace blocking option, the system will record
traces to tape as individual blocks separated by a gap.
When you play back any record on the 428XL, the system automatically
chooses the appropriate option.

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The Functions menu
The Functions menu

In this section:
• NFS disk (page 330)
• FTP server (page 331)
• Tape (page 332)
• Get Device Info (page 334)
• Playback (page 334) Figure 8-9
• Copy (page 337)
• Reinit Export (page 338)
NFS disk
This setup window allows you to specify the IP address of each external
disk attached to the system, and the directory to which to save your
SEGD files.
Figure 8-10
After connecting an external disk, you have enter the IP address of that
disk on the local network, enter the directory path to which to save your
SEGD files on that disk, and then click on the Mount button.
The following IP addresses are allowed:
• 172.27.128.41
• 172.27.128.42
• 172.27.128.43
• 172.27.128.44

December 4, 2006
Export
The Functions menu
The Mount (Unmount) button attaches (detaches) the specified remote

directory to (from) the file hierarchy of the server computer at a mount
point automatically determined by the system.
Note Prior to removing a disk, click on the associated Unmount
button. Disks cannot be unmounted while a file is being written.
Observer NAS
server
428XL server 172.27.128.41

GUI
172.27.128.1
172.27.128.2
Figure 8-11
FTP server
To export your SEGD files to an FTP server attached to the local
8
network, you must choose the “FTP Server” option as “Export Mode”
in the Install window.
Selecting FTP from the Functions menu opens a secondary window
with the following parameters:
Figure 8-12
• In the Login and Password fields, enter the log-in name and
password (the user account) that the FTP user will use to connect to
the FTP server. By default, the user account is userftp (with userftp
as Password). This assumes that the same user account is created on
the FTP server machine.
• In the Address field, specify an IP address (172.27.128.xx) for the
machine on which FTP server software (e. g. FileZilla supplied on the

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The Functions menu
SERCEL CD-ROM) is installed. For example, you can use

172.27.128.99.
• In the Remote directory field, enter the name of the directory to
which the records will be saved on the FTP server machine.
Observer
FTP user
428XL server
GUI FileZilla
172.27.128.1
172.27.128.2 172.27.128.99
Figure 8-13
Tape
Selecting Tape from the Functions menu opens a secondary window
with a list box prompting the tape drives that are ready (i. e. visible to
the system, with a cartridge inserted). After choosing a tape drive (by
clicking on it in the list box), you can use the commands available from
the option button. (Click on Go to launch the command).
Tape#1
Tape#2
Figure 8-14
EOF
This function causes a second End of File to be written after the latest
one. (An EOF is automatically written at the end of each record). The
second EOF is usually interpreted as the end of the tape. This resets the
“File Count” to 0.

December 4, 2006
Export
The Functions menu
Note Two EOF’s in succession are automatically recorded when the

end of tape is sensed in the course of a record or when the file
count reaches the “Files per Tape” count. If simultaneous
recording on two tape drives is selected (see Auto functions
menu) then a double EOF is written on both tape drives.
Release
Tape drives are normally locked by the 428XL application, meaning
that they are not available to any other application. The Release
command allows you to choose a tape drive and release it so that it can
be used by another application, e. g. if you want to use the Copy Media
utility (See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3).
When you want to use the tape drive again, choose Reinit Export from
the Commands menu.
8
Rewind
Sends a Rewind command to one or more tape drives.
Unload
Sends an Unload command to one or more tape drives.
EOM
(End Of Media). Used to go to the last filemark.

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The Functions menu
Get Device Info
Figure 8-15
This function is used to display detailed status information about the

available recording media.
Simply click in the list box to select the device to view and then click
Go.
Figure 8-16
Playback
Selecting Playback from the Functions menu opens a dialog box that
allows you to read an SEGD file from the record device you choose in
the “Source Devices” list box (prompting the list of devices reported
ready), and view it on the plotter or the QC tool, or both, depending on
what you choose with the “Target Devices” buttons.

December 4, 2006
Export
The Functions menu
Playback from an NFS disk
Figure 8-17
1. If any NFS disk is “mounted”, it appears in the list box. Choose

the device from which to read by clicking on it in the list box.
2. Use the Browse button to open the folder containing the file you
want to read and select it.
3. Click Go.
The record number of the file you are reading is displayed in the NFS 8
activity log view.
Playback from a tape drive

1. If you are using a tape drive, it appears in the list box if it is visible
to the system and a cartridge is inserted in it. Click in the list box
to choose the tape drive from which to read.
Tape#1
Tape#2
Figure 8-18
2. Choose a read option from option button:

- Last Record: used for a playback of the preceding record. The
tape will be wound back then forward so as to find a header with

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The Functions menu
a Record Number matching the Record Number of the latest file

recorded. Playback will start as soon as the expected header is
encountered. You can also use this function to position the tape
at the end of the latest record.
- Next Record: used for a playback of the next record. Whatever
the position of the tape, the tape drive will perform a forward
search for the next record header and start the playback as soon
as a header is encountered.
- Forward: the record to be played back is assumed to be located
AFTER the current position on the tape. You have to specify the
desired record number in the “Sequential File Nb” field. The
tape drive will perform a forward search for the header of the
specified record. When the header is encountered, the tape drive
will wind back the tape into the gap preceding the header and
restart forward, to read the header again, and perform playback.
- Backward: the record to be played back is assumed to be located
AHEAD OF the current position on the tape. You have to specify
the desired record number in the “Sequential File Nb” field. The
recorder will perform a backward search for the header of the
specified record, then, when the header is encountered, perform
playback.
- Sequential File Nb: if you want to use the Forward or
Backward read option, use this field to specify which file to
read from the tape.
Note The header cannot be read backward. Instead, on each EOF

encountered during the backward search, the next header is read
forward, and the backward search continues until the desired
header is encountered.
3. Click OK.
The record number of the file you are reading is displayed in the Tape
activity log view.

December 4, 2006
Export
The Functions menu
Copy
The Copy function allows you to copy an SEGD file from a disk (not
from the SEGD repository) to another disk or to a tape drive. This
function is dimmed and not available unless and until you go to
Manual.
If any NFS disk is “mounted” and/or any tape is loaded, it appears in the
“Available Devices” list box.
1. Choose the device from which to read by clicking on it in the
Available Devices list box, and then move it to the Source list
box by clicking on the right pointing arrow button under that list
box.
2. Likewise, select the device to which to write and then move it to
the Target list box.
8
Disk2
Use arrow button
to move
Figure 8-19
3. Use the Browse button to open the folder containing the file you
want to copy and select it.
4. Click Go.
The record number of the file you are reading is displayed in the
relevant activity log view.

December 4, 2006
8 Export
The Functions menu
Reinit Export
In the event of a problem on the SCSI bus or on the network, you can
enable exports again by using Reinit Export, rather than doing “Off
Line/On Line” in the Config window.
If you power up a tape drive after booting up the server computer, or in
the event of fatal error on the SCSI bus, use this command to reset the
SCSI bus.
Also, you have to use Reinit Export when you want to enable exports
to a tape drive again after it has been released for another application
(see Release on page 333).
If you are using an FTP server, you can use Reinit Export to see if the
system successfully connects to it.

December 4, 2006
Export
Copying exported files
Copying exported files

NAS disk
So long as the disk is attached to the local network, you can copy your
SEGD files to a tape by going to OFF Line in the Config window and
then using the CopyMedia utility (see 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3), or
using the Copy (page 337) function menu.
After the NAS system is removed, you can connect it to an Ethernet port
on a UNIX workstation and mount the exported (/mnt/raid) directory
at the workstation’s mount point, using the command:
mount <Host name or IP address>: /mnt/raid /<mount point>.
To copy your SEGD files from the NAS system to a tape, you can also
use the Copy+ software tool available from SERCEL on a personal
computer equipped with an SCSI port. After connecting the NAS
system to the Ethernet port of the PC, you have to specify its IP address 8
(e. g. 172.27.128.41) by doing the following:
• On a PC running on Linux, type the following command in a
Terminal window:
mount -t nfs 172.27.128.41:/mnt/raid /export/home/intellique1
• On a PC running on WindowsTM, choose Map Network Drive from
the Tools menu in the Windows Explorer and then specify the IP
address of the NAS disk.

December 4, 2006
8 Export
Working with tape drives
Working with tape drives

Cartridge insertion
If cartridge insertion fails on a 3490E (MPTAPE Cypress, ECHO,
XCERTA) drive, do the following:
• Go to OFF mode, using the buttons on the tape drive.
• Insert the new tape.
• Wait a little while (until all processes on the tape drive are
completed), then go back to ON mode.
End of tape detection

On a 3490E (MPTAPE Cypress, ECHO, XCERTA) drive, if the
observer attempts to record more than the tape nominal capacity, the
drive fails to diagnose properly the end of tape. No error is issued, thus
allowing record to continue but files are unreadable.
The “Files per Tape” must always be computed in accordance with tape
capacity to avoid this situation.

December 4, 2006
Chapter
9 VE432

• The Vibrator Crew setup (page 343)
• The Basic Type setup (page 346)
• The Acquisition Type setup (page 362)
• The Radio Management setup (page 365)
• The QC Limit setup (page 368)
• The QC Choice setup (page 369)
• The T0 Time setup (page 370)
• Functions (page 372)
• Normal acquisition (page 391)
• Statistics views (page 398)
• HFVS (page 400)

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
The main window
The main window

To open the VE432 main window, click on this icon in the
launcher bar.
This main window serves as the Graphic User Interface for a VE432
vibrator controller (VE432 DPG). For an introduction to the VE432
system and details on what it is able to do, how it works, how to deploy
it, see the VE432 Installation and Reference manual.
Setup toolbar
Function toolbar
Click to show
view
Click to close view
Figure 9-1
The View menu and the associated toolbar allow you to customize the
main window by choosing one or more views to display. Then you can
resize your display panes by dragging the desired border.
You can show or hide columns in tables by right-clicking in any column
The Setups menu and the associated toolbar allow you to customize
sweep signals, set parameters for vibrator fleets and adjust QC
parameters.
The Functions menu and the associated toolbar provide local controls
to be used outside of seismic acquisition periods to adjust the
parameters of vibrator DSDs.

December 4, 2006
VE432
The Vibrator Crew setup
Figure 9-2
The Vibrator Crew setup dialog box allows you to define a seismic crew
by specifying the identification number of the vibrators that can be used
in that crew, that is the list of vibrator electronics seen by the GUI, and 9
how many vibrator fleets will be available.
To save the crew defined in the list box, click Apply. This updates the
status bar under the function buttons in the main window: an indicator
appears for each DSD incorporated in the crew, associated with the
identification number of the vibrator (e. g. V1, V2, etc.). The indicator
is blank until you run the Look and Set DSD or Fleet functions.
Clicking Apply also clears all the vibrators lists in the dialog boxes that
will open when you click some of the function buttons (Set DSD, Get
DSD, etc.)
As a result, you have to run the Look function to update the vibrators
lists.
Clicking Reset instead of Apply reverts to the former settings.
Crew Nb
This field is used to enter the crew identification number (1 to 4).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
A “DPG” can address only one crew. The crew identification number is
used to preclude any interference with other crews working nearby.
Fleets
Buttons used to specify the fleets (i. e. sources) to be used in the crew.
For example, activating buttons 1 and 3 will cause two fleets to be
available: fleets 1 and 3.
(To specify the vibrators incorporated in each fleet, see Vibrator Fleet
(page 375).
Type
For each item in the list, this option button allows you to choose the type
of controller: either a DSD or a Slave DPG.
Using a Master/Slave configuration makes it possible to record more
traces without increasing the number of vibrators or to use two
recording systems at two distinct places. The DPG in the Slave
recording truck needs to be configured with DPG-Slave software. As a
result it is seen as a DSD from the Master DPG. The Slave DPG
generates a reference pilot signal synchronous with the Time Break. It
does not control any DSD.
For more details, see The VE432 DPG Installation & Reference
Manual.
Id
This field is used to specify the identification number (1 to 28) of each
vibrator (i. e. DSD) available to the crew. After specifying any vibrator
number in this field, click the Add button to enter it into the list box.
DSD Network
This button is used to specify whether a “DSD network” is implemented
and used. If that is the case, each DSD should be equipped with an
Ethernet Adapter that makes it possible to implement an Ethernet radio
link between the DSDs. As a result, when the DSDs in the fleet are

December 4, 2006
VE432
ready for the next sweep, the fleet's leader sends a “Ready” message to
the DPG, containing the geographical position of the Centre Of Gravity
of the fleet. The COG is viewed in the Positioning main window.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
The Basic Type setup

In this section:
• Linear (page 348)
• dB/Hz Log, Tn and dB/Octave Log (page 349)
• Pulse (page 354)
• Random (page 355)
• Custom (page 356)
• Compound (page 359)
• Delay (page 360)
• Deboost option (page 360)
• Generating a Basic Type setup (page 361)
Overview
To open the Basic Type setup window, select “Basic Type” from
the Setups menu. Creating a “Basic Type” is the process of
describing a basic signal to be used:
- by the DSDs to generate sweeps for the vibroseismic source
(vibrator control signal),
- and/or by the DPG to generate up to four “Pilots” to be used as
reference signals for the correlation processors.
You can create up to 32 different Basic Types, which can be combined
using the Compound option.
Below are the allowable ranges for the entry fields that may appear in
the Basic Type setup window.
Start Taper 0 to 32000 ms.
End Taper 0 to 32000 ms.

December 4, 2006
VE432
The start and end tapers are used to reduce the side lobes appearing in
the correlation function of the sine wave or pulse. (The ratio of the peak
amplitude to the side lobes is a measure of the quality of the correlation
function).
Initial Phase -180° to +180°.
Amplitude 0 to 100%.
Length 1 to 64 s (only for Random, Custom and Delay type
signals).
Ti 2 to 16 values from 0 to 64 s (T1 must be 0).
Tj 2 to 16 values from 0 to 64 s (T1 must be 0).
Ai 2 to 16 values from -40.00 to +40.00 dB.
Aj 2 to 16 values from 0 to 100%.
Fi 2 to 16 values from 1 to 250 Hz in increasing order
of frequency.
Frequency 1 to 250 Hz (only for Pulse type). 9
Each basic signal type can be composed of up to 16 segments (32 for
the “dB/Hz Log” and “dB/Octave Log” basic signals).
For details on each basic signal, see below.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Linear
You define a Linear-type signal through an analytic description. At the
signal start and end times, and possibly at particular times in between,
you have to specify:
• the signal frequency (Hz),
• the signal amplitude (% of requested drive level).
Frequency Signal
lines amplitude
Figure 9-3
The Frequency variation vs. time is linear within each frequency

segment. Frequency segments are defined as follows:
• The first Ti,Fi pair (T1,F1) specifies the initial frequency hence:
T1 = 0 sec., F1 = initial frequency.
• The second Ti,Fi pair specifies the end time of the first segment (T2)
and the signal frequency at this time is F2, etc.
You must define at least two Ti,Fi pairs (i.e. one frequency segment).
Amplitude segments are defined as follows:
• The first Tj,Aj pair (T1,A1) specifies the initial amplitude, hence:
T1 = 0 sec., A1 = initial amplitude.

December 4, 2006
VE432
• The second Tj,Aj pair specifies the end time of the first segment (T2)
and the signal amplitude at this time is A2, etc.
Within each amplitude segment, the amplitude variation vs. time is
linear.
The last Tj determines the total signal length. You must define at least
two Tj,Aj pairs (i.e. one amplitude segment).
Ti and Tj may be different both in number and value but the last Ti and
the last Tj must be the same value.
Note See also page 346.
dB/Hz Log, Tn and dB/Octave Log

Note For non-linear sweeps, the slope in dB is the spectrum slope
before correlation, that is assuming the slope of the power
spectrum is NdB (N being the slope value programmed in the 9
Basic Type setup), the spectrum of autocorrelation will have a
2 × NdB slope.
dB/Hz Log
You define a LOG-type signal through a spectral description, by
specifying;
- the amplitude (dB) of two or more frequency lines in the signal
spectrum,
- the signal amplitude (% of requested drive level) at the start and
end times and possibly at particular times in between.
The Frequency variation vs. time is logarithmic within each
frequency segment. This signal type is used to compensate for the non-
linear response of the ground (HF damping).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Frequency Signal
lines amplitude
Figure 9-4
Each Fi,Ai pair defines a spectrum line at frequency Fi with amplitude

Ai. Fi,Ai pairs are listed in the increasing order of frequency. You must
define at least two spectrum lines. You can specify up to 32 frequency
segments.
Amplitude segments are defined as follows:
• The first Tj,Aj pair (T1,A1) specifies the initial amplitude, hence:
T1 = 0 sec., A1 = initial amplitude.
• The second Tj,Aj pair specifies the end time of the first segment (T2)
and the signal amplitude at this time is A2, etc.
Within each amplitude segment, the amplitude variation is linear.
You must define at least two Tj,Aj pairs (i.e. one amplitude segment).
The last Tj determines the total signal length. You can specify up to 32
amplitude segments.

December 4, 2006
VE432
The Frequency is expressed as:
Fe − Fb ⎛ t 1 ⎞
Fi (t ) = Fb + × log⎜⎜1 + × ( − 1) ⎟⎟
⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎝ T SegRa ⎠
log⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ SegRa ⎠
Where:
• SegRa = Sb/Se = 10(-Ra/10)
• Sb = Slope at the start of the log segment.
• Se = Slope at the end of the log segment.
• Fb = Start frequency.
• Fe = End frequency.
• T = Te-Tb = Basic signal length.
• Ra represents the attenuation (in dB) within the signal
spectrum.
Example: 9
Delta dB values
Fi (Hz) Ai (dB)
8 5
80 10
Ra= 10 - 5 = 5
SegRa = 0.316
Note Choose the Deboost option if the signal is to be used for

Deboost-type processing. See Deboost option (page 360).
See also page 346.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
dB/Octave Log
Signal
Frequency amplitude
lines
Figure 9-5
The Ti,Fi fields are used to specify the frequency at the start time and
at the end time (two Ti,Fi pairs are required). A single frequency
segment is allowed.
The Tj,Aj fields are used to specify the amplitude (% of requested drive
level) at the start time, at the end time and, if required, at particular
times in between (at least two Tj,Aj pairs are required). The last Tj
determines the total signal length. You can specify up to 32 amplitude
segments.
The “Slope dB/Octave” field is used to specify the slope in dB/oct of the
signal spectrum (“SdB” in the expression below).
SdB
n = ---------- + 1
3
1---
n t n n n
Fi ( t ) = Fb + --- × ( Fe – Fb )
T

December 4, 2006
VE432
Tn
Same as dB/Hz Log type (with no Deboost option), except for the
frequency variation which is exponential rather than logarithmic.
Frequency Signal
lines amplitude
9
Figure 9-6
⎛ Fe ⎞
log⎜ ⎟
n= ⎝ Fb ⎠
⎛ Fe ⎞
log⎜ ⎟ − log(SegRa )
⎝ Fb ⎠
n
⎡ 1 ⎛ 1 1 ⎞⎤
Fi (t ) = ⎢ Fb + × Fe − Fb n ⎟⎥
⎜
n t n
⎢ T ⎜ ⎟⎥
⎣ ⎝ ⎠⎦

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Pulse
-0.5
Time (ms)
-1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Figure 9-7
Two parameters are needed to define a pulse-type signal:

- a frequency (F) that determines the pulse width (T) as:
T = 1/F
- an amplitude (% of requested drive level).
A 1-second signal is generated, with the pulse peak centred at
0.5 second.
A Pulse-type signal is needed for two purposes:
• Checking the polarity of the devices in the system.
• In operation, pulse reflection from shallow layers of the ground.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Random
Figure 9-8
The “Random” basic signal type allows you to take sweeps that do not
9
generate resonant frequencies (e. g. the resonant frequencies of
buildings) and also allows two or more vibration sources to be used
simultaneously with minimum interference. The “Random” type
generates a Pseudorandom noise signal based on one of the four
different polynomial sequences selectable from the “Polynomial”
option button:
• 65spoly1: first polynomial with 65535-ms sequence length
• 65spoly2: second polynomial with 65535-ms sequence length
• 8spoly1: first polynomial with 8191-ms sequence length
• 8spoly2: second polynomial with 8191-ms sequence length
The two 8-second polynomial options should only be used with
listening times less than 8 seconds. The polynomial sequences have
been appropriately designed for minimum cross-correlation residual.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
You define a Random-type basic signal by specifying:

• the polynomial option,
• the amplitude (dB) of two or more frequency lines in the spectrum,
• the signal length (duration), and start and end tapers.
Frequency segments should be defined as follows:
- The first Fi,Ai pair specifies the initial frequency (F1) and the
initial amplitude (A1). F1 must be 5, 7, 10, 14 or 20 Hz.
- The second Fi,Ai pair specifies the frequency (F2) and the
amplitude (A2) of the signal at the end of the first segment, etc.
You must define at least two Fi,Ai pairs (i.e. one frequency
segment).
Note Choose the Deboost option if the signal is to be used for

Deboost-type processing.
See also Deboost option (page 360).
Custom
Figure 9-9
To define a “Custom” basic type signal, you just have to specify the
name of a file saved on the vibrator electronics PCMCIA interface,
containing the description of a customized signal of yours.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Note The system will not check to see if you entered a consistent file
name until you run the Set DSD function.
Note You don't have to specify the Length (this field will be updated
by reading the specified file when you run the Set DSD
function).
You have to define the shape of the Custom sweep and create a file
containing the samples required by the VE432 (see the example below)
with a tool of your own, save it as an ASCII, DOS- or UNIX-format file,
and then load it to the DPG. See How to load a Custom sweep file to a
DPG (page 358).
The sweep should be defined with 2000 samples per second, one sample
per line. Each sample should be a floating value in ASCII format, scaled
between -1 and +1.
Comments are allowed, beginning with #.
Example 9
#
# Sercel Custom sweep

# file custom1.asc
# 11.03.1999
0.0000001 # start taper.
0.0000002
-0.0000001
-0.0000004
...
0.99567
...
0.0000001 # end taper

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
The Hilbert transform of the reference can be supplied too, in the form
of a second column of figures, in a Custom sweep file. (The reference
signal is assumed described in the first column). The two columns are
required for HFVS if a Time QC is desired (calculation of phase,
distortion, force). See HFVS (page 400).
How to load a Custom sweep file to a DPG

After creating a Custom sweep file you have to move it to the GUI on
the server computer, via whatever medium is available and appropriate
(CD-ROM, etc.). You may put it into the /tmp directory or any directory
beginning with /users/ (e. g. /users/428XL/ve432/). The file name
should be in DOS format, i. e. 8 characters max for the name, 1 dot, 3
characters max for the extension (e. g. custom1.asc).
To load a custom file to a DPG:
1. Select PCMCIA tools from the Functions menu (see Figure 9-31
on page 389).
2. Choose the “Load custom file to PCMCIA” option.
3. Use the Browse button to select the file to load.
4. Click Go. The file is transferred to the DPG. The DPG performs
the necessary format conversion and stores the result to the
PCMCIA card without changing the file name.
For example the /users/428XL/ve432/custom1.asc file is saved as
custom1.asc on the PCMCIA card.
Generate a PCMCIA card containing the custom sweep file for each
DSD and each DPG to use.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Compound
Figure 9-10
The “Compound” basic signal type allows you to create a basic sweep
signal composed of a combination of two or more basic types. You just
have to enter the number of each of those basic types needed into the
Basic Type field and click Add in the upper pane. In the lower pane,
enter a new number and label and click Add then Apply.
9
You can use this option to define a signal including a delay time: create
a delay type with the desired delay length, using the Delay option, then
insert it at the beginning of a “Compound” sweep (i. e. the delay-type
signal should be the first in the list).
Note The signals will be generated in the order determined in the list
box.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Delay
Figure 9-11
The “Delay” basic signal type uses a single entry field (Length,
allowable range 1 to 64 s).
If you wish to delay any basic signal, specify the desired delay time in
the “Length” field. In the lower pane, enter a new number and label and
click Add then Apply. Then use the “Compound” tab to create a new
basic type including that delay. See Compound (page 359).
Deboost option
If you choose the Deboost option for Log or Random type signals, the
428XL will make the necessary computation for the frequency
spectrum shape of the output signals to be the same as that of a linear
sweep.
Figure 9-12
Note Whether or not the Deboost option is enabled, the VE432

generates the same sweep. This option does not affect the
behaviour of the VE432.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Generating a Basic Type setup

The “Basic Type” setup window allows you to define up to 32 different
basic signal types.
1. Click on the appropriate tab, depending on which mathematical
function you wish to use.
2. In the upper pane, set the parameters as required.
3. In the lower pane:
- The list box shows the list of basic signals already defined, if
any.
- The “Number“ field is used to enter or display a basic signal type
number. Example: “25” refers to basic signal #25 (“bas25” in the
list box).
- The “Label“ field is used to enter or display a more user-friendly
label for the basic signal type. The default label refers to the
mathematical function selected for the basic signal.
- The basic signal # displayed in the “Number” field and defined
9
with the selections made in the upper pane is added into the list
box when you click the Add button (unless it is already defined).
If you double-click any basic type in the list box, then its characteristics
appear in the upper pane. To make changes, click it in the list box, make
the desired changes and click Change or Delete. Clicking Apply saves
your changes.
Any changes to the Basic Type currently used will not be effective until
you use the “Set DSD“ function to initialize the DSDs.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
The Acquisition Type setup
Figure 9-13
An “Acquisition Type” tells the DSDs selected in a fleet (source) what

to do. To define an Acquisition Type you have to specify:
- the Basic signal type to be used by all DSDs,
- the signals (up to four) to be supplied by the DPG through its
Analog Pilot outputs, if required (to be used in the correlation
process),
- two options for the DSDs (baseplate automatic lift, and
synchronization with a picked up power line signal),
- an acquisition number and label.
Note Acquisition Types are used in defining Process Types in the

“Operation” window.
The list box shows the list of existing acquisition types. To define a new
acquisition type, enter its number in the Acquisition Type field, select
the desired options and basic signals, then click Add. To make changes,
click it in the list box, make the desired changes and click Change or
Delete.
To save the current list of acquisition types, click Apply. (To revert to
the former list, click Reset instead).

December 4, 2006
VE432
Acquisition Type & Label

The Acquisition Type field is used to enter an identification number (1
to 32) for the Acquisition Type.
Example of syntax: “25” refers to acquisition type #25.
The Label field is used to enter a label (up to 16 ASCII characters) for
the Acquisition Type. A default label is prompted by the system (acq
type #) but you can enter a more user-friendly one.
Note A noise elimination Threshold Type (modulo 16) is

automatically associated with each Acquisition Type:
... ...
Threshold Type 1 <=> Acq Type 17 9
... ...
Basic Type Nb
When you create an Acquisition Type, you specify which Basic (sweep)
signal the DSDs should generate. You do that by entering the desired
Basic Type number (defined using The Basic Type setup on page 346)
into this field.
Pilot Basic Nb
The DPG can generate up to four Pilots, available on its “Analog Pilot”
outputs, to be used as reference signals for the correlation processor. A
Pilot signal is synchronous with the Time Break signal and usually very
similar to the fleet's sweep signal. The Pilot signals should be fed to
Auxiliary channels on the acquisition system. (See Installation
Manual).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
When you create an Acquisition Type, you specify which Pilots the
DPG should generate. You do that by entering the desired Basic Type
number (defined using The Basic Type setup on page 346) into the
necessary fields (p1 to p4).
Auto Lift
Select this option if you wish the vibrator baseplate to automatically lift
at the end of the sweep depicted by the acquisition type. The baseplate
will not lift automatically, however, unless and until the Auto Lift
button on the DSD is activated too.
High Line Sync

The High Line Sync option allows you to select a synchronization
signal for the T0 time. Click this button and select the desired option in
the menu that pops up. The three possible options are:
• Free no synchronization
• Up T0 synchronized on the transition from the negative to
positive half period of the High Line signal
• Down T0 synchronized on the transition from the positive to
negative half period of the High Line signal.
Note High Line synchronization is irrelevant for a pseudo-random

signal.
This function is used to remove the noise radiated by nearby power
lines, by means of the following technique:
- High Line noise is intendedly picked up and fed to the DPG (see
VE432 Installation Manual).
- The sweeps are ALTERNATIVELY triggered on the positive-
going and negative-going transitions of high line noise.
- With an even number of sweeps, any high line noise picked up
by the receivers is theoretically removed through the stacking
process.

December 4, 2006
VE432
The Radio Management setup
Vib. 2
Vib. 3
Vib. 10
Figure 9-14
Get DSD Status

This option button allows you to choose the moment when each DSD
should transmit its status to the DPG, and to choose a return signal:
- “During the sweep”: the DSD will transmit its status during the
next sweep rather than in the interval between two successive 9
sweeps. This allows you to save time, but prevents you from
using a Return Sweep.
- “At end of sweep”: the DSD will transmit its status at the end of
sweeps. Choose this option if you wish to use a Return Sweep.
(The Return Sweep is transmitted by a DSD to the DPG during
sweeps via the radio link).
Return Signal
This button allows you to specify whether to use a Return Sweep signal.
If you tick this option, then you have to specify the vibrator on which
the Return Sweep signal is to be picked up, choose which signal to pick
up as the Return Sweep on this vibrator, and also choose a Return Pilot.
The Return Sweep is transmitted by the DSD to the DPG during sweeps
via the radio link. As a result, if you choose to use a Return Sweep, the
DSD status cannot be transmitted to the DPG during sweeps (see Get
DSD Status option above).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
The Return Sweep and Return Pilot are relayed to the central unit via
the DPG's Analog Pilot connector.
Return Sweep On Vib #

Return Sweep refers to a signal sensed on a vibrator's mechanical parts
and transmitted on the radio link to the DPG, for real-time monitoring
of the vibration source on the central unit. You have to click in the list
box to select (highlight) the vibrator to be monitored.
Signal
This option button allows you to choose which signal to monitor as
Return Sweep from six possible options:
• Force Ground force signal
• Macc Mass acceleration
• Mvel Mass velocity
• Bacc Base plate acceleration
• Bvel Base plate velocity
• Ref DSD local reference
Return Pilot
If you select a Return Sweep, you have to select a Return Pilot, that is
one of the Pilot signals generated by the DPG, shifted by the radio delay,
so that it can be used as reference signal by the correlation processor.
Choose a Return Pilot from the Pilot signals (P1 to P4) specified in the
The Acquisition Type setup (page 362).
Note For radio similarity tests:

• the Return Pilot should be fed to Auxiliary channel 2.
• the Return Sweep should be fed to Auxiliary channel 3.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Generating a Radio Management Setup

1. Select the appropriate Get DSD Status option.
2. If you want to define a Return Signal:
- Tick the Return Signal option,
- Click in the list box to select (highlight) the vibrator you want to
monitor (choose a vibrator that responded successfully to the
Look function),
- From the Signal option button, select the signal to monitor
(Force/Mass acceleration/etc.),
- Choose a Return Pilot (P1/P2/P3/P4),
3. To save and enable your changes, click Apply. (To revert to the
former settings, click Reset instead).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
The QC Limit setup
The QC Limit setup
Figure 9-15
This dialog box allows you to set alert thresholds for some of the
Quality Control data fed back by the DSDs. Any threshold being
exceeded will cause the QC data of the DSD to be displayed in orange
in the main window.
Average Phase Error 0 to 45 degrees.
Maximum Phase Error 0 to 45 degrees.
Average Distortion 0 to 50%.
Maximum Distortion 0 to 80%.
Average Ground Force 0 to 100%.

December 4, 2006
VE432
The QC Choice setup
The QC Choice setup
Figure 9-16
Data Computation Domain

(“Time” or “Frequency”) This option button is used to specify whether
the DPG should output the vibrator QC data in the Time domain (phase
error, distortion, ground force) or in the Frequency domain (phase
error, ground force).
Extended QC
9
If you select this option, QC data computed every 0.5 second, can be
viewed in real time (i. e. with Auto activated), using the Get QC
function. The average QC results computed over a complete acquisition
are still available.
(If you do not select the Extended QC option, the Extended QC data is
still computed but it cannot be viewed during acquisitions).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
The T0 Time setup
The T0 Time setup
Figure 9-17
The “T0 time” (or T0 sync code) is a virtual time mark signal
terminating every T0 message (message radioed between the DPG and
DSDs).
The T0 sync code is used for:
- measuring the radio delays,
- allowing the DSDs to start their sweeps at the same time.
See also Radio functions (page 382).
T0 Repeat Times
(Allowable range: 2 to 50).
Specifies the number of T0 data frames in the T0 message. It may be
helpful to send more than 2 T0 data frames to increase the reliability of
the radio link. However, repeating the T0 data frame causes the T0 sync
code (terminating the T0 message) to be delayed with respect to the
transmit start time of the DPG radio. The delay may be:
up to 50x311 ms = 15.5 s at 1800 bits/s (base band transmitter)
or
up to 50x467 ms = 23.3 s at 1200 bits/s (modem module transmitter).

December 4, 2006
VE432
The T0 Time setup
T0 Mode
(“Normal T0” or “Early T0”) Allows you to set the transmit start time
of the DPG radio between any two consecutive acquisitions.
• In the “Normal T0” mode, the DPG radio is not switched to
transmission until the DPG receives the Firing Order.
• In the “Early T0” mode, the DPG radio is switched to transmission
right after the DSD status report is received, irrespective of the
expected Firing Order for the next acquisition. The time interval
between any two acquisitions is therefore shorter by about 1.7
seconds if the Early T0 mode is used.
FO Window
(Allowable range: 3 to 60 seconds).
Must be specified if the Early T0 mode is selected. Stands for a time
interval, starting right after the DSD status report is received, during
which the Firing Order for the next acquisition is expected. 9
If no Firing Order is received within the FO window, then the system
will return to the normal T0 mode for the next acquisition.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
Functions
In this section:
• Auto/Manual (page 372)
• Look (page 373)
• Vibrator Fleet (page 375)
• Local Acquisition (page 376)
• Set DSD (page 378)
• Get DSD (page 379)
• Radio functions (page 382)
• Set Servo (page 387)
• PCMCIA Tools (page 389)
Auto/Manual
Figure 9-18
Clicking Manual isolates the DPG from the 428XL and enables its
local functions (e.g. local acquisition). As a result:
• data acquisition in vibroseismic operations is suspended until the
DPG is reset to Auto.
• the traffic light of the DPG in the 428XL Activity window turns red.
Clicking Auto connects the DPG to the 428XL (and checks the DSD
Setup parameters) allowing it to perform data acquisition (if the VE432
window is ready, with consistent parameter settings, and if the Vib Fleet
function has been completed). With Auto activated, DPG local

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
functions are inhibited; the traffic light of the DPG in the 428XL
Activity window is green during sweeps, orange otherwise.
Look
The Look DSD function
allows you to select the
DSDs to be used in the active
crew.
You must have used the
Setups menu's Crew
command to define a crew (a
list of DSDs). The crew
consisting of all the DSDs
that you “select” through the
Look DSD function is Figure 9-19
referred to as the “active”

crew. “Selecting” a DSD with the Look DSD function means
initializing the radio transmission between the DPG and this DSD and
9
querying to see if its status is correct.
Prerequisites
• Unless already done, click the Manual button in the control panel to
isolate the DPG from the recording unit.
• All the DSDs you intend to select must be in the Remote state (use
the “Remote” key on the DSD).
• You cannot use the Look button (i. e. the button is dimmed) until the
DPG is connected to the workstation and powered up
(communication between the two must be established).
Select
1. Using the right arrow button, move the vibrators you want to
initialize (those which are to make up the active crew) from the

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
left-hand list (Available DSDs) to the vibrator list for the desired
DPG controller module.
2. Click the Select button. As a result, a message is radioed to all the
DSDs chosen in the right-hand list box, thus initializing or re-
initializing radio communications between the DPG and those
DSDs.
3. All the DSDs that replied successfully are displayed with boldface
characters in the Look DSD dialog box's vibrator list. In the case
of a multimodule configuration, there is one list for each DPG
module:
The vibrator status bar in the

main window is updated
Figure 9-20
- The vibrator indicators should turn orange, unless the vibrator

parameters need to be loaded.
- The indicator of any vibrator that requires parameters to be
loaded is shown in blue and the message “DSD#.. Wrong setup
DSD table” appears. (Use the Set DSD function to load the
parameters).
- If the Vib Fleet function has been performed, those DSDs which
are seen by Look and associated with a fleet are shown in green.
- Any DSD that requires the Installation or Initialization routine to
be performed is shown in red.
- Any DSD for which the Look function failed is colorless.
4. If any DSD (Vib xx) fails to reply properly, e. g. because it is not
installed or because of radio-communications problems, then the

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
message “No answer from DSD xx Do you want to retry?”

appears in a warning dialog box.
Append
Same as Select button, but those DSDs which were initialized when the
Look DSD function was last executed are not re-initialized, so they
remain “selected”. Therefore, the Append button allows you to add one
or more DSDs to the list of “selected” DSDs without re-initializing the
whole list.
Vibrator Fleet
A crew may consist of up to 4 groups of DSDs referred to as
“fleets” (one fleet for each vibratory source). The Vib. Fleet
function is used to specify the DSDs incorporated in each
fleet. Beforehand, you have to run the Look and Set DSD functions.
Clicking theVibrator Fleet button opens a dialog box with a list box for
each fleet in the crew. (To specify which fleets are to be used in the crew, 9
see The Vibrator Crew setup on page 343).
Vib
Number
Vib. 10 Vib. 2 Leader

Vib. 12 Vib. 3 R
Figure 9-21
The left-hand list box (Available DSDs) prompts the list of DSDs
available to the crew, i. e. those selected by the Look function but not
assigned to any fleet yet. Using the right arrow button, move the
vibrators you want to incorporate into a fleet from the left-hand list box
to the desired fleet’s list box.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
Double-clicking on any DSD in the list enables or disables the use of the
Ready button on this DSD (this also determines which vibrator is the
leader). Pushing the Ready button on any DSD is of no effect unless the
button is enabled in the Fleet window. (An “R” appears after the DSD
number of the leader in the list box, meaning that the use of the Ready
button on this DSD is enabled).
After selecting (highlighting) the
The green colour means the
desired DSDs in each fleet's list vibrator is ready to be used in
box, clicking Go will update the remote control mode
status bar displayed under the

function buttons in the main
window: a flag appears ahead of
each vibrators fleet in the status bar, Figure 9-22
and those vibrators which are ready
in each fleet are shown in green.
Local Acquisition
This function allows you to check the vibrator equipment
separately, as if it were not connected to the recording unit.
For a local acquisition the DPG may operate alone, or the
DPG and DSDs may operate normally but without being controlled by
the recording unit. In that case the Blast command (Firing Order) is
replaced by a manual start (Go pushbutton).
Prerequisites
Unless already done, click the Manual button in the control panel to
The DSDs that you want to use must be “selected” (see Look on
page 373), with consistent parameters.
How to use the local acquisition function

1. Click the Local Acquisition function button. A dialog box
appears showing the DSDs currently selected in the active crew.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
Figure 9-23
2. In the list box, choose (by clicking) the vibrators you wish to use
for the local acquisition. If you do not select any vibrator, then the
DPG will operate alone.
3. In the Basic Type field, enter the type of basic signal you wish to
use. (Basic Types are defined through the Setups menu).
4. Click the option button to choose the execution mode:
Single The basic signal is generated once. 9
Continuous The basic signal repeats endlessly until you click
the Stop button (which appears at the bottom of
the dialog box if you choose this option).
5. Click the Go button. The local acquisition executes. In Single
mode, the local acquisition ends automatically, without any user
action. In Continuous mode, you must click the Stop button to
interrupt the local acquisition, which will actually stop after the
current acquisition is complete.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
Set DSD
This function is used to upload sweep-type parameters from
the DPG to the DSDs you specify.
The sweep parameters are read from the table containing all the
acquisition types (ACQ#) defined in the VE432 window. They are
required in the DSDs for generating the corresponding vibratory
sources. The Set DSD function allows you to have consistent
parameters in all the DSDs to be used for a sweep. Those DSDs which
have inconsistent parameters are shown in blue in the main window's
status bar.
Prerequisites
The DSDs to which you want to upload sweep type parameters must be
“selected”. See Look (page 373).
How to use the “Set DSD” function

1. Click the Set DSD pushbutton in the control panel. A dialog box
appears with a list box showing the DSDs currently selected in the
active crew (as a result of the Look DSD function).
The orange colour means

the DPG and DSD
Vib. 1 acquisitions are matching
Vib. 2
Vib. 3
Figure 9-24
2. In the list box, select (by clicking) the vibrators you wish to load
parameters to.
3. Click the Go button.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
Note With a customized basic signal (Custom option in Basic Type

setup), errors may appear at this stage as the Set DSD function
checks for consistent parameters from the custom file.
Get DSD
This function is used to import and view the vibrator
parameters from one or more DSDs you specify.
Prerequisites
The DSDs that you want to query must be “selected”. See Look
(page 373).
How to use the “Get DSD” function

1. Click the Get DSD button. A dialog box appears with a list box 9
showing the DSDs currently selected in the active crew (as a
result of the Look DSD function).
Vib. 1
Vib. 2
Vib. 3
Figure 9-25
2. In the list box, choose (by clicking) the vibrators you wish to get
parameters from.
3. Select the type of units you wish to use to display the results:
Metric (kg, daN, etc.) Imperial (lb, lbf, etc.).
4. Click the Go button.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
After all the data from the DSDs have been collected they are viewed in
a table so that comparisons between DSDs can be made easily.
DSD parameters
Running the Get DSD function opens a view pane displaying the
following vibrator parameters from each selected DSD:

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
100 to 32767 kg
100 to 32767 kg
100 to 32767 kg
1000 to 327670 daN
1000 to 327670 daN
Polarity (depending on the wiring) of the
Reaction Mass, Servo Valve, Torque Motor.
Gain of the Mass LVDT and
Valve LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transformer)
- Reaction mass LVDT offset
- Main Valve LVDT offset
- Torque motor current
- Active region of LVDT stroke, in percent.
Results from the two sweeps that

were used for the identification process.
- Static gain of pilot valve.

- Pilot valve cut-off frequency
9
- Pilot valve damping coefficient
- Value of leakage between the two chambers of the reaction mass.

- Main valve static gain
- Gain weighting in the servo control loop.
- Servo control type (Filtered or Raw).
- Amplitude level (0 to 100%) for the DSD's DRIVE "H" key.

- Amplitude level (0 to 100%) for the DSD's DRIVE "L" key.
- If Auto Level = Yes, Minimum high drive level, in percent.
- If Auto Level = Yes, Minimum low drive level, in percent.
Figure 9-26

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
Radio functions
Radio functions are used to measure (Compute Radio
Delay) or manually change (Modify Radio Delay) the
radio delay inherent in radio transmissions between the
DPG and DSDs, or to remotely change the radio output levels of the
DPG and DSDs (Set Radio Parameters).
Figure 9-27
The radio delay is an essential parameter in the correlation process as it

is involved in making the pilot signal synchronous with the sweep
signal.
A radio delay is usually measured for a given type of radio transceiver.
The Compute function should therefore be run whenever you use a new
radio type on your DPG and DSDs, but also at regular time intervals to
check the performance of your radio sets. Through the Compute
function, a series of five measurement sequences is run to determine the
radio delay.
The Radio Delay can also be typed on the workstation’s keyboard
(using the Modify function) for example because you want to use a
value slightly different from the average radio delay determined by the
Compute function.
The “Set Radio Parameters” tab is used to set the transmission output
level of the radio units of the DPG and DSDs.
Prerequisites
• Unless already done, click the Manual button in the control panel to
• Use the Look DSD function to define your active crew.
December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
How to use the “Compute” function

1. Click the Compute Radio Delay tab. The DPG queries the
selected DSDs in succession, via the radio link, based on the
scheme described below. See More about the radio delay
measurement (page 384).
2. After the radio delay is determined, the DPG radio delay assumes
the determined value and, via radio transmissions from the DPG,
all corrections to the extra delay are zeroed in the DSDs. For more
information on this parameter, see More about the radio delay
(page 386).
3. After transmission is complete, the computed radio delay appears
in the “Dpg Radio Delay” field, meaning that the Compute
function is complete.
Transmission faults
If the DPG fails to receive a reply from any DSD (a T0 sync on its return
trip is expected), the warning message “No T0 reception” shows up in 9
the status pane.
In that case, the DPG will resume the transmission of T0 to this DSD.
If the retry is successful (a reply is received), the function will proceed
normally unless a total of 8 retries have already been done since the
Compute function was initiated, in which case the function is aborted,
as a more severe failure is suspected, and the “Measurement aborted
(radio trans. errors)” warning message shows up.
How to enter a radio delay (“Modify” function)

1. Click on the “Modify Radio Delay” tab.
Figure 9-28

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
2. In the “DPG Radio Delay“field, enter the value of radio delay

that you want to use.
3. Click Go to activate this value.
You cannot enter an individual radio delay for each DSD.
Setting radio parameters

Click on the “Set Radio Parameters” tab.
Figure 9-29
• The Radio Level is adjustable from 3% (min) to 100% (max).

• Number of Ready Frames:
• Radio Transmission Delay:
Clicking Go uploads the selected value to all DSDs and Slave DPGs
selected by the Select or Append function (Look DSD), and all DPGs.
More about the radio delay measurement

Measurement principle
Radio delays are measured using the T0 sync code. This signal is the
pseudorandom code transmitted in the T0 message.
Measurement sequences
A measurement sequence may be outlined as follows:
• A T0 message is transmitted from the DPG.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
• Upon receiving the T0 sync code, a DSD must transmit this time
mark back to the DPG.
• The same DSD transmits the t2 time to the DPG.
• The DPG determines a solution (D1) for the radio delay through the
following formula:
t1 – t2
D1 = ----------------
2
where
t1 elapsed time between the moment the DPG
transmits the T0 and the moment it receives it
back from a DSD.
t2 elapsed time between the moment the DSD
receives the T0 from the DPG and the moment it
transmits it back to the DPG.
• The measurement sequence is repeated until five measurements (D1,
D2, ..., D5) are available on the DPG, irrespective of the number of 9
DSDs in the crew. DSDs are queried in ascending order of fleet# and
vibrator#.
• If for example the crew consists of six DSDs, the five solutions are
obtained from:
Vib 1 (Fleet 1) D1
Vib 2 (Fleet 1) D2
Vib 3 (Fleet 2) D3
Vib 4 (Fleet 2) D4
Vib 5 (Fleet 3) D5
Vib 6 (Fleet 3) not queried
But if there are only two DSDs, the five solutions are obtained from:
Vib 1 (D1)
Vib 2 (D2)

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
Vib 1 (D3)
Vib 2 (D4)
Vib 1 (D5).
Radio delay, final result

The radio delay is then computed by averaging the five solutions. The
expression of the final result is then:
D1 + D2 + D3 + D4 + D5
RadioDelay = ----------------------------------------------------------------
5
(Typical value with standard radios: 500 microseconds approx.)
More about the radio delay

Definition
The radio delay may be defined as the time elapsed between the
moment a command intended for a DSD is requested on the DPG and
the moment it starts running on the DSD, that is the propagation time of
a message from the DPG to a DSD via the radio.
System requirements
A record sequence requires that all pilots and sweeps should start at
exactly the same time.
If no provision were made for synchronous start times, a Firing Order
transmitted from the DPG at time t would result in a premature
generation of pilots, or in a delayed generation of sweep start times, due
to the delay introduced by the radio sets.
How the system can generate synchronous pilots and sweeps

Pilots are postponed by a time delay, starting from the T0 sync code, in
order to compensate for the radio delays: all pilot start times are
postponed by a time equal to the radio delay, computed or user-set, to
match the sweep start time (affected by the radio delay) in the DSDs.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
Set Servo
This function allows you to set the parameters used in each vibrator's
servo control loop. Clicking Go will set the servo control loop
parameters of all the vibrators you select (highlight) in the list box.
Vib. 1
Vib. 2
Vib. 3
Figure 9-30
Prerequisites 9
Unless already done, click Manual in the control panel to isolate the
DPG from the recording unit.
The DSDs that you want to set must be “selected” (see page 373 - Look
DSD function).
Servo Input
This option button determines what to use as input to the servo control:
either the estimated states from the Kalman filter (“Filtered” option) or
raw measurements of baseplate and mass accelerations (“Raw” option).
• Filtered: using this option allows the system to discard non-coherent
measurements on any sensor (baseplate acc., mass acc., valve or mass
LVDTs). Remember that the QC and the usual way of testing the
equipment with external devices always involve the force derived
from raw acceleration measurements. Therefore, in the presence of
vibrator imperfections (e.g. mass rocking & baseplate flexure) a raw

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
QC can exhibit larger errors than the real performance of the servo
loop.
• Raw: with this option, servo control and QC are homogeneous but
the system cannot benefit from the capability of discarding incorrect
measurements. This option is of no effect on a random sweep.
Auto Level
This button allows you to enable or disable the Auto Level function. If
you enable the Auto Level function, then you must specify lower limits
for both High and Low drive levels.
DSDs using the Auto Level function operate as follows:
• The Drive level is decreased for the next sweep if an overload
condition is detected. However the drive level cannot go below the
values of Min High Drive and Min Low Drive.
• The Drive level is increased for the next sweep if no overload
condition is detected. However the drive level cannot exceed the
values of High Drive Level and Low Drive Level.
DSDs not using the Auto Level function will operate only within the
limits of “High Drive Level” and “Low Drive Level”.
Low Drive Level

Lower amplitude, in percent, of drive level. The scale is adjustable from
0 to 100% in 1% steps.
Requirements: Low Drive Level < High Drive Level.
High Drive Level

Upper amplitude, in percent, of drive level. The scale is adjustable from
Min Low Drive

This scale appears only if Auto Level is selected.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Functions
Low limit of Low Drive Level, in percent. The scale is adjustable from
Requirements: Min Low Drive < Low Drive Level.
Min High Drive

This scale appears only if Auto Level is selected.
Low limit of High Drive Level, in percent. The scale is adjustable from
Requirements: Min High Drive < High Drive level.
Lift Up Delay
Time interval between the end of a sweep and the moment when a
vibrator's pad will lift if Auto Lift is enabled. Adjustable from 0 to
99 seconds.
If no delay is required, set the Lift Up Delay to 0.
9
PCMCIA Tools
Figure 9-31 PCMCIA Tools
You are not allowed to launch any these PCMCIA functions unless you
go to Manual.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Functions
The identification number of a DPG is determined by the system. It is

displayed when you run the Look function.
(With later handheld models, software is loaded from the SERCEL
CD-ROM via a PC).

December 4, 2006
VE432
Normal acquisition
Normal acquisition
In this section:
• Graphic view (page 392)
• Numeric view (page 395)
• DPG/DSD status codes (page 397)
General
The DSDs that you want to use for normal acquisition must be
“selected”. See Look (page 373), with consistent parameters (i. e. each
DSD to be used should appear with a green indicator in the main
window's status bar).
When you are ready for a normal acquisition, click the Auto button, in
the main window's control panel. As a result the DPG is waiting for the
Firing Order from the 428XL. 9
The 428XL will not generate the F O until it receives a Ready status
from the DPG window. When the Ready signal is received from the
vibrator fleet leader, that is when all the desired vibrators are in place
with pads down, it may be retained in the DPG window or automatically
relayed to the recording system, depending on whether the fleet’s button
in the status bar is released or depressed.
When it receives the F O the DPG generates the Time Break to the
selected DSDs. Then the programmed sweeps are taken and all DSDs
in turn transmit their latest status reports, corresponding to one or more
completed sweeps, to the DPG.
The Status and QC data generated by the DPG are relayed to the GUI
via the Ethernet link and stored into a daily file automatically generated
in the Log window and named “normalAcqResult.hci428_0.ddd”
where ddd stands for the julian day when the file was created. (They can
be viewed in the Log main window).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Normal acquisition
QC and status results are not only saved but also displayed in the VE432
main window which makes it easy to appreciate the quality of a vibrator
in real time or through statistical post-processing. The results can be
presented in numeric or graphic form.
The colour of the QC data depends on the alert thresholds you set using
the “DSD limits” command in the Setup menu.
The radio link allows the DPG to see if any DSD failed to sweep for any
T0. In that case the DPG will report a 98 status (“no T0 received”).
For each status report received the DPG checks to see if the DSD and
DPG clock frequencies are the same. If that is not the case it replaces
the current status by a Timing Error (status 19).
If the Extended QC option is enabled (see The QC Choice setup on
page 369), the QC data can be plotted in real time in the results pane by
clicking the Get QC function button. To revert to the normal view, click
the Vibrator Fleet function button.
Graphic view
The VP and Acq fields respectively display the Vibrated Point number
and Acquisition number the results relate to.
Six bar charts are shown, for the following QC data available in the
status messages from the DSDs: Average Phase, Peak Phase, Average
Distortion, Peak Distortion, Average Ground Force, Peak Ground
Force.
A red horizontal line in each chart shows the limit specified in the Setup
menu (“QC Limit“command).

December 4, 2006
VE432
Normal acquisition
QC value during this

sweep
Average values over
the latest 50 sweeps
Figure 9-32
For each DSD used, each chart shows:

• A green or orange bar showing the QC value for the latest acquisition
completed (identified in the Acq field):
- Green if the QC value is below the limit,
- Orange if it exceeds the limit or an error is reported:
OV for an overload,
W for a warning,
T for a timing error.
F for a file error.

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Normal acquisition
- If the status code from any DSD is incorrect it is displayed in

place of the corresponding QC value.
• A blue or red bar showing the average QC value over the latest 50
acquisitions:
- Blue if the average QC value is below the limit,
- Red if it exceeds the limit.
- If the status code from any DSD is incorrect it is displayed in
place of the corresponding QC value.
For the interpretation of Status codes, see page 397.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Normal acquisition
Numeric view
A table is displayed, derived from the QC reports of the latest 50
acquisitions. For each DSD, the table shows:
• the Vibrated Point number and the Acquisition number,
• the Average/Peak Phase, or Distortion or Ground Force, or the Status
Code, whichever you choose from the QC option button.
Figure 9-33
The colour of each cell in the table should be interpreted as follows:

• If you choose the Status Code view:
- White background, black writing: QC values are within the
limits.
- White background, orange writing:

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Normal acquisition
- status code 1 or 12 appears, QC values are within

the limits but an Overload and/or Warning has
been reported.
- or status code 19 appears.
- White background, nothing displayed: no response from the
DSD.
- Orange background, black writing:
Status codes 1 or 12, or 19 appears, one of the QC
values exceeds the limits, no Overload, and no
Warning.
- Orange background, white writing:
Status codes 1 or 12, or 19 appears; one of the QC
values exceeds the limits and an Overload and/or
Warning is reported.
- Red background, white writing: if any other status appears.
• If you select any of the QC views, the colours should be interpreted in
the same way, but only the selected QC is tested for compliance with
the limit.
For the interpretation of Status codes, see page 397.
Double-clicking in any cell opens a secondary window showing the
detailed QC values contained in the status report from the
corresponding DSD for the corresponding acquisition (see Figure 9-33
on page 395).The following codes may be reported for overloads:
F Raw ground Force reaches hold-down weight.
P Computed Pressure reaches maximum hydraulic pressure.
M Mass position exceeds usable stroke.
V Valve spool position exceeds usable stroke.
E Torque motor current, computed, exceeds maximum allowed
current.

December 4, 2006
VE432
Normal acquisition
The DSD status reports are logged into the database. They can be
viewed in the Log main window and saved to a file.
DPG/DSD status codes

1 Normal completion with “Servo Input = Raw”.
2 Sweep aborted by DSD. Hardware malfunction (DVC).
10 User abort.
12 Normal completion with “Servo Input = Filtered”.
13 Discrepancy in DPG and DSD acquisition tables. Use the Set
DSD function to correct the inconsistent table.
14 Lift not ready.
19 Normal, Timing error (indicative of discrepancy between DPG
and DSD clocks)..
20 HiLine error (Master DPG only). 9
21 Sweep # undefined.
22 Custom error (Custom sweep does not exist on PCMCIA card)
or can not read from PCMCIA card.
25 DPG time-out (Master DPG hardware failure).
26 The Slave recording unit failed to start (on a Slave DPG only).
98 No T0 data received (sweep failed to start, or radio malfunction).
99 No T0 data received or no status report (sweep failed to start or
DPG failed to receive consistent DSD status).

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
Statistics views
Statistics views
Whether for statistics on DSDs or on a fleet, the following distinct
views are available: average phase, peak phase, average distortion, peak
distortion, average ground force, peak ground force, Status Codes.
The system calculates the statistical data from the results collected since
it last went to Auto (meaning that your statistics views are lost each
time you go to Auto).
You can choose to view statistical data for each fleet or for each DSD.
Figure 9-34
Figure 9-35

December 4, 2006
VE432
Statistics views
In graphic Statistics views, the results are displayed in the form of a bar
chart for each vibrator (or for each fleet) plus a Vx (or Fleet X) bar chart
in the upper-left corner, showing the mean QC value computed on all
the DSDs (or all fleets).
Unless you choose the Manual range option, the horizontal scale is
automatically adjusted so that all samples can be shown. If you choose
Manual range, then the associated fields prompt the outermost values
of the horizontal scale, so that you can change them and adjust the scale
manually.
On each chart the horizontal axis is the scale (divided into a number of
bins) for the QC values (phase or distortion or force), and the vertical
axis is for the number of values in each bin. The following values are
also shown:
• number of sweeps (n)
• mean value (mean).
• standard deviation (SDev), only in the zoom view.
See Bar charts (page 29).
9

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
HFVS
HFVS
In this section:
• Example (page 401)
Overview
To use the HFVS function, you have to enable that operating mode in
the Operation window’s Seismic setup options (page 221).
The HFVS technique requires the recording of vibrator motion signals
on each vibrator. The 428XL allows the signals picked up on the
vibrators to be radioed to the central control unit in real-time (as soon
as each sweep is complete), using standard radio telemetry units
(LAUR), so that they can be recorded as auxiliary channels in the SEGD
file. To connect the necessary auxiliary channels, see HFVS (page 177)
in 428XL Installation Manual.
Processing techniques making use of the vibrator motion signals
recorded may require that you program the VE432 specifically, not to
have all the vibrators doing the same sweep within a vibrator group.
This is easily done with the VE432, using the Custom (page 356) sweep
type option that allows each vibrator to generate a sweep loaded from a
PCMCIA card.
For the HFVS function, you only have to record replicas of a custom
sweep, shifted as you like but identified with the same name, on as
many PCMCIA cards as required, then load each card to a DSD. To
store files on a PCMCIA card, see PCMCIA Tools (page 389).

December 4, 2006
VE432
HFVS
Example
Assuming you wish to take four acquisitions on each VP, with four
vibrators, and the initial phase of each vibrator for each acquisition to
be as in the table below:
Acq. Vibrator
1 2 3 4
1 0 90 90 180
2 90 0 180 90
3 90 180 0 90
4 180 90 90 0
To implement that scheme, you have to create the following four

acquisition types in the Acquisition Type Setup window:
• Acq #1: fleet #1: basic #1, pilot #1: basic #1
• Acq #2: fleet #2: basic #2, pilot #1: basic #2
• Acq #3: fleet #3: basic #3, pilot #1: basic #3 9
• Acq #4: fleet #4 : basic #4, pilot #1: basic #4
Figure 9-36

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
HFVS
Create the following four basic sweeps in the Basic Type Setup
window:
• Basic #1: custom sweep #1
On the PCMCIA for vibrator #1, store the following files:
• Custom sweep #1: sweep initial phase: 0°

December 4, 2006
VE432
HFVS
On the PCMCIA for the DPG , you can store the following files:

December 4, 2006
9 VE432
HFVS

December 4, 2006
Chapter
10 Log

• Editing/saving/loading 428XL parameters (page 410)
• SPS files (page 412)
• The Shooting setup window (page 416)
• Operator reports (page 419)

December 4, 2006
10 Log
The main window
The main window

To open the Log main window, click on this icon in the launcher
bar.
Double-click to Navigation pane

expand/collapse View pane
Double-click
(or right-click and
select open)
Figure 10-1
The Log window performs two important but somewhat unrelated

tasks. One is to provide facilities for handling input and output of text-
based (i.e. non-seismic) data, for example observers' logs, processing
support files, and vibrator QC results. This is often referred to as
“binning in & out”.
The other is to provide a means of setting up the format for printed
copies of the observer's report.
For each shot or VP acquired, the 428XL stores around 100 parameters
in what is termed the “Raw Observer's Log”. These include the date,
time and record number but also a multitude of internal and system-
generated figures.
Where available, source position and quality control measurements are
also logged on a daily basis. Receiver array quality control
measurements form a third category of data, stored in a separate file.

December 4, 2006
Log
The main window
Some of these parameters are critical, others are of less significance, but
any or all can be selected for output in one form or another. The Log
window therefore provides several predetermined file formats and also
the means of defining customised file-types where necessary. The most
common output file format is of course SPS.
SPS files can also be used to pre-program the 428XL via the Log
window. The SPS-R, -S and -X files are each loaded in turn, and
together with a few additional parameters entered by the observer,
provide a rapid means of setting up the system for production.
The toolbar
Saves content of Used to type in

Opens a text to find in Shooting
selected view to Starts
blank view selected view parameters
named file search
Loads saved Closes all Activates parameters

file to new
view pane
views contained in selected
view 10
Figure 10-2
The navigation pane

The navigation (left-hand) pane behaves like a file browser box. To
open any folder, double-click on it (or right-click on it and select
“Open” from the menu that pops up). The content is viewed in the right-
hand pane.
The navigation pane provides an image of the system’s database. It is
important to realize what is meant by the term “database” in this
context. It is easy to imagine that all of the system data is somehow
assembled into a single giant list, but this is not quite the case. Stored
under the general banner of “database” are the following:
• All system and survey parameters defined in Setup menus.

December 4, 2006
10 Log
The main window
• Pre-acquisition position information including source and receiver

coordinates, assuming that these have been supplied.
• All post-acquisition results, for instance Observer's logs, actual
source positions and receiver / source attributes and statistics.
Each set of data is stored in a separate file, but it is not necessary for the
user to know the file or directory name, since the system automatically
keeps track of this itself. Loading a particular data set into the main
window and then choosing Apply instructs the system to locate the
appropriate file and copy the new data to it. Similarly, the navigation
pane gives a straightforward way of extracting a particular set of
information, so that you can export it to whatever you want.
The files uploaded or downloaded via The crew’s Web site (page 52)
appear in the Publication folder, with a subfolder (In) containing
uploaded files and another one (Out) containing the files available for
downloading.
• You can open any setup or SPS file available from the crew’s Web site
by simply expanding the Publication folder, right-clicking on the In
subfolder and choosing Open from the popup menu.
• You can place setup parameters on the Web site for users to
download, by simply right-clicking on the Parameters folder and
choosing Publish from the pop menu. Likewise, you can place
reports on the Web site by expanding the Logs folder, right-clicking
on the desired subfolder and choosing Publish all reports from the
popup menu.

December 4, 2006
Log
The main window
Figure 10-3
View panes
like them, see the Hands-on guide (page 44). Each view behaves like a
simple text editor where the keyboard and usual key combinations for
Cut, Copy and Paste shortcuts are allowed. If you want to find any
particular parameter or value in a view pane, simply type it into the
Search field and click the Search button .
10

December 4, 2006
10 Log
Editing/saving/loading 428XL parameters

The Log window allows you to edit all or part of your system and survey
parameters at any moment and save them to a named file so that you can
load them back at a later date, for example if you want to reuse the same
settings or not much different ones.
You can choose to open the Parameters folder (to view the whole set
of setup parameters), or any of its subfolders (to view only the
parameters of a particular client window).
Search Search
field button
Figure 10-4
Opening any folder adds a view pane to the right that allows you to edit
its content. For example you may wish to enter the precise coordinates
of the recording truck in order to place it at the exact location in the
Positioning window (see Figure 10-4).
If you want to find any particular parameter or value, simply type it into
the Search field and click the Search button.
To apply your parameter settings to the system, click in the view pane
and select Apply from the Setup menu (or use this toolbar button: ).

December 4, 2006
Log
Saving
After you open any folder, you can save its content by clicking
in its view pane, then selecting Save from the File menu (or
from the toolbar). In the dialog box that shows up, enter a name
for the file (in the “File Name” field), choose a directory where to save
it (from the “Save In” option button), and click Save.
Loading
To load back a parameter file previously saved, select Load
from the File menu (or from the toolbar). In the file browser
box that shows up, choose the desired file and click Open. This
adds a view pane in the main window (the file name appears in the tab
of that view pane). At this stage, the parameters are only viewed. To
load them to the system, click in the view pane and select Apply from
the Setup menu (or use this toolbar button: ). You cannot do that
unless you turn off the lines in the Line window (by clicking on ).
10

December 4, 2006
10 Log
SPS files
SPS files
In this section
• The SPS format (page 412)
• Importing an SPS file (page 413)
• Exporting an SPS file (page 415)
The SPS format

The SPS format defines four types of files used to input or output some
of the setup parameters of a seismic data acquisition system:
• Source file (also called SPS S-file) including source positions,
• Receiver file (also called SPS R-file) including receiver positions,
• Relation file (also called SPS X-file) used to relate the S-file and R-
file,
• Text file (also called SPS T-file) including textual information.
For a description of the SPS format, see 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 2.
Note the following restrictions as compared with the standard SPS
format: numerals are required in the Line Name, Point Code and Field
Tape Number fields.

December 4, 2006
Log
SPS files
Importing an SPS file
IMPORTANT
Always import the SPS files in this order: Receiver, Source, Relation.
Select Load from the File menu (or from the toolbar ).
1. In the file browser box, go to the folder containing the file to
import and then select that file.
2. Click on Open. This opens an editor view containing the imported
file and allowing you to make any changes needed.
3. If several views are open, select the one you want to load (click on
its tab).
(4) Click to apply

(3) Click to select
10
(1) Click to select
(2) Click to open in

editor view
Figure 10-5

December 4, 2006
10 Log
SPS files
4. Choose Apply from the Setup menu (or use this toolbar button
). You cannot do that unless you turn off the lines in the Line
window (by clicking on ).
Depending on the type of file in the selected view, clicking Apply will
have different effects:
• With a Receiver-type (SPS-R) file, clicking Apply initializes the
planned Receiver positions in the Positioning main window.
• With a Source-type (SPS-S) file, clicking Apply initializes the
planned Source positions in the Positioning main window.
• With a Relation-type (SPS-X) file, clicking Apply builds an Absolute
Spread in the Line main window and sets up the operation table in the
Operation main window. The parameters specified with the The
Shooting setup window (page 416) also used in generating the
operation table.

December 4, 2006
Log
SPS files
Exporting an SPS file

In the navigation pane, open the Results folder and Logs subfolder.
Open the desired swath folder and then do the following:
1. Right-click on the log file you want to export. Choose the
appropriate SPS output format (S, R or X) from the menu that
pops up, depending on which type of SPS file you want to create
(Source, Receiver, or Relation). This opens an editor view
containing the resulting file and allowing you to make any
changes needed.
(2) Click to select

view
(1) Right-click to
open
(3) Click to save

10
Figure 10-6
2. If several views are open, select the one you want to save (click on
its tab).
3. Select Save from the File menu (or from the toolbar ). In the
dialog box that shows up, enter a name for the file (in the “File
Name” field), choose a directory where to save it (from the “Save
In” option button), and click Save.

December 4, 2006
10 Log
The Shooting setup window

Selecting “Shooting Setup” from the Setup menu opens a dialog box
that allows you to enter parameters which cannot be derived from an
SPS Relation file (when you generate parameter scripts from an SPS
Relation file). These are the type of gain, the Process Type and the shot
identification number for the first shot in the operation table.
Figure 10-7
This window must be set up prior to any attempt to load SPS IN files.
(Click Apply to save and enable your changes).
The Shooting parameters will be used in generating an absolute spread
(for the Line window) and an operation table (for the Operation
window) from a “Relation” SPS file viewed in the Log window.
Gain Type Nb
You can program gain characteristics that vary as a function of the
distance from the shot point, by defining different zones within circles
around the shot point. Each zone is allocated a channel type.

December 4, 2006
Log
• Default This field is used to specify the channel type to be

used outside the widest circle.
• Radius
• Gain Type The “Radius” and “Gain Type” fields are used
jointly, to define circular areas around the shot point
and associate a Gain Type (i. e. a preamp gain) to all
receiver channels located within the specified
distance from the shot point.
Gain Code Input scale FDU DSU3
g1 1600 mv 0 dB 4 m/s²
g2 400 mV 12 dB 1 m/s²
Enter the desired distance (1 to 9999 m) in the Radius field and the
desired associated Gain Type (1 to 5), and use Add, Change, Delete as
required to generate a list of different channel type areas.
Note If the Radius / Gain type table is empty, the default channel type
will be used across the entire spread. 10
Shot Id.
Used to identify the first shot point in the Operation main window's
operation table. You can use one of the option buttons to choose either
the number contained in the “Record Number” field or that in the “Tape
Number” field of the SPS Relation file, or type the desired number in
the text box.
Process Type
Used to specify the Process Type (1 to 16) to use in the operation table.
Process types are defined using the Operation main window’s Setup
menu.
If you do not enter any value in this window, then the system will
default to the following settings:

December 4, 2006
10 Log
• Gain Type: will automatically default to “1”;

• Shot Id.: the Record Number contained in the Relation file will
automatically be used as first shot number;
• Process Type: will automatically default to “1”, except for those shot
points for which a Point Code is specified in the “Source” SPS file.
Because it is desirable to be able to specify the process type to be used
for each shot, even though no provision is made for this parameter in
the SPS format, Sercel has adopted the following convention: if zero
is entered here as the “Process Type”, then the value found in the
“Point Code” column in the SPS Source file will be used as the actual
process type to use.
For this reason, it is recommended that when SPS files are loaded, the
sequence: Receiver, Source and Relation (alphabetical order - R, S,
X) be adopted.

December 4, 2006
Log
Operator reports
Operator reports
In this section:
• Observer Logs (page 419)
• APS (page 420)
• APS Verbose (page 421)
• Source COG (page 421)
• Receiver position history data (page 421)
Observer Logs
In the navigation pane, open the Results folder and Logs subfolder.
Open the desired swath folder and then do the following:
1. Right-click on the log file you want to export. Choose Observer
Log from the menu that pops up. This opens an editor view
containing the resulting file.
2. You can choose which fields to include in the report by clicking
on any column heading and selecting “Customize” from the menu 10
that pops up. For details, see Customizing tables (page 49). After
customizing the format of a report, clicking on Save will let you
save your options to a named file that you can reuse as a template
at a later date (by choosing it from the “Select a Preset” option
button and clicking Apply). To save you changes, click OK.
3. If several views are open, select the one you want to save (click on
its tab).

December 4, 2006
10 Log
Operator reports
(2) Right-click to
customize
(1) Right-click to
open
Figure 10-8
4. Then you can print it out (e. g. using the File menu). If you want
to export it to another program, select Save from the File menu (or
from the toolbar ). In the dialog box that shows up, enter a
name for the file (in the “File Name” field), choose a directory
where to save it (from the “Save In” option button), and click
Save.
APS
(VE432 users only).
Vibrator QC and co-ordinate information can be exported in the form of
SPS-like files to an external computer for the purpose of QC analysis or
to the Positioning main window for geographical display.
The APS option extracts the status figures returned for every sweep by
each vibrator. Any field with invalid data is left blank. Unless the
coordinates supplied by the radiopositioning receiver to the DPG are
already in a projection format, the vibrator coordinates are converted

December 4, 2006
Log
Operator reports
using the projection selected in the Positioning window. Check to see if

the appropriate projection is selected.
(See the format in 428XL User’s Manual Volume 2).
APS Verbose
(VE432 users only). As the name suggests, the verbose version gives
additional information (See the format in 428XL User’s Manual
Volume 2).
Source COG
The following information on the Centre Of Gravity of the source is
logged into a daily file identified by its julian day:
• Identification (Line Number, Point Number, Point index from the
input SPS Source file) of the planned shot points,
• Position and QC status of the computed COG,
• Deviation between planned source positions and actual source COG
positions.
The file can be exported in SPS-like format (see 428XL User’s Manual
10
Vol. 2 for the detailed format).
Receiver position history data

The following information, collected and saved to a history file during
operation, can be viewed and exported:
• Type of field unit identified,
• Date and time when it was last seen,
• Receiver position occupied when it was last seen,
• Geographical position (if supplied) occupied when it was last seen.
(See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 2 for the detailed format).

December 4, 2006
10 Log
Operator reports

December 4, 2006
Chapter
11 Plotter

• The Banner setup (page 427)
• Selecting the traces to plot (page 433)
• Plot parameters for production shots (page 436)
• Test records (page 443)

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
The main window
The main window

This client window is dedicated to parameters that define what is
displayed on monitor records and how it appears.
Figure 11-1
PLOTTER software is dedicated to processing the geophysical data

(scaling, filtering, AGC) for plotters. It supports 12'' and 24'' Plotters
(selection should be made in the Install window).
It performs the conversion to graphic data (rasterisation) in order to
print it out.
Whatever the interpolation, the maximum number of samples of each
trace plotted is 14844.
Note Traces are numbered from bottom to top, Aux traces at the top.

December 4, 2006
Plotter
The main window
You can choose to display the complete data (or part of it) for every
shot, or display one and the same trace for all shots.
By navigating in the left-hand pane, you can access different setup
menus that allow you to adjust AGC and plot parameters differently 11
depending on the type of input data (normal shot, Field tests, Instrument
tests).
• The “Normal” folder contains your plot parameters for production
shots. It allows you to have special settings for shots with no
processing (in the “Raw” folder) and different settings for shots with
correlated and/or stacked data (in the “Vibro Stack” folder).
• The “Field Test” folder, as the name suggests, contains your plot
parameters for sensor tests (Noise, Tilt, Distortion, etc.).
• Likewise, the “Instrument Test” folder contains your plot parameters
for instrument tests (Noise, Distortion, Gain&Phase, CMRR,
Crosstalk, etc.).
Once the different parameters are programmed and activated (by
clicking on Apply), the system automatically uses the sets of
parameters matching the input data.
File menu
Using the Load / Save commands available from the File menu, all of
the current parameters that have been set up for the entire window can
be saved to or loaded from a named file. This feature can be useful for
storing configurations that have to be used periodically.
Warning: After installing a new software release, do not load any
parameters from files saved with earlier releases.
Plot Again
This button plots the last shot.
Plot Next
This button plots the next shot.

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
The main window
Abort Plot
This button stops the paper feed and cancels the current plot.

December 4, 2006
Plotter
The Banner setup
The Banner setup

To open this window, choose Banner from the Setup menu. It allows
you to choose which parameters to import from the seismic record file
and build the banner as you would like it to appear on your plots.
11
Building blocks
Figure 11-2
In the navigation pane on the left side are a number of folders containing
all the parameters that you can import into a banner. Choosing any of
them, by double-clicking on it (or dragging and dropping it into the
right-hand pane) causes the associated building block to appear in the
right-hand pane.
The right-hand pane is a text editor in which you can:
- Create a new line by pressing the Return key;
- Type any additional text you like;
- Select a text span by clicking before the first character to select,
pressing and holding down the SHIFT key , and then clicking
behind the last character to select (alternatively, you can press
and hold down the mouse left button and drag the mouse over the
text span to select).
- Move or delete text with the usual Cut, Copy & Paste key
combinations (CTRL+X, CTRL+C, CTRL+V).
The list box shows the list of existing banner formats. To define a new
banner format, enter its number in the Nb field and then click Add. To
December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
The Banner setup
make any changes in the list box, click on the desired row. To save your
changes, click Change (or Add, or Delete).
Double-clicking on a banner format in the list box has it appear in the
text editor so that you can make any changes required. To save your
changes, click Change (or Add, or Delete).
To save the current list of banner formats, click Apply. (To revert to the
former list, click Reset instead).
Global parameters
Parameter Description
Sample Rate Sampling interval (ms)

Type Of Filter
Swath Id
Swath Name
Exploitation mode
Date
Julian day Record day (1 to 366)
Year Record date (year)
Acq. Time
Acq. hour
Acq. minutes
Acq. seconds
Record parameters
File nb. File Number

Record Type
Record Length
Trace headers
Errors

December 4, 2006
Plotter
The Banner setup
Process parameters
Type of process 11
Auto cor. peak time Autocorrelation peak time
Max of max aux.
Max of max seismic
Max time values
report
Line parameters
Lowest Line Number in the Spread; specifies the origin of the

SFL
spread (along with SFN).
Lowest Receiver Position Number in the Spread; specifies the origin
SFN
of the spread (along with SFL).
Spread Nb
Type Of Spread
Live seis. traces Active seismic traces
Nb. of Live traces Number of active traces
Dead seis. traces Dead seismic traces
Nb. of dead traces Number of dead traces
Total nb. of traces Total number of traces
Nb. of seismic traces Number of seismic traces
Nb. of aux. traces Number of auxiliary traces
Total nb. of samples Total number of seismic samples contained in a block
Blaster Id Blaster Identification Number
Blaster status

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
The Banner setup
Shot parameters
Shot Nb Shot Number

Source Point Line
Source Point Nb Source Point Number
Source Point Index
Acq. length Acquistion length
Sweep length
Pilot length
Refraction delay
Current Stacking
Fold
Stacking Fold
Source Easting
Source Northing
Source Elevation
Type of source
Uphole time
Tb window
User header

December 4, 2006
Plotter
The Banner setup
Noise parameters
Noise EIim. Type Noise EIimination Type ( 11

Threshold var Threshold option (Hold or Variable)
History editing type
History range
History taper length
History threshold init
value
History zeroing
length
Nb. of windows Number of windows
Low traces percent
Low traces value
Noisy traces percent
Noisy traces value
Low noisy verbose
report

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
The Banner setup
Plot parameters
Plot type
Plot Control Type
High cut
High cut filter
Low cut
Low cut filter
Notch filter
Notch
Aux. gain
Seismic gain
AGC window length
WZ velocity
Inline spacing
Crossline spacing
Release time
Time exponent

December 4, 2006
Plotter
Selecting the traces to plot

For each type of record (production shots or tests), you can choose to
plot all traces or only groups of traces you specify, or one and the same
trace. To do that, you simply have to create a table containing the
11
description of each group of traces you would like to plot, for each type
of record:
1. Click on the desired type of record, e. g. the “Raw” subfolder (see
Figure 11-3) in the navigation pane to the left;
2. Enter the desired number of groups into the “Number of groups”
field;
3. Click in the “Group” field. As a result, the system automatically
creates the appropriate number of rows in the table so that you can
define each eligible group as you like with the parameters
described below.
4. Click on Apply.
3. Click to create
1. Choose type of the necessary 2. Specify how many
record rows in table groups you want to
describe
Use these fields to determine the recurrence

rate of the selected group or groups.
Figure 11-3 Selecting the traces to plot
Number of groups
This field is used to tell the system how many groups you want to
describe, so that it can create the necessary number of rows in the table.

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
Group
As you click in this field, the system automatically creates a row for
each group of traces to describe, depending on what you specify in the
“Number of groups” field.
A button is associated with each group (row), on the left of it, in the
table. You have to tick that button if you want the group to be plotted
when eligible. Its recurrence rate on the printout depends on what you
specify in the fields at the foot of the table, determining “how many”
groups will be plotted and “how often” (every N records).
How many
groups How often
Figure 11-4
Aux
Tick this button if you want to plot auxiliary traces.
Sensor code
This field lets you to choose either all the traces specified regardless of
the type of sensor, or only traces with the type of sensor you specify.
Channel/Line
Choosing Channel lets you determine the eligible group by specifying
the first trace to plot (“Start at” field), the number of traces to plot
(“Total” field) and the step (“Incr” field) to use in counting the traces.
The same group of traces from all lines will be eligible for plotting.
Choosing Line lets you determine the eligible group by specifying the
first line to plot (“Start at” field), the number of lines to plot (“Total”
field) and the step (“Incr” field) to use in counting the lines. All the
matching traces on the specified lines will be eligible for plotting.

December 4, 2006
Plotter
Start at
Used to specify sequential number of either the first trace or the first line
(depending on whether the “Channel” or “Line” option is selected)
eligible in the group. 11
Total
Used to specify either the number of traces from each line or the number
of lines (depending on whether the “Channel” or “Line” option is
selected) eligible in the group.
A button is associated with the “Total” field. If you tick that button, then
system will automatically determine the total number of traces eligible
in the group, depending on what you specify in the other fields. If you
untick the button, then you have to specify how many traces or lines you
want the group to include.
Incr
Used to specify the sequential number increment step for counting in
either the traces or the lines (depending on whether the “Channel” or
“Line” option is selected) eligible in the group.

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
Plot parameters for production shots

In this section:
• Processing setup (page 436)
• Rendering setup (page 440)
• Format setup (page 440)
Processing setup
Some of the parameters appearing in the Processing pane are specific to
the kind of data to be plotted. Below is a description of all the
parameters prompted after you click on the Normal folder in the
navigation pane.
Figure 11-5
Choose the desired processing from the “Control” option button, then
set the associated parameters.
AGC
For “Normal” shots only. With the AGC processing option, the gain of
each trace is automatically adjusted, depending on the level of the
signal.
If you choose this option, the system computes the average sample
value over a time window you have to specify in the associated
“Window Length” field.

December 4, 2006
Plotter
The average value is used to determine a gain that is applied to the

sample at the centre of the window. The system repeatedly updates the
average value as the time window shifts from the time when AGC starts
being applied to the end of the plot.
11
Geographic AGC
For “Normal” shots only. The Geographic AGC processing option lets
the system compute source-to-receivers distances from the geographic
coordinates available (you do not have to supply the “Inline spacing”
and “CrossLine spacing”).
Note You have to click on Apply after entering SPS data.
Time exponent
(0.00 to 9.00). For “Normal” shots only. If you choose this option, the
same gain is applied to all traces. The gain increases as an exponential
function of the time over the whole trace. You simply have to specify
the value of the exponent.
Normalization
For “Normal” shots only. If you choose this option, then the system will
look for the maximum sample value on each trace to determine the
appropriate gain to be applied to the whole trace.
Window Length
(100 to 5000 ms). For “Normal” shots only. Time interval over which
the system computes the average value of samples to determine the
AGC gain, if the AGC or Geographic AGC option is used.
Wz Velocity
(Allowable range: 1 to 99999 m/s). For “Normal” shots only. If you
choose AGC or Geographic AGC as a processing to plot the traces, a
“Wz Velocity“field is available that allows you to specify the
propagation velocity of the shot wave. This will enable the system to
December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
calculate the time when the AGC should be applied to the traces on the
plotter, deducing it from the source-to-receivers distances.
Note By default the source-to-receiver distance is assumed

determined in metres, therefore the velocity in metres/second.
If the distance is determined in any other unit, then the velocity
you enter should be expressed in the corresponding unit instead
of m/s (the unit must be consistent with SPS data).
Inline spacing
(1.0 to 999.0 m). For “Normal” shots only. Distance between receiver
points (i. e. traces) in each line. Used to determine the time when AGC
should be applied, unless you choose the Geographic AGC option.
CrossLine spacing
(1.0 to 999.0 m). For “Normal” shots only. Distance between lines.
Used to determine the time when AGC should be applied, unless you
choose the Geographic AGC option.
Scaling
Scaling is used to specify an amplitude gain (dB) for the traces plotted,
to magnify or shrink the traces. Changing the Scaling setting for any
shot will make it more difficult to compare the plot with another shot.
Note Adjust both Scaling and Clipping as required for better

legibility of the plot.
• Seismic (-144 to 144 dB). Sets the amplitude of seismic
traces on the plot.
• Auxiliary (-144 to 144 dB). Sets the amplitude of auxiliary
traces on the plot.

December 4, 2006
Plotter
Filters
For “Normal” shots only. These three buttons allow you to specify a
Low Cut frequency, a High Cut frequency and a Notch filter frequency
for the traces to plot. 11
Note The three parameters (Low Cut, High Cut, Notch) are not
applied to Auxiliary traces.
• Low Cut If you wish to set a low-cut filter for the plot, choose
Low Cut and type the desired low-cut frequency
(5 to 500 Hz) in the associated field. If you wish to
remove the filter, unselect Low Cut.
• High Cut If you wish to set a high-cut filter for the plot, choose
High Cut and type the desired high-cut frequency
(30 to 500 Hz) in the associated field. If you wish to
remove the filter, unselect High Cut.
• Notch If you wish to set a notch filter for the plot, choose
Notch and type the desired notch frequency
(30.00 to 500.00 Hz) in the associated field. If you
wish to remove the filter, unselect Notch.
Note The Low Cut and High Cut buttons allow you to set up different
types of filters:
Band pass
F F F
High cut Low cut Low cut High cut
Figure 11-6

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
Rendering setup
Figure 11-7
Page setup
Allows you to specify which type of banner to use. This determines the
content of the banner to appear ahead of plots. See The Banner setup
(page 427).
Orientation
This option button allows you to choose the orientation of plots
(Portrait/Landscape).
Format setup
Figure 11-8

December 4, 2006
Plotter
Time Sequential
The traces are plotted along the paper.
Trace Sequential 11
The traces are plotted across the paper width.
Global rendering for Seismic and Aux

This option lets you customize the global aspect of the plotter output by
means of the parameters below.
Mode
You can choose between the following options:
Wiggle
+VA Wiggle +VA
-VA Wiggle -VA
Figure 11-9
Traces/inch
(Auto or 1 to 99) Number of traces to plot per inch. Choosing Auto will
adjust the trace spacing as a function of the number of traces.
Note Disproportionate labels may result if you choose “Auto” and

“Time Sequential” with too few traces to plot.
Clipping
(1 to 10 traces) This button is used to specify the number of traces that
any trace is allowed to overlap. Any trace exceeding the specified
overlapping limit is clipped to that limit.

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
Note Adjust both Scaling and Clipping as required for better

legibility of the plot.
Time
• Start: (0 to 64000 ms) Time of the first sample to plot.
• Length: (Auto or 1 to 64000 ms) If you choose Auto, the
system will automatically set the length of the plot to
the maximum or to the best, depending on the record
parameters. Otherwise, specify the desired length for
the plot.
• Interpolation: (Auto or 16, 8, 4, 2 1 to 1, or 1 to 2, 4, 8, 16). Number
of dots interpolated by the system for each sample.
If you choose Auto, then the system will automatically set the
interpolation to the best, depending on the record parameters.
Examples: 1 to 4 means that 4 dots are plotted for each sample (this
expands the plot); 4 to 1 means that each dot stands for 4 samples (this
shrinks the plot).

December 4, 2006
Plotter
Test records
Test records
If you need specific plot parameters for any type of test, choose the
desired folder in the navigation pane and then set the parameters as you
like. For test records, you have a single processing parameter to set
11
(Scaling). For other parameters, see Rendering setup (page 440) and
Format setup (page 440).
Sensor tests
Figure 11-10
Instrument tests
Figure 11-11

December 4, 2006
11 Plotter
Test records

December 4, 2006
Chapter

• Working with other vibrator electronics (page 448)

December 4, 2006
The main window
The main window

If you are using a vibrator system other than the VE432, you have to use
this client window to set three parameters required for processing the
seismic data. It allows you to save each different setting of those
parameters as an “Acquisition Type”. You are required to choose which
Acquisition Type to use when you create a “Process Type” in the
Operation main window.
Figure 12-1
To create a new Acquisition Type, fill in the fields above the list box,
then click Add. To make changes, double-click on the desired row in the
list box, make the necessary changes and then click Add or Change or
Delete, as required.
Sweep Length
Duration (seconds) of the sweep signal used as seismic source.
Pilot Length
Duration (seconds) of the signal used as reference in the correlation
process.

December 4, 2006
Other vibrator electronics
The main window
“Sweep Length” and “Pilot Length” are usually equal. For more
information see More About Correlation on page 262.
Threshold Type
The historical noise elimination process makes use of noise elimination
thresholds. The Threshold Type parameter is used to assign a type of 12
noise elimination threshold to each Acquisition Type (e.g. Threshold
Type #1). Acquisition types with the same length and the same energy
spreading can be associated with the same Threshold Type number.
(The maximum allowable number of Threshold Types is 16 whereas
you can create up to 32 different Acquisition Types).

December 4, 2006
Working with other vibrator electronics
Working with other vibrator electronics

To work with a vibrator system other than a VE432, you have to choose
that option in the Installation setup window (see Vibrator type on
page 63).
To connect the vibrator electronics to the LCI-428, see “Connectors and
cables” in the 428XL Installation manual.

December 4, 2006
Index
Index
· Nb U2: 98
· normal U1: 391
· Number (SEGD) U2: 22
· numeric view, normal U1: 395
· test, TMS428 TM: 89
· type, Process type U1: 203
· type, VE432 U1: 362
Acquisition type tables (SEGD) U2: 21
Action (see Shortcuts)
Activity
IM = Installation Manual · window U1: 80
U1 = User’s Manual Vol. 1 ADC
· test, TMS428) TM: 85
U2 = User’s Manual Vol. 2 Add
· button U1: 25
U3 = User’s Manual Vol. 3 · to query U1: 315
· to quick launch, TMS428 TM: 53
TM = Technical Manual Additional
· blocks (SEGD general header) U2: 13
· effects U1: 310
Address
Numerics · 428XL local network IM: 32
3592 cartridge dirve IM: 122 · Client computer IM: 90
3C · FUJI 3x90, changing IM: 112
· polarity, SEGD U3: 211 · FUJI 3x90, displaying IM: 113
· Intranet IM: 53, IM: 54, IM: 59
· LCI card U1: 60
A · LTO, changing IM: 118
Abort · MAC U1: 64
· button, Operation U1: 197 · TMS428 TM: 38
· Plot U1: 426 Adjusting
· TMS428 tests TM: 47 · clock, LCI TM: 15
Absolute Administration
· spread U1: 123 · server U1: 36
· Spread, tests U1: 166 Advance II U2: 106
Acceleration Advanced
· baseplate, monitoring U1: 366 · connection parameters U1: 32
· mass, monitoring U1: 366 · mode, LT428 IM: 191, IM: 202,
Acquisition IM: 204
· Error description (SEGD) U2: 22 · process type U1: 201
· graphic view, normal U1: 392 Again
· index, process type U1: 202 · Plot U1: 425
· Length U3: 222 AGC
· Length (SEGD) U2: 19 · plotter U1: 436
· local U1: 376 Air
IM = Installation Manual — TM = Technical Manual — U# = User’s Manual Vol. # 449

December 4, 2006
Index
· gun (SPS) U2: 62 U2: 22

· pressure psi (SPS) U2: 76 Automation
Alarm · Continuous, shooting U1: 222
· Positioning U1: 305 · Discontinuous, shooting U1: 223
Alert · Look U1: 224
· system U1: 305 · Manual, shooting U1: 223
Alias filter · shooting U1: 222
· Frequency at - 3dB point (SEGD) Aux
U2: 18 · Channel contents (SPS) U2: 59, U2: 72
· Slope (SEGD) U2: 18 · Line U1: 116
Angle from skew (SPS) U2: 58, U2: 70 · Process Descriptor U1: 205
Antenna · Traces, number of U2: 19
· Height U2: 100 Auxiliary
Append · channels U1: 116
· vib (Look) U1: 375 · channels, Comments U1: 118
Apply · channels, deployment IM: 176
· All, Survey setup U1: 104 · channels, Gain U1: 117
· button U1: 26 · channels, Instrument tests U1: 167
· Sensor, Survey setup U1: 104 · trace scaling U1: 438
APS Average
· File format U2: 95 · distortion U2: 96, U2: 98
Archiving · force U2: 96, U2: 98
· configuring U1: 65 · ground stiffness U2: 96, U2: 98
· system status U1: 51 · ground viscosity U2: 96, U2: 98
Array · phase U2: 96, U2: 98
· Forming (SEGD) U2: 18
Arrays, sub, number of U2: 76 B
Assembly Backup
· Location (SEGD) U2: 31 · GoBook Q200 IM: 158
· Serial number (SEGD) U2: 31 · setup U1: 79
· Type (SEGD) U2: 31 Backward
Authorization · playback U1: 336
· granting U1: 37 Base scan interval (SEGD) U2: 14
Auto Baseplate
· Corr Peak Time U1: 204 · acceleration, monitoring U1: 366
· Export U1: 325 · velocity, monitoring U1: 366
· Level, vib drive U1: 388
Basic
· Lift, VE432 U1: 364
· pilot signal (Acquisition type) U1: 363
· Look U1: 128
· sweep signal (Acquisition type)
· noise editing U1: 237
U1: 363
· saving TMS428 reports TM: 53
Basic Type
Auto/Manual
· LOG, dB/Hz U1: 349
· noise editing threshold U1: 237
· LOG, dB/octave U1: 352
· VE432 U1: 372
· Setup U1: 346
Autocorrelation peak time (SEGD) · Taper U1: 346
450 IM = Installation Manual — TM = Technical Manual — U# = User’s Manual Vol. #

December 4, 2006
Index
· Tn U1: 353 C
Batteries (Show/hide) U1: 93
Battery Cable
· GoBook Q200 IM: 154 · calibration TM: 48
· Limit, LT428 IM: 193 · length, Line IM: 173, IM: 174
· polarity test (TMS428) TM: 84 · Line cable length IM: 173, IM: 174
· threshold LED test TM: 83 · path U1: 99
· voltage limit U1: 93 · replacing, LAUL TM: 111
Beginner U1: 44 · SGD-S Blaster IM: 292
Blade 2000 Calibration
· clock, LCI TM: 15
· Shock-mount parts IM: 44
· FDU U3: 85, TM: 76
Blade 2500
· meter and test cables TM: 48
· Shock-mount parts IM: 43
Camp
Blaster
· distance to, alarm U1: 308
· Advance II U2: 106
· connector, LCI428 IM: 284, IM: 285
Capacitance
· error (SEGD) U2: 30
· controllers U1: 240
· high limit (SEGD) U2: 30
· id (SEGD) U2: 20
· low limit (SEGD) U2: 30
· MACHA U2: 113
· value (SEGD) U2: 30
· SGDS U2: 114
· Shallow Sequencer U2: 111 Capacity
· Shot Pro U2: 107 · Processing U3: 221
· signals IM: 286 Cartridge
· status (SEGD) U2: 20 · insertion U1: 340
· type U1: 63 Cartridge drive
Blasters · Shock-mount parts IM: 110
· interfacing U2: 103 Centre
Blocking · button (mouse) U1: 95
· trace U1: 329 Change
Blocks in General Trailer U2: 15 · button U1: 25
BoomBox U1: 63 Changing
Box · LCI U1: 58
· type, detour U1: 119 · Serial number (TMS428) TM: 95
Break Channel
· Point U1: 215 · data error overscaling (SEGD) U2: 33
Browser · edited status (SEGD) U2: 33
· fibre U1: 60
· settings U1: 34
· filter (SEGD) U2: 33
Buffer U1: 60
· filter response U3: 31
Build · gain control method (SEGD) U2: 17
· feature query U1: 314 · gain scale (SEGD) U2: 32
Button U1: 18 · increment (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 81
Bypass · number (SEGD) U2: 31
· file exports U1: 326 · process (SEGD) U2: 33
Bytes per scan (SEGD) U2: 13 · sample to mV conversion factor (SEGD)
U2: 33

December 4, 2006
Index
· Set End Time (SEGD) U2: 17 · test, FDU U3: 139

· Set Number (SEGD) U2: 26 · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 71
· set number (SEGD) U2: 17 · test, Sensor U3: 158
· Set Starting Time (SEGD) U2: 17 COG
· set, number of channels in U2: 17 · Easting U2: 100
· sets per record U1: 78, U2: 14 · elevation U2: 100
· skipping U1: 131 · file U2: 100
· type (SEGD) U2: 31 · Northing U2: 100
· type id (SEGD) U2: 33 · radius threshold U1: 277
· Type Identification (SEGD) U2: 17 · source position (estimated) U1: 298
· type, Log shooting setup U1: 417 · status U2: 100
Channels, number of (SPS) U2: 59, · to source deviation U2: 100
U2: 71 Comments
Charge · Auxiliary channels U1: 118
· Depth U2: 75 · LT428 results IM: 211
· Length U2: 75 · observer, setup U1: 239
Check · SEGD U2: 24
· Line U1: 174 · setup, Operation window U1: 217
Checkerboard Common
· view U1: 98 · Mode Rejection U1: 169
Circular bearing of H256 (SPS) U2: 58, · mode, Field (TMS428) TM: 71
U2: 69 · mode, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 75
Cleaning · mode, test network U3: 108
· boxes IM: 163 Common mode
· plugs IM: 162, TM: 151 · rejection ratio, geophones U3: 190
Click U1: 18 Communications
· right, Line window U1: 97 · protocol, source controllers U2: 103
Client Compound
· installing IM: 87 · basic sweep signal U1: 359
· main window U1: 44 Computation Domain U2: 99
· SPS U2: 57, U2: 67 Connecting
Clipping · FDU link, TMS408 TM: 55
· method (noise elimination) U1: 257 · LAUL, TMS408 TM: 56
· noise editing type U1: 235 · LAUX, TMS408 TM: 57
· plotter U1: 441 · LT428 IM: 183
Clock · TMS428 device under test TM: 55
· internal U1: 76 Connection
· LCI TM: 15 · crew Web site U1: 52
· time w.r.t. GMT (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 67 · opening a session U1: 32
Cluster U1: 230 Connector (see Replacing)
CMRR Connectors
· geophone string U3: 190 · Blaster1 IM: 284
· Instrument (TMS428) TM: 75 · Blaster2 IM: 285
· Instrument test U1: 169 · FDU Input IM: 288
· test record result recovery U3: 83 · LAUL

December 4, 2006
Index
XDEV IM: 289 · Pilot Aux channel U1: 204

· LAUL428 IM: 289 · Time domain U3: 182
· LAUX Correlator, noise supp (SPS) U2: 61,
LINE IM: 290 U2: 75
Power IM: 290 CRC errors U3: 197
TRANSVERSE IM: 290 Create
XDEV IM: 291 · selection U1: 315
Consumption Crew
· port, TMS428 TM: 87 · name, Comment (SPS) U2: 59, U2: 71
Continuity · number U1: 343
· test limit U1: 109 · setup U1: 74
Continuous · vibrators U1: 343
· shooting U1: 222 Crossline
Control · spacing, AGC U1: 438
· type (SPS) U2: 61, U2: 75 Crosstalk
· unit serial number (SEGD) U2: 32 · Instrument test U1: 168
· unit type (SEGD) U2: 32 · test record result recovery U3: 84
Controller Crosstalk test
· source, time management U1: 76 · DSU3 U3: 174
Conversion Custom
· sample to mV U2: 33 · basic sweep signal U1: 356
Converting · sweep file (how to load) U1: 358
· samples to mV U3: 185 Customer
Coord. status final/prov (SPS) U2: 62, · support U1: 71
U2: 76 Customizing
Coordinate location (SPS) U2: 57, · TMS428 tests TM: 63
U2: 67 Cut off
Copy · error (SEGD) U2: 30
· and Paste U1: 28 · high limits (SEGD) U2: 30
· function (Export window) U1: 337 · low limit (SEGD) U2: 30
· tape, file U3: 14 · value (SEGD) U2: 30
Copying Cygwin IM: 92
· files to tape U1: 339
CopyMedia U3: 14 D
Copyrights U1: 71
Correction DAC
· factor U3: 86 · Common-Mode resistance U3: 108
· factor, FDU calibration TM: 76 · fine current correction U3: 99
Correlation · rough current correction U3: 93
· After Stack, process type U1: 211 Damp coeff, natural freq. (SPS) U2: 60
· After stack, theory of U1: 259 Damping coeff, natural freq (SPS)
· Before Stack, process type U1: 209 U2: 73
· data distribution U1: 265 Data
· Frequency domain U3: 182 · Bypass U1: 326
· more about U1: 262 · computation domain, vib QC U1: 369

December 4, 2006
Index
· record sorting order (SPS) U2: 54 · Generic spread U1: 126

Data rate · of grid units (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 68
· Line U3: 221 · of survey area (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 66
· Transverse U3: 221 · Receiver section U1: 106
Date · Survey U1: 105
· of survey (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 66 Desensitization IM: 231, U1: 154
· SEGD U2: 22 Desktop U1: 35
Datum U1: 316 Detect
· type, setup U1: 273 · end of tape U1: 340
Datum Type setup Detection
· Datum U1: 316 · fiber, TMS428 TM: 87
· Ellipsoid U1: 316 Detour U1: 118
· Geoid U1: 316 · skipped receiver points U1: 135
Day Deviation, COG to source U2: 100
· of Year U2: 99 Dialog box U1: 18
· of year (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 79 Digital
Dead seis traces, number of U2: 19 · Sensor Unit, deployment IM: 168
Deboost Disable
· basic sweep signal U1: 360 · radio U1: 162
Default Disassembling
· Channel type, Log U1: 417 · DSU TM: 106
Delay · FDU TM: 101
· at end of Acq. U1: 232 · LAUL TM: 112
· at end of VP U1: 232 · LAUR TM: 124
· basic sweep signal U1: 360 · LAUX TM: 118
· lift up U1: 389 · LRU TM: 132
· no-move alarm U1: 308 · TFOI TM: 187
· radio, measuring U1: 384 · TREP TM: 139
· radio, VE432 U1: 382 Discharge
· refraction, process type U1: 202 · ESD protection TM: 13
· setup, Operation window U1: 232 Discontinuous
· speed alarm U1: 309 · shooting U1: 223
Delete Disk
· button U1: 26 · buffer U1: 60
Depth · record, setup U1: 79
· charge U2: 75 Display
· towing U2: 76 · mode, LT428 IM: 209
Descale Multiplier (SEGD) U2: 17 · Traces per inch U1: 441
Description Distance
· absolute spread U1: 123 · no-move alarm U1: 308
· Auxiliary channels U1: 116 Distortion U2: 96, U2: 98
· Channels (Aux), Instrument tests · Instrument test U1: 168
U1: 167 · Sensor test U1: 171, U3: 163
· Channels (tests) U1: 166 · test record result recovery U3: 76
· Generic Line U1: 125 · test, FDU U3: 136

December 4, 2006
Index
· test, TMS428 TM: 75 · Output button U1: 203

Distortion test Dump stacking fold (SEGD) U2: 22
· DSU U3: 173 Duplicating, tape, file U3: 14
Diversity Duplication, sample U3: 197
· stack U1: 234
· stack (theory of) U1: 259
Double-click U1: 18
E
Download e428 software
· from crew Web site U1: 53 · licence U1: 61
· setup (firmware) U1: 184 Earth
DPG · ground resistor U3: 114
· number of U1: 63 Easting, COG U2: 100
· Slave U1: 344 Editing
Drag U1: 18 · Noise U1: 234
Drag and drop · number of windows (noise) U1: 235
· base camp U1: 292 · Spike U1: 256
· recording unit U1: 292 · system parameters (Log) U1: 410
· source (Positioning) U1: 294 · type (noise) U1: 235
Drive · Zeroing Length (noise) U1: 236
· level U2: 96, U2: 98 · Zeroing Taper Length (noise) U1: 235
high U1: 388 Effect
low U1: 388 · speed alert U1: 310
· tape, install U1: 65 Electrostatic
· transfer to U3: 221 · discharge TM: 13
DSD Elevation
· Get U1: 379 · antenna height U2: 100
· network U1: 344 · COG U2: 100
· Network, Navigation U1: 242 · reference U1: 276
· reference signal U1: 366 Ellipsoid U1: 316
· setting U1: 378 Ellipsoidal
· status, get U1: 365 · model U1: 276
DSP Emergency
· DRAM & DPR test TM: 82 · alarm U1: 305
DSU Enable
· Deployment IM: 168 · instruments U1: 59
· disassembly instructions TM: 106 · radio U1: 162
· Re-assembly instructions TM: 107 Enabled
DSU3 · export U1: 315
· theory of tests U3: 167 End
· tilt correction U1: 146 · colour map scale U1: 312
· trace correction formula U3: 209 · of media U1: 333
DSU3-428 · of tape, detecting U1: 340
· in Line window U1: 138 End-of-line plug IM: 172
· test specifications U3: 229 EOF U1: 332
Dump EOM U1: 333

December 4, 2006
Index
Error · header length (SEGD) U2: 14

· leakage U1: 129
· only, TMS428 report TM: 54 F
Errors
· CRC U3: 197 Factor to metre (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 69
ESD TM: 13 Farthest
Estimated · Rcv Nb, LT428 IM: 200
· source COG U1: 298 FDU
Ethernet · Calibration U3: 85
· port, testing (TMS428) TM: 91 · connector, replacing TM: 142
Excitation Overload U2: 98 · disassembly instructions TM: 101
· INPUT connector IM: 288
Expanded file number (SEGD) U2: 15,
· Input polarity IM: 288
U2: 16 · Max number between LAUs IM: 174,
Explosive IM: 175
· source type setup U1: 227 · Number in link, LT428 IM: 218
Explosive (SPS) U2: 62 · Power supply IM: 173
Exponent, subscans U2: 17 · reassembly instructions TM: 102
Exponential · unit type (SEGD) U2: 31
· basic sweep signal U1: 353 FDU-428
· time, plotter U1: 437 · test specifications U3: 227
Export Feature
· Auto/Manual U1: 325 · property names U1: 312
· client window U1: 317 Fiber
· enabled U1: 315 · detection, TMS428 TM: 87
Exporting Fibre
· LT428 results IM: 212 · channel U1: 60
Exports Fibre Optics
· configuring U1: 65 · allowable loss TM: 203
Extended · connector, replacing TM: 195
· channel set number (SEGD) U2: 18, · repair kits TM: 186
U2: 26 · repairs TM: 185
· Channel Sets/Scan Types (SEGD) · splices, number of TM: 203
U2: 15 Field
· file number (SEGD) U2: 26 · computer system(s) (SPS) U2: 57,
· header (SEGD) U2: 19 U2: 67
· header blocks (SEGD) U2: 15 · electronics, upgrading U1: 184
· header flag (SEGD) U2: 18 · electronics, upgrading via XDEV
· header length (SEGD) U2: 14 IM: 81
· QC, vib U1: 369 · on/off U1: 88
· receiver line number (SEGD) U2: 27 · record increment (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 81
· receiver point number (SEGD) U2: 27 · record number (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 81
· Record Length (SEGD) U2: 15 · tape number (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 81
External · test limits, LT428 IM: 194
· header (SEGD) U2: 24 · test, automation U1: 224
· header blocks (SEGD) U2: 15 · test, LT428 IM: 204

December 4, 2006
Index
· update mode U1: 85, U1: 170, Floppy disk

U1: 171 · specifications (SPS) U2: 54, U2: 55
Field Units (see Instruments) FM4 plug assembly
File · ST+ cable TM: 167
· count (SEGD) U2: 22 · WPSR cable TM: 172
· duplicating U3: 14 FO Window U1: 371
· Header block (SEGD) U2: 13 Force U2: 96, U2: 98
· Load/Save U1: 425 · ground, monitoring U1: 366
· menu (TMS428) TM: 46 · Overload U2: 98
· number (SEGD) U2: 13, U2: 26 Form
· packager U1: 51 · Line, LT428 IM: 199
Files · Transverse, LT428 IM: 207
· per tape U1: 328 Format
· per tape (SEGD) U2: 22 · APS U2: 95
Filter · code (SEGD) U2: 13
· alias Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS) U2: 59, · instrument test limit U2: 37
U2: 71 · SEGD U2: 11
· low Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS) U2: 59, · Source controllers U2: 103
U2: 72 · SPS U2: 49
· LT428 IM: 191 · SPS-like U2: 95
· notch Hz, -3 dB points (SPS) U2: 59 · synthetic file U2: 41
· notch Hz, -3dB points (SPS) U2: 72 · version num. (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 66
· playback U3: 19 Forward
· response, channel U3: 31 · playback U1: 336
· servo control U1: 387 Fourier
· type U1: 74 · Transform U3: 182
· type (SEGD) U2: 23 Frequency
Filters · domain U3: 182
· plotter U1: 439 · LRU IM: 228, U1: 150
Firing · Nyquist U1: 75
· Order (FO), process type U1: 201 From channel (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 81
Firmware From receiver (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 82
· updating U1: 184 FTP
· updating, TMS428 TM: 47 · server U1: 65
· updating, via XDEV IM: 81 · server setup U1: 331
· upgrading (TMS428) TM: 93 · server, installing on PC IM: 142
· version, reading (TMS428) TM: 92 FUJI 3x90
First · address, changing IM: 112
· Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 18 · address, displaying IM: 113
· Timing Word (SEGD) U2: 26 Functions
· waypoint U1: 281 · Test U1: 164
Fleet · VE432 U1: 372
· Ready U1: 230
· vibrator, APS format U2: 96, U2: 98
· vibrator, crew U1: 344

December 4, 2006
Index
G · parallel U3: 189

· series U3: 189
Gain · strings U3: 188
· Auxiliary channels U1: 117 Geophysical contractor (SPS) U2: 57,
· code U1: 123 U2: 67
· code, absolute spread U1: 123 Geozone
· error, Instrument test U1: 169 · alarm U1: 306
· geophone string U3: 189
Get
· Instrument tests U1: 167
· DSD U1: 379
· LT428 IM: 191
· DSD status U1: 365
· Preamplifier, 0 dB U3: 89
· Preamplifier, 12 dB U3: 118
Getting
· started TM: 40
· Seismonitor U1: 94
· shooting setup, Log U1: 416 Getting started U1: 31
· test record result recovery U3: 77 Global
· test, FDU U3: 131 · rendering, plotter U1: 441
· test, TMS428 TM: 75 Go
Gain test · starting a shot U1: 196
· DSU U3: 172 · Topographic view U1: 89, U1: 91
Gap U1: 106 GoBook
· between receiver sections U1: 113 · connecting IM: 183
General · Getting started IM: 184
· Header block 1 (SEGD) U2: 13 · Q200 IM: 181
· Header block 2 (SEGD) U2: 15 GoBook Q200
· Header block 3 (SEGD) U2: 16 · Backup IM: 158
· Header Block Number (SEGD) U2: 15, · Battery IM: 154
U2: 16 · Installing IM: 155
· LT428 parameters IM: 187, IM: 191 · quick guide IM: 152
· Trailer blocks, number of U2: 15 · Reinstalling IM: 159
Generate GPS
· report U1: 315 · port, testing (TMS428) TM: 91
Generic · time management U1: 76
· spread U1: 125 Grabbing
· spread, description U1: 126 · VP U1: 278
Geodetic datum Graphic
· parameters (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 68 · view, normal acquisition U1: 392
· spheroid (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 68 · view, Positioning window U1: 282
Geographic Graphic view (see Topographic)
· AGC U1: 437 Graphics
Geographic (see Topographic) · how to select U1: 28
Geoid U1: 316 Gravity test, DSU U3: 180
Geoidal Grid
· model U1: 276 · coord. at origin (SPS) U2: 58, U2: 69
Geophone · origin (SPS) U2: 58, U2: 69
· arrangement U3: 191 Ground
· number per trace U3: 188 · earth resistor U3: 114

December 4, 2006
Index
· force, monitoring U1: 366 · editing type (SEGD) U2: 21

· stiffness U2: 96, U2: 98 · range (SEGD) U2: 21
· TMS408 TM: 28 · taper length (SEGD) U2: 21
· viscosity U2: 96, U2: 98 · threshold Init value (SEGD) U2: 21
· wing nut, replacing TM: 142 · zeroing length (SEGD) U2: 21
Group Historical
· geophone string U3: 193 · Noise Editing U1: 234
Guest History
· privileges U1: 38 · Line window U1: 102
Hold/Var U1: 237
H Hot
· Line U1: 71
Hardware Hour of day (SEGD) U2: 13
· installing IM: 31
HDOP U2: 99
Header I
· external, size U1: 78 Icon U1: 19
Header record ID
· description (SPS) U2: 66 · vibrator U1: 344
· specification (SPS) U2: 56 Identity
Height, antenna U2: 100 · card U1: 72
Help TM: 50 Identity Card U1: 52
· language U1: 34 Impedance
· send, emergeny alarm U1: 306 · geophone string U3: 189
HFVS Impulse
· deployment IM: 177 · Sensor test U3: 161
· enable U1: 221 Impulsive
· Hilbert transform U1: 358 · process type U1: 207
· technique U1: 400 · Stack process type U1: 208
Hide Inactive
· layer (Positioning) U1: 286 · units (detour) U1: 118
High Increment
· box, detour U1: 120 · LT428 Rcv num IM: 190
· channel, detour U1: 120 · Marker U1: 115
· drive level U1: 388 · Shot U1: 227
· Line, sync U1: 364 · VP to do U1: 229
· SN, detour U1: 120 Index
High-cut · box U1: 19
· filter, plotter U1: 439 · Source Point U1: 192
· playback filter U3: 20 Indicator
Hilbert · replacing TM: 148
· transform U1: 358 Init
Histogram · Thresh U1: 237
· view U1: 103 Inline
Historic · spacing, AGC U1: 438

December 4, 2006
Index
Input · tests, Resistance U3: 126

· resistance U3: 93 Instrument tests
· servo control loop U1: 387 · Crosstalk
Inserting DSU3 U3: 174
· cartridge U1: 340 Instruments
Install · Colour U1: 91
· window U1: 58 · Show/hide U1: 91
Installing Interfacing
· Client software IM: 87, IM: 88 · source controller U2: 103
· Ethernet plotter IM: 106 Internal
· FDPA428 software IM: 155 · ADC, testing (TMS428) TM: 85
· FTP server on PC IM: 142 · clock U1: 76
· Handheld PC software IM: 151 · time break (SEGD) U2: 21
· hardware IM: 31 Interpolation U1: 442
· laser link IM: 274 · sample U3: 197
· LT428 software IM: 155 Intranet
· patch (client) IM: 97 · address, configuring IM: 53, IM: 54,
· patch (server) IM: 77 IM: 59
· Redhat, server IM: 50 IP address
· server software IM: 70 · 428XL local network IM: 32
· Solaris IM: 63 · Client computer IM: 90
· TMS408 hardware TM: 28 · Intranet IM: 53, IM: 54, IM: 59
· TMS428 software TM: 30 · TMS428 TM: 38
· TMS428 software new release TM: 34 Irregular
· Vehicle tracking box IM: 149 · LT428 layout IM: 202, IM: 204
Instrument
· Code (I) tables (SPS) U2: 59
· Code (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 81 J
· Crosstalk U1: 168 JBOD FC U1: 60
· Distortion U1: 168 Julian
· Gain error U1: 169 · day, backup setup U1: 79
· Noise U1: 168 Julian day (SEGD) U2: 13
· Phase error U1: 169
· test limits U2: 37
· test limits, LT428 IM: 195 K
· test record recovery U3: 73 Kit
· test specifications U3: 227 · tools TM: 98
· tests U1: 167
· tests, CMRR (FDU) U3: 139
· tests, Distortion (FDU) U3: 136
L
· tests, FDU U3: 126 Lab
· tests, Gain&Phase U3: 131 · distance to, alarm U1: 308
· tests, LT428 IM: 203 Label
· tests, Noise U3: 128 · properties U1: 311
· tests, Offset U3: 130 Landscape
· tests, Pulse (FDU) U3: 142 · plotter U1: 440

December 4, 2006
Index
Language Leak
· help U1: 34 · testing TM: 150
Laser Link IM: 271 Leakage
· Installing IM: 274 · error U1: 129
· Specifications IM: 281 · error (SEGD) U2: 30
Last · limit (SEGD) U2: 30
· record, playback U1: 335 · Line port, TMS428 TM: 86
Lat. Long · Sensor test U1: 170
· initial line (SPS) U2: 58, U2: 69 · test U3: 153
· scale factor (SPS) U2: 58, U2: 69 · Test circuitry (LAU) U1: 129
Lat. of standard parallel(s) (SPS) U2: 57, · Test limit U1: 109
U2: 69 · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 72
LAU tests · value (SEGD) U2: 30
· Transmission TM: 88 LED
· XILINX loading TM: 83 · Run, testing (TMS428) TM: 85
LAUL428 Length
· cable replacement TM: 111 · pilot, other vibrator systems U1: 446
· connectors IM: 289 · record (SEGD) U2: 22
· disassembly instructions TM: 112 · record, process type U1: 201
· Power supply IM: 173 · sweep, other vibrator systems U1: 446
· reassembly instructions TM: 113 · time, plotter U1: 442
· spacing IM: 173, IM: 174 · Zeroing (noise) U1: 236
Launch · Zeroing Taper (noise) U1: 235
· quick, TMS428 tests TM: 53 Level
Launcher · auto, vib drive U1: 388
· bar, customizing U1: 43 Licence
· icons U1: 42 · code, entering U1: 61
LAUR · information about U1: 40
· disassembly instructions TM: 124 · LT428 IM: 185
· reassembly instructions TM: 125 · Plotter U1: 61
LAUX428 Lift
· connectors IM: 290, IM: 291 · up delay U1: 389
· disassembly instructions TM: 118 Limit
· Power supply IM: 173 · instrument test U2: 37
· reassembly instructions TM: 119 Limits (see Test limits)
Layer Line
· rename (Positioning) U1: 286 · check U1: 174
· show/hide (Positioning) U1: 286 · data rate U3: 221
Layout · Generic U1: 125
· LT428 IM: 191 · mapping to a logical line U1: 133
· setup U1: 111 · name U2: 96, U2: 98
LCI · name (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 64, U2: 77,
· address U1: 60 U2: 81, U2: 82
· changing U1: 58 · name, COG U2: 100
· oscillator, adjusting TM: 15 · Nb Inc, LT428 IM: 190

December 4, 2006
Index
· number U1: 105 · connecting to server U1: 32

· number format (SPS) U2: 58, U2: 70 · installing server software IM: 70
· port, leakage test (TMS428) TM: 86 · name U1: 34
· port, transmission test (TMS428) Logical
TM: 88 · line mapping U1: 133
· power polarity (TMS428) TM: 91 Long. of central meridian (SPS) U2: 58,
· skipping U1: 126 U2: 69
· socket, replacing TM: 143 Look
· splitting U1: 115 · Automatic U1: 224
· Test, LT428 IM: 188 · automatic U1: 128
· troubleshooting U1: 175 · DSD U1: 373
LINE connector · manual U1: 128
· LAUX IM: 290 · properties U1: 128
Linear · sensors U1: 89, U1: 91
· basic sweep signal U1: 348 · test (TMS428) TM: 92
· Phase U1: 75 Look&Feel U1: 35
· phase filter U3: 32 Loop
Link · LRU U1: 163
· examples IM: 166 · servo control U1: 387
· Number of FDUs, update LT428) Loss
IM: 218 · Fibre Optics repairs TM: 203
List Low
· box U1: 19 · box, detour U1: 119
Listening · channel, detour U1: 120
· time U1: 201 · drive level U1: 388
Live seis traces, number of U2: 19 · SN, detour U1: 119
LLX400. See Laser link · stacks, number of U2: 33
Load · Trace U1: 236
· Thresh U1: 238 · Trace Percentage (SEGD) U2: 21
Loading · Trace Value U1: 236
· system parameters U1: 411 · Trace Value (SEGD) U2: 21
· TMS428 software TM: 30 Low-cut
Local · Filter frequency (SEGD) U2: 18
· acquisition U1: 376 · Filter slope (SEGD) U2: 18
· disk U1: 60 · filter, plotter U1: 439
· ellipsoidal model U1: 276 · Playback filter U3: 20
· network IM: 25 LRU
· oscillator, testing (TMS428) TM: 88 · Desensitization IM: 231, U1: 154
· user U1: 33 · disassembly instructions TM: 132
LOG · Frequency IM: 228, U1: 150
· dB/Hz U1: 349 · Half-duplex IM: 227
· dB/octave U1: 352 · reassembly instructions TM: 133
Log · Sleep U1: 162
· files, compressing IM: 85 · Time Division Multiplex U1: 155
Log in LT

December 4, 2006
Index
· Line Nb IM: 189 Manual/Auto

· Position IM: 187, IM: 189 · noise editing threshold U1: 237
· Rcv Nb IM: 190 · VE432 U1: 372
· Sensor Type Nb IM: 191 Manufacturer’s
LT428 · code (SEGD) U2: 13
· connecting IM: 183 · serial nb (SEGD) U2: 13
· Exec Line Test IM: 188 Map grid
· Exec Transverse Test IM: 188 · easting (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 78
· Field test IM: 204 · northing (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 78
· Getting started IM: 184 Mapping
· Instrument test IM: 203 · line U1: 133
· main menu IM: 186 Marker
· Power-on IM: 184 · increment U1: 115
· results IM: 209 · Line Layout setup U1: 111
· running Line tests IM: 196 Marking, stop U1: 120
· running Transverse tests IM: 206 Mass
· Save Rcv Tilt model IM: 202 · acceleration, monitoring U1: 366
· Self-test IM: 185 · overload U2: 98
· Set general parameters IM: 187, · velocity, monitoring U1: 366
IM: 191 · warning U2: 98
· Set LT position IM: 187, IM: 189
Master
· Set Test Limits IM: 187, IM: 193
· oscillator, LCI TM: 15
· Tap test IM: 188, IM: 215
Max
LTO address, changing IM: 118
· number of FDUs IM: 174, IM: 175
LXIU. See Laser link · number of traces U3: 222
· of max, Aux (SEGD) U2: 22
M · of max, Seis (SEGD) U2: 22
MAC address U1: 64 · speed U1: 309
· speed, scale U1: 280
MACHA U2: 113
Media
Macha blaster U1: 63
· copy U3: 14
Main
Meter
· window TM: 45
· calibration TM: 48
Maintenance · reset TM: 47
· field electronics TM: 97
Min
· Field equipment TM: 15
· High Drive U1: 389
· TCXO on LCI board TM: 15
· Low Drive U1: 388
Management
Minimum
· sessions U1: 39
· Phase U1: 76
· time U1: 76
· phase filter U3: 52
Manual
Minute of day (SEGD) U2: 13
· Export U1: 325
· Look U1: 128
Mode
· display, plotter U1: 441
· noise editing U1: 237
· LT428 display IM: 191
· scale, Line window U1: 103
· operating U1: 221
· shooting U1: 223

December 4, 2006
Index
Model · DSD U1: 344

· ellipsoidal U1: 276 · DSD, Navigation U1: 242
· geoidal U1: 276 Networking
Monoline U1: 133 · 428XL local network IM: 32
Mounting · Client computer IM: 90
· parts IM: 43 · TMS428 TM: 38
Mouse Next
· Buttons U1: 19 · Plot U1: 425
· buttons U1: 19 · record, playback U1: 336
· Centre button U1: 95 NFS
Move · disk setup U1: 330
· alarm U1: 308 · server U1: 65
MRU U1: 66 No
Multi-component · move U1: 308
· recording (SPS) U2: 59, U2: 72 · reply U1: 307
Multi-DPG configuration IM: 38 No. sub arrays, nom depth (SPS) U2: 76
Multimodule IM: 40 Noise
Multiple · Editing U1: 234
· tests U1: 172 · editing, setup U1: 233
Multi-screen IM: 101 · elimination type (SEGD) U2: 21
Mute · Instrument test U1: 168
· Sensor test U1: 170
· channel U1: 121
· Test limit U1: 109
· test record result recovery U3: 75
N · test, FDU (Instrument) U3: 128
Name · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 71
· feature, colour map U1: 312 · test, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 74
· Log in U1: 34 · test, Sensor (FDU) U3: 147
· plotter U1: 64 Noise test
· property, query builder U1: 314 · DSU U3: 171
· user U1: 52 Noisy
NAS · stacks, number of U2: 33
· archiving system U1: 65 · Trace % U1: 236
· Rescue mode IM: 140 · trace percentage (SEGD) U2: 21
NAS system IM: 128 Nominal towing depth U2: 76
· connecting IM: 130 Normal
· IP address on user network IM: 133 · acquisition U1: 391
· reinstalling IM: 137 · mode, LT428 display IM: 191
· shock-mount parts IM: 129 Normalization
· user network IM: 136 · plotter U1: 437
Navigation Northing, COG U2: 100
· shooting mode U1: 242 Notch U1: 439
Nb · frequency (SEGD) U2: 18
· Sensor/Rcv Pt, LT428 IM: 191 · playback filter U3: 20
Network Num

December 4, 2006
Index
· Sensor Type, LT428 IM: 191 · Line U1: 80

Number of Offset
· Auxes (SEGD) U2: 19 · removing U3: 187
· blocks of General Trailer (SEGD) · test U3: 130
U2: 15 · test, Sensor U3: 149
· channel sets per record (SEGD) U2: 14 · to coord. location (SPS) U2: 57,
· channels (SPS) U2: 59, U2: 71 U2: 67
· channels in this channel set (SEGD) On
U2: 17 · Line U1: 80
· dead Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 19 Only
· DPG modules U1: 63 · errors, TMS428 report TM: 54
· FDUs between LAUs, max IM: 174, Open
IM: 175 · session U1: 32
· FDUs in link, LT428 IM: 218 · Test plan TM: 46
· geophones per trace U3: 188 · test report, TMS428 TM: 62
· live Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 19 Operating
· plotters U1: 64 · mode U1: 221
· sample skew 32 byte extensions (SEGD) Operation
U2: 14 · table U1: 192
· samples in trace (SEGD) U2: 19 Option
· samples per trace (SEGD) U2: 27 · button U1: 19
· Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 19
Options
· splices, Fibre Optics TM: 203
· Slip-sweep U1: 221, U1: 248
· stacks low (SEGD) U2: 33
· stacks noisy (SEGD) U2: 33
Orientation
· LT428 IM: 198
· subscans exponent (SEGD) U2: 17
· plotter page U1: 440
· traces (SEGD) U2: 19
· test, LAUL (TMS428) TM: 90
· traces, max U3: 222
· windows (SEGD) U2: 21 Oscillator
· windows, noise editing U1: 235 · local, testing (TMS428) TM: 88
Numeric · Master (LCI) TM: 15
· view, Line window U1: 101 Output
· view, normal acquisition,VE432 · Dump U1: 203
U1: 395 · stack U1: 203
Nunits, len, width (SPS) U2: 60, U2: 61, · Xdump U1: 204
U2: 73, U2: 74 Overload U2: 98
Nut
· wing, replacing TM: 142 P
Nyquist U1: 75 Page
· setup, plotter U1: 440
O Parallel
· geophone U3: 189
Observer
· comments, setup U1: 239
Parameters
· loading (Log) U1: 410
· privileges U1: 38
· saving (Log) U1: 410
Off

December 4, 2006
Index
· system, editing U1: 410 · record U1: 334

Parts Plot U1: 440
· DSU-428, spare TM: 106 · abort U1: 426
· FDU, spare TM: 100 · Again U1: 425
· LAUL, spare TM: 110 · Next U1: 425
· LAUX, spare TM: 117 Plotter
Password · AGC U1: 436
· expiry date U1: 37 · ethernet, installing IM: 106
· opening a session U1: 34 · licence U1: 61
Paste U1: 28 · mode, display U1: 441
Patch · name U1: 64
· client IM: 97 · number of U1: 64
· server IM: 77 · processing U1: 436
Path · scaling U1: 438
· colour U1: 99 · type U1: 64
PC Plug
· Handheld, installing IM: 151 · cleaning IM: 162, TM: 151
PCMCIA · process type, FO U1: 201
· tools U1: 389 Plug, FM4
Peak · ST+ cable TM: 167
· distortion U2: 96, U2: 98 · WPSR cable TM: 172
· force U2: 96, U2: 98 Point
· phase U2: 96, U2: 98 · Number (Marker) U1: 114
Peg (see Topographic stake) Point (to) U1: 20
Peripherals Point Code
· Install setup U1: 63 · DSU channels U1: 140
Permission U1: 38 · FDU channels U1: 107
Phase U2: 96, U2: 98 · SPS U2: 63, U2: 77
· angle (SEGD) U2: 16 Point Depth (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 77
· Control (SEGD) U2: 16 Point Index U2: 96, U2: 98, U2: 100
· error (Instrument test) U1: 169 · SPS U2: 63, U2: 64, U2: 77, U2: 81
· Linear U1: 75 Point number U2: 96, U2: 98
· Minimum U1: 76 · COG U2: 100
· test, FDU U3: 131 · SPS U2: 63, U2: 64, U2: 77, U2: 81
· test, TMS428 TM: 75 Point record
Phase test · description (SPS) U2: 77
· DSU U3: 172 · specification (SPS) U2: 63
Pilot Polarity
· Aux channel U1: 204 · 3C U3: 211
· basic signal U1: 363 · battery, test (TMS428) TM: 84
· length, other vibrator systems U1: 446 · FDU input IM: 288
Pilot length (SEGD) U2: 22 · SEGD U2: 14
Plate Warning U2: 98 · test, FDU (TMS428) TM: 73
Playback · test, line power (TMS428) TM: 91
· filters U3: 19 Port

December 4, 2006
Index
· consumption, TMS428 TM: 87 Processing

· switching test (TMS428) TM: 90 · capacity U3: 221
· voltage, testing (TMS428) TM: 84 · Crossline spacing, plotter U1: 438
Portrait · filter, plotter U1: 439
· plotter U1: 440 · Geographic AGC, plotter U1: 437
Pos. proc. contractor (SPS) U2: 57, · Inline spacing, plotter U1: 438
U2: 67 · Normalization, plotter U1: 437
Positioning · plotter U1: 436
· contractor (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 67 · Time, exponential U1: 437
· layers U1: 271 · Window length (AGC) U1: 437
Post-plot date of issue (SPS) U2: 57, · Wz velocity, plotter U1: 437
U2: 66 Project code and description (SPS)
Power U2: 58, U2: 70
· connector, LAUL428 IM: 289 Projection U1: 316
· connector, LAUX IM: 290 · type (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 68
· polarity, line (TMS428) TM: 91 · type, setup U1: 275
· socket, replacing TM: 145 · zone (SPS) U2: 57, U2: 68
· test, LAU TM: 83 Projection Type setup
Power supply · Projection U1: 316
· field electronics IM: 173 Properties
Power-off · in graphic view, Line U1: 97
· Line, LT428 IM: 199 · Look, Line U1: 128
Power-on · object label U1: 311
· Line, LT428 IM: 199 · test plan TM: 52
· LT428 IM: 184 Property
· test, LT428 IM: 199 · name, query builder U1: 314
· Transverse, LT428 IM: 207 Protocol
Power-up · source controllers U2: 103
· TMS428 TM: 41 Pseudorandom
P-P bar/m,prim/bubble (SPS) U2: 76 · basic sweep signal U1: 355
Preamplifier Pulse
· 0 dB gain U3: 89 · basic sweep signal U1: 354
· 12 dB gain U3: 118 · test, FDU U3: 142
Pressure Overload U2: 98
Prestack within field units (SEGD) Q
U2: 21 Q200 IM: 181
Preview · Backup IM: 158
· colour mapped attributes U1: 312 · Battery IM: 154
Privileges U1: 38 · connecting IM: 183
Process · Getting started IM: 184
· Type setup, generating U1: 214 · Installing IM: 155
· type, Log shooting setup U1: 417 · quick guide IM: 152
· type, overview U1: 200 · Reinstalling IM: 159
· Type, SEGD U2: 21 QC
· Type, setup U1: 217 · choice, vib U1: 369

December 4, 2006
Index
· data (How to view) U1: 96 · traceability, FDU (TMS428) TM: 78

· extended, vib U1: 369 · traceability, LAU (TMS428) TM: 94
· limits, vib U1: 368 · user info (TMS428) TM: 93
Quadrant bearing of H256 (SPS) U2: 58, Ready
U2: 70 · fleet U1: 230
Quality Re-assembling
· COG radius threshold U1: 277 · DSU TM: 107
· Vib position accuracy U1: 279 Reassembling
· warning setup U1: 277 · FDU TM: 102
Quality Control · LAUL TM: 113
· check records (SPS) U2: 62 · LAUR TM: 125
Query · LAUX TM: 119
· add to U1: 315 · LRU TM: 133
· builder U1: 314 · TFOI TM: 194
Quick · TREP TM: 140
· Launch, TMS428 tests TM: 53 Reboot
· server U1: 41
Receiver
R · code (Rx) tables (SPS) U2: 60
R,S,X file quality control (SPS) U2: 62 · index (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 82
Radio · line number (SEGD) U2: 27
· delay U1: 386 · point easting (SEGD) U2: 28
· delay, measuring U1: 384 · point elevation (SEGD) U2: 28
· Delay, VE432 U1: 382 · point index (SEGD) U2: 27
· management, vib U1: 365 · point northing (SEGD) U2: 28
· telemetry, deployment IM: 221 · point number (SEGD) U2: 27
· telemetry, setting up U1: 147 · point, skipping U1: 126, U1: 135
Radius · section U1: 106
· alarm, distance to camp U1: 308 · section, marking U1: 113
· alarm, distance to recording unit · Tilt model, LT428 IM: 202
U1: 308 · Type Layout, LT428 IM: 191
· shooting setup, Log U1: 417 Record
Random · disk, setup U1: 79
· basic sweep signal U1: 355 · identification U2: 96, U2: 98
Rate · identification (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 64
· refresh U1: 48 · identification, COG U2: 100
· sample U1: 74 · Instrument tests U1: 165
Raw · last, playback U1: 335
· Impulsive Stack process type U1: 208 · length (SEGD) U2: 22
· process type, Correlation U1: 209 · length, Intrument tests U1: 168
· servo control U1: 388 · length, process type U1: 201
· Vib Stack process type U1: 212 · next, playback U1: 336
Rcv · test result recovery U3: 73
· Nb Increment, LT428 IM: 190 · type (SEGD) U2: 14
Read Record length U3: 222
· SEGD U2: 14

December 4, 2006
Index
Recovering · Power socket TM: 145

· instrument test records U3: 73 · TFOI board TM: 193
Redhat · XDEV sockets TM: 146
· installing, server IM: 50 Reply
Reference · alarm U1: 307
· resistors, calibration U3: 87 Report
· signal, DSD U1: 366 · errors only (TMS428) TM: 54
· voltage U3: 89 · generate, query U1: 315
· voltage, calibration U3: 87 · test, TMS428 TM: 60
· voltage, FDU (TMS428) TM: 76 Repository U1: 60
Refraction Rescue
· delay, process type U1: 202 · NAS system IM: 140
· delay, SEGD U2: 20 Reset
Refresh · button U1: 26
· rate U1: 48 · Meter TM: 47
Registering · queries and classification U1: 313
· user U1: 37 · Tester Unit TM: 47
Reinstalling Resistance
· TMS428 software TM: 34 · error (SEGD) U2: 29
Relation record · high limit (SEGD) U2: 29
· description (SPS) U2: 81 · input U3: 93
· specification (SPS) U2: 64 · low limit (SEGD) U2: 29
Release · Sensor test U1: 170
· tape drive U1: 333 · test network U3: 102
Remote · test, FDU U3: 126
· network IM: 26, IM: 27, IM: 28 · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 73
· user U1: 33 · test, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 74
· user, installing IM: 88 · test, Sensor U3: 150
Rename · value (SEGD) U2: 29
· layers (Positioning) U1: 286 Response, Channel filter U3: 31
Rendering Restart
· global, plotter U1: 441 · server U1: 41
· setup, plotter U1: 440 Retrieval
Repairing · Wireline telemetry U1: 81
· ST cable TM: 152 Return
· ST+ cable TM: 152 · Pilot U1: 366
· WPSR cable TM: 158 · signal, DSD U1: 365
Replacing · sweep, vib U1: 366
· cable, LAUL TM: 111 Reverse
· cable, TFOI TM: 187 · button U1: 26
· connector, Fibre Optics TM: 195 Reversed
· FDU connector TM: 142 · Marking option U1: 115
· ground wing nut TM: 142 Revision
· indicators TM: 148 · SEGD U1: 78
· Line & Trans sockets TM: 143 Revision Number (SEGD) U2: 15

December 4, 2006
Index
Rewind · histograms U1: 103

· tape U1: 333 Scaling
Right · plotter U1: 438
· click, Line window U1: 97 Scan Type
Role U1: 38 · Header (SEGD) U2: 17
Run · Number (SEGD) U2: 26
· LED, testing (TMS428) TM: 85 · per record (SEGD) U2: 14
· TMS428 tests TM: 47 Scrollbar U1: 20
Running Sealing TM: 150
· Line tests, LT428 IM: 196 Searching
· tests, TMS428 TM: 58 · LT428 results IM: 211
· Transverse tests, LT428 IM: 206 Second
RVT300 IM: 146 · Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 18
· of minute (SEGD) U2: 13
S SEGD
· 3C polarity U3: 211
S N (serial number) · Code U1: 109
· detour U1: 119 · format U2: 11
Sample · revision, choosing U1: 78
· conversion to mV U3: 185 · setup U1: 78
· int. Record Len. (SPS) U2: 59 · Trace Blocking U1: 329
· int., Record Length (SPS) U2: 71 Seis traces, number of U2: 19
· interpolation U3: 197 Seismic
· Rate U1: 74 · datum (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 78
· Rate, LT428 IM: 191 · instrument header records (SPS) U2: 71
· skew extensions, number of U2: 14 · receiver header records (SPS) U2: 73
· skew, SEGD U2: 26 · setup, Operation U1: 221
· to mV conversion factor U2: 33 · source header records (SPS) U2: 74
Sample Rate · trace scaling U1: 438
· SEGD U2: 19 Seismonitor U1: 94
Samples · gain U1: 94
· in trace, number of U2: 19 · Sensor test U1: 173
· per trace, number of U2: 27 Select U1: 20
Save · vib (Look) U1: 373
· Rcv Tilt Model, LT428 IM: 202 Selecting
· Thresh U1: 238 · graphical objects U1: 28
Saving · in graphic view U1: 95
· automatic, TMS428 reports TM: 53 · table cells U1: 27
· results, LT428 IM: 212 · text U1: 27
· system parameters U1: 411 · traces to plot U1: 433
Scalability Selection
· installation settings U1: 67 · create U1: 315
Scale Self-test
· button U1: 20 · LAU (TMS428) TM: 82
· factor (SPS) U2: 58, U2: 69 · LT428 IM: 185

December 4, 2006
Index
Senior · NFS U1: 65

· Observer, privileges U1: 38 · software, installing IM: 70
Sensor · start/stop U1: 41
· Coulour code U1: 88 Servo
· Distortion test U1: 171 · input U1: 387
· Leakage test U1: 170 · setting U1: 387
· Noise test U1: 170 Session
· num/Rcv pnt, LT428 IM: 191 · manager U1: 39
· Resistance test U1: 170 · opening U1: 32
· Seismonitor U1: 173 Set
· sensitivity (SEGD) U2: 32 · channel, number per record U1: 78
· show/hide U1: 88 · DSD U1: 378
· test limits U1: 108 · Servo U1: 387
· tests U1: 169 Sets, channel U2: 14
· tests, CMRR U3: 158 Settings
· tests, Distortion U3: 163 · browser U1: 34
· tests, FDU U3: 147 · help U1: 34
· tests, Impulse U3: 161 Setup
· tests, Leakage U3: 153 · Crew, vibrators U1: 343
· tests, Look U1: 128 · Observer comments U1: 239
· tests, Noise (FDU) U3: 147 SFL
· tests, Offset U3: 149 · Spread First Line U1: 217
· tests, Resistance U3: 150 SFN
· tests, Tilt U3: 156 · Spread First Number U1: 217
· Tilt model U1: 171
SGD-S
· Tilt test U1: 171
· Blaster cable IM: 292
· Type, LT428 IM: 191
SGDS U2: 114
Sensor Type
· DSU channels U1: 139
SGS
· shooting system U1: 63
· FDU channels U1: 108
· Number (sensor tests) U2: 28 Shallow
· SEGD code U2: 27 · Sequencer U2: 111
Sequencer Shallow blaster U1: 63
· Shallow U2: 111 Shock
Sequential · mount parts IM: 43
· time, plotter U1: 441 Shock-mount
· trace, plotter U1: 441 · Blade 2000 IM: 44
Serial · Blade 2500 IM: 43
· number, changing (TMS428) TM: 95 · Cartridge drive IM: 110
· number, detour U1: 119 · NAS system IM: 129
Series Shooter U1: 240
· geophones U3: 189 Shooting U1: 240
Server · Navigation mode U1: 242
· administration U1: 36 · setup, Log U1: 416
· FTP U1: 65 · system U1: 63
· log on to U1: 32 · systems, interfacing U2: 103

December 4, 2006
Index
Shortcut Slip
· Line window U1: 97 · time U1: 248
Shortcuts · time, selecting U1: 232
· tests TM: 50 Slip-sweep IM: 38, U1: 248
Shot · enable U1: 221
· automation U1: 222 · mode used (SEGD) U2: 22
· Depth, charge len. (SPS) U2: 62 Snaking U1: 115
· depth, charge len. (SPS) U2: 75 · DSU U1: 141
· Id U1: 215 · FDU U1: 136
· Id, Log shooting setup U1: 417 Software
· increment U1: 227 · e428, licence U1: 61
· Nb U2: 98 · Handheld PC, installing IM: 151
· number (SEGD) U2: 19 · installing, TMS428 TM: 30
· starting U1: 196 · New release TM: 38
ShotPro · patch (client) IM: 97
· install U1: 63 · patch (server) IM: 77
· interfacing U2: 107 · updating U1: 184
Show · version (SEGD) U2: 22
· layer (Positioning) U1: 286 Software, installing
Shutdown · GoBook IM: 155
· server U1: 41 · server IM: 70
Signal · Solaris IM: 63
· return sweep U1: 366 Soil, drill method (SPS) U2: 62, U2: 75
Similarity Solaris installation IM: 63
· test, radio U1: 366 Source
Simultaneous mode U3: 221 · aux nb (SEGD) U2: 22
Single · code (Sx) tables (SPS) U2: 61
· mode, recording specifications U3: 221 · COG file U2: 100
Size · controller, time management U1: 76
· external header U1: 78 · easting (SEGD) U2: 22
· vert. stk fold (SPS) U2: 61 · elevation (SEGD) U2: 22
Size, vert. stk fold (SPS) U2: 74 · Explosive U1: 227
Skew, sample, number of extensions · Line U1: 216
U2: 14 · Line Number (SEGD) U2: 16
· northing (SEGD) U2: 22
Skip
· Point Index U1: 192
· channel U1: 131
· Point Index (SEGD) U2: 16
Skipping · Point Number (SEGD) U2: 16
· lines (spread description) U1: 126 · point setup, generating U1: 219
· receiver points U1: 126 · point, setup U1: 215
· receiver points (detour) U1: 135 · Receiver U1: 216
Slave · Set Number (SEGD) U2: 16
· 428XL U2: 104 · type, setup U1: 226
· DPG U1: 344 Spacing
Sleep · crossline (AGC) U1: 438
· LRU U1: 162 · DSU3 IM: 175

December 4, 2006
Index
· FDU IM: 174 · Impulsive, process type U1: 208

· inline (AGC) U1: 438 · Output button U1: 203
· LAU IM: 174 · Vibroseismic, process type U1: 212
Spare Stacking Fold U2: 99
· DSU-428 parts TM: 106 · SEGD U2: 21
· FDU parts TM: 100 Stacks, number of
· LAUL parts TM: 110 · Low U2: 33
· LAUX parts TM: 117 · Noisy U2: 33
Specifications Stake (see Topographic stake)
· 428XL U3: 215 Standard
· Instrument tests U3: 227 · process type U1: 201
· laser link IM: 281 Start
· TMS428 TM: 25 · colour map scale U1: 312
Speed · time, plotter U1: 442
· alarm U1: 310 Starting
· maximum U1: 309 · 428 server U1: 41
· maximum, scale U1: 280 Static correction (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 77
Spike Statics U3: 197
· editing U1: 256 Statistics
Split · VE432 U1: 398
· line U1: 115 Status
Spread · codes U1: 397
· absolute U1: 123 · DSD, get U1: 365
· generic U1: 125 Step
· number (SEGD) U2: 19 · negative U1: 246
· setup U1: 122 · Vibroseismic source U1: 229
· SFL U1: 217 Stiffness (ground) U2: 96, U2: 98
· SFN U1: 217
Stop
· Superspread U1: 218
· button, Operation U1: 196
· Superspread, Line window U1: 124
· Marking U1: 120
· type U1: 216
· on error, TMS428 TM: 53
· type (SEGD) U2: 20
Stopping
SPS
· 428 server U1: 41
· Sercel (over 10000 traces) U2: 92
Streamer cable number (SEGD) U2: 18
SPS-like file format U2: 95
String
SST
· gain, geophone U3: 189
· Test plan TM: 51
· group, geophone U3: 193
ST cable · impedance, geophone U3: 189
· Repairing TM: 152 · wiring, geophones U3: 194
ST+ cable Subarrays, number of U2: 76
· Repairing TM: 152
Subscan exponent U2: 17
Stack
Superspread U1: 218
· Correlation after, process type U1: 211
· Line window U1: 124
· Correlation before, process type
U1: 209 Support
· customer U1: 71

December 4, 2006
Index
Surface Tap
· elevation, reference U1: 276 · test, LT428 IM: 188, IM: 215
· elevation, SPS U2: 63 Tape
Surface elevation · copy U3: 14
· SPS U2: 78 · drive address
Survey 3592 IM: 122
· description U1: 105 FUJI 3x90, changing IM: 112
· setup U1: 104 FUJI 3x90, displaying IM: 113
Swath LTO IM: 118
· backup setup U1: 79 · drive, install U1: 65
· first line (SEGD) U2: 19 · drives, supported IM: 111
· first number (SEGD) U2: 19 · Label U1: 328
· Id U1: 216 · label (SEGD) U2: 22
Sweep · Number U1: 328
· basic signal (Acquisition type) U1: 363 · number of files U1: 328
· freq start, end (SPS) U2: 61 · number, SEGD U2: 22
· frequency start,end (SPS) U2: 75 · setup, Export window U1: 328
· length (SEGD) U2: 22 · type, format, density (SPS) U2: 59,
· length, other vibrator systems U1: 446 U2: 71
· return signal U1: 366 Tape/disk identifier (SPS) U2: 57,
· slip time U1: 248 U2: 66
· slip, enable U1: 221 Taper U1: 346
· type, length (SPS) U2: 61, U2: 75 · length start, end (SPS) U2: 61, U2: 75
Switching TB
· port (TMS428) TM: 90 · window, process type U1: 202
Sync · window, SEGD U2: 19
· high line U1: 364 Tb to T0 time (SEGD) U2: 21
Syntax (see Description) TCXO, LCI board TM: 15
Synthetic Template
· file format U2: 41 · TMS428 tester TM: 40
· file syntax U1: 181 Terminal
· Signal type U1: 181 · Linux IM: 85
System · Solaris IM: 85
· shooting U1: 63 Test
· tools, troubleshooting IM: 85 · Automatic U1: 224
· cable calibration TM: 48
T · customizing (TMS428) TM: 63
· functions U1: 164
T0 · functions, FDU U3: 121
· mode U1: 371 · generator U3: 93
· Repeat Times U1: 370 · Instrument, FDU U3: 126
· setup U1: 370 · limit
Table battery U1: 93
· how to select U1: 27 Continuity U1: 109
· operation U1: 192 Leakage U1: 109

December 4, 2006
Index
Noise U1: 109 · test, theory U3: 177

Sensor U1: 108 · value (SEGD) U2: 29
Tilt U1: 109 Tilt angle
· limit file format U2: 37 · DSU3 trace correction formula U3: 209
· limits, LT428 IM: 187, IM: 193 Time U2: 99
· multiple U1: 172 · delay, FTB-SOD (SPS) U2: 59, U2: 72
· network, Resistance U3: 102 · Division Multiplex, LRU U1: 155
· record result recovery U3: 73 · domain, correlation U3: 182
· Record, type (SEGD) U2: 19 · exponential, plotter U1: 437
· running, TMS428 TM: 58 · Interpolation U1: 442
· Sensor, FDU U3: 147 · Length, plotter U1: 442
· setup U1: 164 · listening U1: 201
· shortcut (Topographic view) U1: 89, · management U1: 76
U1: 91 · Sequential, plotter U1: 441
· Spread U1: 166 · SPS U2: 63, U2: 79
Tested · Start, plotter U1: 442
· Line Nb, LT428 IM: 190 Time break
Tester · SEGD U2: 20
· reset TM: 47 · window, SEGD U2: 26
Text TMS408
· box U1: 20 · Connecting an FDU link TM: 55
· how to select U1: 27 · Connecting an LAUL TM: 56
TFOI · Connecting an LAUX TM: 57
· board, replacing TM: 193 · Grounding TM: 28
· cable TM: 187 · Installation TM: 28
· disassembly instructions TM: 187 TMS408 specifications
· reassembly instructions TM: 194 · Electrical TM: 27
Third Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 18 · Environmental TM: 27
Threshold · Physical TM: 27
· COG radius U1: 277 TMS428 U3: 86
· Hold/Var (SEGD) U2: 21 · customizing tests TM: 63
· Init U1: 237 · firmware update TM: 47
· Init Value, noise editing U1: 236 · main window TM: 45
· Load U1: 238 · software, installing TM: 30
· Save U1: 238 · specifications TM: 25
· type tables (SEGD) U2: 21 · Templates TM: 40
· type, other vibrator systems U1: 447 · test reports TM: 60
· updating (noise elimination) U1: 257 TMU428 U3: 86
Tilt Tn U1: 353
· correction, enable U1: 59, U1: 146 · basic sweep signal U1: 353
· error (SEGD) U2: 29 To channel (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 81
· limit (SEGD) U2: 29 To receiver (SPS) U2: 64, U2: 82
· Model U1: 171 Toggle
· test U1: 171, U3: 156 · button U1: 21
· Test limit U1: 109 Toolbar
· test, Field (TMS428) TM: 72

December 4, 2006
Index
· tests TM: 50 · LAU, write (TMS428) TM: 94

Tools Traces
· maintenance, field electronics TM: 98 · max number of U3: 222
· Meter and test cables calibration · per inch U1: 441
TM: 48 · total number of U2: 19
· PCMCIA U1: 389 Traces, number of
· Reset Meter TM: 47 · Aux U2: 19
· Reset Tester Unit TM: 47 · Dead seis U2: 19
· ST & ST+ cable repair TM: 152 · Live seis U2: 19
· ST+ FM4 plug replacement TM: 167 · Seismic U2: 19
· STSR FM4 plug replacement TM: 172 Tracking
· TMS428 TM: 47 · box, installing IM: 149
· USB key management IM: 86 · Positioning window U1: 295
· WPSR cable repair TM: 158 · vehicle setup U1: 280
· WPSR FM4 plug replacement TM: 172 Trailer, general U2: 15
Topographic Trans
· stake U1: 88 · socket, replacing TM: 143
· view U1: 86 Transfer
Total number of traces (SEGD) U2: 19 · to drive, spec U3: 221
Towing depth U2: 76 Transform
Trace · Hilbert U1: 358
· blocking U1: 329 Transmission
· Data block U2: 25 · Line port (TMS428) TM: 88
· edit (SEGD) U2: 26 · test IM: 208
· Low U1: 236 · test, Line (LT428) IM: 200
· Noisy percentage U1: 236 · Transverse port (TMS428) TM: 89
· Number (SEGD) U2: 26 · troubleshooting U1: 99
· number of samples in U2: 19 Transverse
· selecting, plot U1: 433 · connector, LAUX IM: 290
· Sequential, plotter U1: 441 · data rate U3: 221
Trace Header · port, transmission test (TMS428)
· Extension (SEGD) U2: 26 TM: 89
· Extension Block 1 (SEGD) U2: 27 · test, LT428 IM: 188
· Extension block 2 (SEGD) U2: 27 Transverse (LT428) IM: 208
· Extension block 3 (SEGD) U2: 29 TREP
· Extension block 4 (SEGD) U2: 30 · disassembly instructions TM: 139
· Extension block 5 (SEGD) U2: 30 · reassembly instructions TM: 140
· Extension block 6 (SEGD) U2: 31 Troubleshooting
· Extension block 7 (SEGD) U2: 32 · Line U1: 175
· Extensions (SEGD) U2: 18, U2: 27 · tools, system IM: 85
· SEGD U2: 26 · Transmission U1: 99
Traceability Type
· FDU, read (TMS428) TM: 78 · blaster U1: 63
· FDU, write (TMS428) TM: 78 · box, detour U1: 119
· field equipment U1: 100 · Model, Polarity (SPS) U2: 59, U2: 60,
· LAU, read (TMS428) TM: 94

December 4, 2006
Index
U2: 61, U2: 71, U2: 73, U2: 74 · info U1: 77

· of process (SEGD) U2: 21 · local IM: 25
· of source (SEGD) U2: 19 · name U1: 52
· plotter U1: 64 · registering U1: 37
· remote IM: 26, IM: 27, IM: 28
U Utilities
· LAU (TMS4028) TM: 92
Uninstalling
· patch (client) IM: 97
· patch (server) IM: 77 V
Unit VA (plotter) U1: 441
· serial number (SEGD) U2: 31 Values
· type (SEGD) U2: 31 · query builder U1: 315
Units Valve Overload U2: 98
· how to select U1: 95 Var/Hold U1: 237
· spacing X, Y (SPS) U2: 60, U2: 61, VE432
U2: 73, U2: 74 · DPG, connecting IM: 38
Unload · functions U1: 372
· tape U1: 333 · Version U2: 99
Unselect Vehicle
· in Line topographic view U1: 95 · Tracking box IM: 149
Update Velocity
· field U1: 85, U1: 170, U1: 171 · baseplate, monitoring U1: 366
Updating · mass, monitoring U1: 366
· firmware U1: 184 · plotter U1: 437
· firmware (TMS428) TM: 93 Version
· firmware, via XDEV IM: 81 · firmware, reading (TMS428) TM: 92
· Number of FDUs in link, LT428) Vertical
IM: 218 · datum description (SPS) U2: 57,
· TMS428 firmware TM: 47 U2: 68
Upgrade · Stack (SEGD) U2: 18
· firmware (TMS428) TM: 93 Vib
Upgrading · position accuracy U1: 279
· field electronics U1: 184 · position Easting U2: 96, U2: 98
· TMS428 firmware TM: 47 · position elevation U2: 96, U2: 98
· via XDEV, field electronics IM: 81 · position Northing U2: 96, U2: 98
Uphole · Status Code U2: 98
· time (SEGD) U2: 20 Vibrator
· time (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 78 · drive level (APS) U2: 96, U2: 98
Upload U1: 53 · fleet (APS) U2: 96, U2: 98
URL · number (APS) U2: 96, U2: 98
· opening a session U1: 33 · QC choice U1: 369
USB · QC limits U1: 368
· key IM: 86 · Radio management U1: 365
User · T0 U1: 370
· type U1: 63

December 4, 2006
Index
· type (SEGD) U2: 16 X

Vibroseis (SPS) U2: 61
View XDEV
· Graphic (normal acquisition) U1: 392 · connector, LAUL IM: 289
· Histogram U1: 103 · connector, LAUX IM: 291
· menu, TMS428 TM: 48 · socket, replacing TM: 146
· Numeric (normal acquisition) U1: 395 · upgrading field electronics IM: 81
· numeric, Line window U1: 101 Xdump
· topographic, line U1: 86 · Output button U1: 204
Viscosity (ground) U2: 96, U2: 98 Xmit
Voltage · test, Line ( LT428) IM: 200
· port (TMS428) TM: 84 · test, Transverse (LT428) IM: 208
· reference U3: 89
· reference, FDU (TMS428) TM: 76 Y
VP Year (SEGD) U2: 13
· grabbing radius U1: 278
· Id U1: 215
· to do, increment U1: 229 Z
Zeroed
W · channel U1: 121
Zeroing
Water
· Length (noise) U1: 236
· depth (SPS) U2: 63, U2: 78
· method (noise elimination) U1: 257
· gun (SPS) U2: 62
· noise editing type U1: 235
Watertightness TM: 150 · Taper Length (noise) U1: 235
Waypoint Zoom
· first U1: 281 · Line window U1: 96
Weathering thickness (SPS) U2: 62,
U2: 75
Wiggle U1: 441
Window
· Length, AGC U1: 437
· menu, TMS428 TM: 48
· Number of (noise) U1: 235
· TB U2: 19
· TB, process type U1: 202
Wing
· nut, replacing TM: 142
WPSR cable
· Repairing TM: 158
Write
· traceability, FDU (TMS428) TM: 78
· traceability, LAU (TMS428) TM: 94
· user info (TMS428) TM: 93
Wz Velocity, AGC U1: 437

December 4, 2006

En 428 User 1

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

En 428 User 1

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

428XL

Ref. No. 0311430 December 4, 2006

© 2005 Sercel. All Rights Reserved.

System status archive tool (File Packager). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

6 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

Battery view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 7

DSU3-428 in the Layout Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

8 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

The Download setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 9

The Noise Editing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

NFS disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 13

Source COG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

12 Other vibrator electronics

14 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

This chapter includes the following sections:

• Overview (page 16)

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 15

16 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

To start the server, if required, see Starting/stopping the 428XL server on

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 17

Terminology and conventions

Figure 1-1 Dialog box

Figure 1-2 Option button

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 19

20 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

• Check button: used to set a number of options. Unlike a radio button,

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 21

Working with 428XL windows

Conventions used in this section

22 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

Index box Text box 1 Text box 2

1. Double-clicking in the second row causes its content to appear in

Text box 1 Text box 2

Text box 1 Text box 2

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 23

24 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 25

List box List box

26 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

Selecting table rows

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 27

Selecting a graphical area

Copy And Paste

28 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

Drag and Drop

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 29

30 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

This chapter is intended for beginners. It describes how to

• Opening a user session (page 32)

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 31

Opening a user session

• Exit: used to close the 428XL Client application.

32 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

1. Choose the type of connection: “Local user” if you are opening a

34 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 35

The server Administration window

If you log on with Observer privileges, the Administration window

36 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1

Registering a new user